St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Queensland Urban Utilities

CONTRACT BW 70103-029-SPR107d
Pump Station Switchboard Replacement
SP043 St Conel Street Nudgee

ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARD

OPERATION and MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 1 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Queensland Urban Utilities

INDEX
1. Soft Starters (Emotron)
2. Graphic Display (Redlion)
3. Radio (Trio)
4. Level Transducer (Endress)
5. Pressure Transducer (Vega)
6. Miscellaneous
7. Drawings
8. Test Certificate

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 2 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

1. SOFT STARTERS

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 3 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Emotron MSF 2.0

Softstarter

Instruction manual
English

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 4 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Valid for the following softstarter models:

MSF 2.0

MSF 2.0
SOFTSTARTER
Instruction manual

Document number: 01-4135-01

Edition: r1
Date of release: 25-07-2007
© Copyright Emotron AB 2000-2007
Emotron retains the right to change specifications and illustrations in
the text, without prior notification. The contents of this document may
not be copied without the explicit permission of Emotron AB.

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 5 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Safety instructions

Safety Dismantling and scrapping

The softstarter should be installed in a cabinet or in an The enclosure of the softstarter is made of recyclable
electrical control room. material such as aluminium, iron and plastic. Legal
• The device must be installed by trained personnel. requirements for disposal and recycling of these materi-
als must be complied with.
• Disconnect all power sources before servicing.
The softstarter contains a number of components
• Always use standard commercial fuses, slow blow e.g. gl, demanding special treatment, such as thyristors for
gG types, to protect the wiring and prevent short example. The circuit boards contain small amounts of
circuiting. To protect the thyristors against short-circuit tin and lead. Legal requirements for the disposal and
currents, superfast semiconductor fuses can be used if recycling of these materials must be complied with.
preferred. The normal guarantee is valid even if superfast
semiconductor fuses are not used.
General warnings
Operating and maintenance WARNING! Make sure that all safety measures
personnel have been taken before starting the motor in
1. Read the whole Instruction Manual before install-
! order to avoid personal injury.
ing and putting the equipment into operation.
2. During all work (operation, maintenance, repairs, WARNING! Never operate the softstarter with
the front cover removed.
etc.) observe the switch-off procedures given in this
instruction as well as any other operating
!
instruction for the driven machine or system. See
Emergency below. WARNING! Make sure that all safety measures
have been taken before switching on the power
3. The operator must avoid any working methods ! supply.
which reduce the safety of the device.
4. The operator must do what he can to ensure that
no unauthorised person is working on the device.
5. The operator must immediately report any changes
to the device which reduce its safety to the user.
6. The user must undertake all necessary measures to
operate the device in perfect condition only.

Installation of spare parts

We expressly point out that any spare parts and acces-
sories not supplied by us have also not been tested or
approved by us.
Installing and/or using such products can have a nega-
tive effect on the characteristics designed for your
device. The manufacturer is not liable for damage aris-
ing as a result of using non-original parts and accesso-
ries.

Emergency
You can switch the device off at any time with the
mains switch connected before the softstarter (both
motor and control supply voltage must be switched
off ).

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 1
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 6 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2 Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 7 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Contents
1. General information ....................................... 5 8. Functional description................................. 43
1.1 How to use the Instruction Manual.......................... 5 8.1 General settings ...................................................... 44
1.2 Integrated safety systems ........................................ 5 8.2 Motor data ............................................................... 45
1.3 Safety measures ....................................................... 5 8.3 Motor protection...................................................... 46
1.4 Notes to the Instruction Manual .............................. 5 8.4 Parameter set handling .......................................... 51
1.5 Type number.............................................................. 5 8.5 Autoreset ................................................................. 52
1.6 Standards .................................................................. 6 8.6 Serial communication............................................. 54
1.7 Tests in accordance with norm EN 60204 8.7 Operation settings................................................... 55
standard..................................................................... 6 8.8 Process protection .................................................. 69
1.8 Transport and packing.............................................. 6 8.9 I/O settings .............................................................. 77
1.9 Unpacking MSF-310 and larger types ..................... 6 8.10 View operation......................................................... 91
1.10 Glossary ..................................................................... 7 8.11 Alarm list .................................................................. 94
2. Description...................................................... 9 8.12 Softstarter data ....................................................... 95

2.1 Background theory.................................................... 9 9. Protection and alarm ................................... 97

2.2 Reduced voltage starting........................................ 10 9.1 Alarm codes............................................................. 97
2.3 Other starting methods........................................... 12 9.2 Alarm actions........................................................... 97
2.4 Use of softstarters with torque control .................. 13 9.3 Reset........................................................................ 97
3. Mounting ...................................................... 15 9.4 Alarm overview ........................................................ 98

3.1 Installation of the softstarter in a cabinet............. 15 10. Troubleshooting ......................................... 101

4. Connections ................................................. 19 10.1 Fault, cause and solution ..................................... 101

4.1 Connecting mains and motor cables ..................... 20 11. Maintenance .............................................. 105
4.2 Control Connection ................................................. 24 11.1 Regular maintenance ........................................... 105
4.3 Minimum wiring....................................................... 25
4.4 Wiring examples ...................................................... 25 12. Options........................................................ 107
12.1 Serial communication........................................... 107
5. How to get started....................................... 27
12.2 Fieldbus systems................................................... 107
5.1 Checklist .................................................................. 27 12.3 External control panel........................................... 107
5.2 Applications ............................................................. 27 12.4 Terminal clamp...................................................... 108
5.3 Motor data ............................................................... 28
5.4 Start and stop.......................................................... 28 13. Technical data............................................ 109
5.5 Setting the start command..................................... 29 13.1 Electrical specifications ........................................ 109
5.6 Viewing the motor current ...................................... 29 13.2 General electrical specifications.......................... 114
5.7 Starting .................................................................... 29 13.3 Fuses and power losses ....................................... 115
13.4 Mechanical specifications including mechanical
6. Applications and functions selection ........ 31 drawings ................................................................ 116
6.1 Softstarter rating according to AC53a ................... 31 13.5 Derating at higher temperature ........................... 117
6.2 Softstarter rating according to AC53b ................... 31 13.6 Environmental conditions..................................... 117
6.3 The Applications Rating List ................................... 32 13.7 Standards .............................................................. 117
6.4 The Application Functions List ............................... 34 13.8 Power- and signal connectors. ............................. 118
6.5 Special conditions................................................... 36 13.9 Semi-conductor fuses ........................................... 119

7. Operation of the softstarter........................ 39 14. Set-up menu list ......................................... 121

7.1 General description of user interface .................... 39
7.2 Control panel ........................................................... 39
7.3 LED indication ......................................................... 40
7.4 The menu structure................................................. 40
7.5 The keys................................................................... 40
7.6 Control panel lock ................................................... 41
7.7 Overview of softstarter operation and parameter set-
up ............................................................................. 42

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 3
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 8 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4 Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 9 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

1. General information
This manual describes the Emotron Softstarter MSF 2.0. • Personnel safety
• Product disposal
1.1 How to use the Instruction • Environmental protection

Manual NOTE! The safety measures must remain in force at all

This instruction manual tells you how to install and operate times. Should questions or uncertainties arise, please
the softstarter MSF 2.0. Read the whole Instruction Manual contact your local sales outlet.
before installing and putting the unit into operation.
Once you are familiar with the softstarter, you can operate it
from the control panel by referring to chapter 5. page 27. 1.4 Notes to the Instruction
This chapter describes all the functions and possible settings.
Manual
1.2 Integrated safety systems NOTE: Additional information as an aid to avoiding
The device is equipped with a protection system which problems.
reacts to:
• Over temperature CAUTION: Failure to follow these instructions
can result in malfunction or damage to the
• Voltage unbalance ! softstarter.
• Over- and under voltage
• Phase reversal WARNING: Failure to follow these instructions
can result in serious injury to the user in addition
• Phase loss
to serious damage to the softstarter.
• Motor overload protection thermal and PTC.
• Motor load monitor, protecting machine or process Important
maximum or minimum alarm For all enquiries and spare parts orders, please quote the cor-
• Starts per hour limitation rect name of the device and serial number to ensure that
your inquiry or order is dealt with correctly and swiftly.
The softstarter is equipped with a connection for protective
earth (PE).
All MSF 2.0 softstarters are IP 20 enclosed types, except 1.5 Type number
MSF-1000 and MSF-1400 which are delivered as open Fig. 1, page 5 gives an example of the type code number
chassis IP00. used for an Emotron MSF Softstarter. With this code
number the exact type of the softstarter can be determined.
This identification will be required for type specific informa-
1.3 Safety measures tion when mounting and installing. The code number is
These instructions are a constituent part of the device and located on the product label, on the front of the unit.
must be:
MSF -017 525 2 C V N
• Available to competent personnel at all times.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
• Read prior to installation of the device.
• Observed with regard to safety, warnings and informa- Fig. 1 Type number.
tion given.
The tasks in these instructions are described so that they can
be understood by people trained in electrical engineering.
Such personnel must have appropriate tools and testing
instruments available. Such personnel must have been
trained in safe working methods.
The safety measures laid down in DIN standard VDE 0100
must be guaranteed.
The user must obtain any general and local operating per-
mits and meet any requirements regarding:

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 General information 5

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 10 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 1 1.8 Transport and packing

Configuration The device is packed in a carton or plywood box for delivery.
Position Description The outer packaging can be recycled. The devices are care-
parameter
fully checked and packed before dispatch, but transport
1 Softstarter type MSF 2.0 type, Fixed damage cannot be ruled out.
2 Motor current 017-1400 A Check on receipt
Mains supply 525 V Check that the goods are complete as listed on the delivery
3
voltage 690 V note, see type no. etc. on the rating plate.

4
Control supply 2=100-240 V Is the packaging damaged?
voltage 5=380-500 V Check the goods for damage (visual check).
C=Standard, no external
5
Control panel
control panel
If you have cause for complaint
option If the goods have been damaged during transport:
H=External control panel
Coated boards -=No coated boards • Contact the transport company or the supplier immedi-
6 ately.
option V=Coated boards
N=No COM included • Keep the packaging (for inspection by the transport
Communication S=RS232/485 included company or for returning the device).
7
option D=DeviceNet included
P=Profibus included
Packaging for returning the device
Pack the device so that it will resist shock and impact.

Intermediate storage
1.6 Standards After delivery or after it has been dismounted, the device can
The device is manufactured in accordance with these regula- be stored before further use in a dry room.
tions:
• IEC 60947-4-2
1.9 Unpacking MSF-310 and
• EN 60204-1, Safety of Machinery, Electrical equipment
of machines, part 1, General requirements and VDE larger types
0113. The MSF 2.0 softstarter is attached to the plywood box/
• EN 61000-6-4, EMC, Emission standard for industrial loading stool by screws, and the softstarter must be
environments unpacked as follows:

• EN 61000-6-3, EMC, Emission standard for residential, 1. Open only the securing plates at the bottom of the box
commercial and light-industrial environments (bend downwards). Then lift up the box from the load-
ing stool, both top and sides in one piece.
• EN 61000-6-2, EMC, Immunity for industrial environ-
ments 2. Loosen the three (3) screws on the front cover of the
softstarter unit, down by the lower logo.
• GOST
3. Push up the front cover about 20 mm so that the front
• UL 508 cover can be removed.
4. Remove the two (2) mounting screws at the bottom of
1.7 Tests in accordance with the softstarter.

norm EN 60204 standard 5. Lift up the softstarter unit at the bottom about 10 mm
and then push backwards about 20 mm so that the soft-
Before leaving the factory, the device was subjected to the starter can be removed from the mounting hooks* at the
following tests: top. The hooks are placed under the bottom plate and
• Through connection of earthing system: cannot be removed until the softstarter is pulled out.
a) visual inspection. 6. Loosen the two screws (2) for the mounting hooks and
b) check that earthing wire is firmly connected. remove the hooks.
• Insulation 7. The hooks are used as an upper support for mounting
• Voltage the softstarter.
• Function

6 General information Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 11 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Fig. 2 Unpacking MSF-310 and larger models.

1.10 Glossary

1.10.1 Abbreviations
In this manual the following abbreviations are used:

Table 2 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Description
FLC Full load current
DOL Direct on-line

1.10.2 Definitions
In this manual the following definitions for current, voltage,
power, torque and speed are used:

Table 3 Definitions

Name Description Unit

Insoft Nominal softstarter current A
Pnsoft Nominal softstarter power kW, HP
Nnsoft Nominal softstarter speed rpm
Tn Nominal motor torque Nm, lbft
Un Nominal motor voltage V
In Nominal motor current A
Pn Nominal motor power kw, HP
Pnormal Normal load % of Pn

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 General information 7

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 12 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8 General information Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 13 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2. Description
In this chapter different starting methods for induction
motors are explained and compared. The functionality of
softstarters with torque control and their advantages and Current
I/In 8
limitations compared to other starting methods are
explained. 7
First a brief account of the background theory of starting 6
induction motors will be given in section 2.1. Thereafter the
different starting methods based on the usage of reduced 5
voltage will be described and compared. This chapter will 4
also cover softstarters with torque control. In section 2.3
some common starting methods based on other physical 3
principles are explained. With this information some limita-
2
tions of the reduced voltage starters will become clear. In
section 2.4 there is a brief analysis of which applications may 1
benefit from using a softstarter.
0 n/nn
0 0.5 1
2.1 Background theory Fig. 4 Typical current characteristics for the DOL start
The following two sections deal with motors with squirrel-
cage rotors. In contrast to a wound rotor, the squirrel-cage For many industrial applications direct on-line starting is
rotor consists of straight conductors, which are short- not convenient, as the supply in this case has to be dimen-
circuited together at both ends. sioned to deliver the unnecessarily high starting current.
When such a motor is connected directly to the line voltage Moreover, most applications do not gain anything from the
it will typically draw a starting current of about 5 to 8 times high starting torque. Instead there is a risk of mechanical
its nominal current while the resulting starting torque will wear or even damage because of the resulting jerk at spee-
be about 0.5 to 1.5 times its nominal torque. In the follow- dup.
ing picture a typical starting characteristic is shown. The x- The acceleration torque is determined by the difference
axis represents the speed relative to the nominal speed while between motor and load torque. The figure below shows
the y-axis shows the torque and the current respectively, even some typical torque characteristics for constant speed appli-
those normalized to their nominal values. The dashed line cations. For comparative purposes, the inducion motors’
indicates the nominal values. torque characteristic is added to the diagram.

Torque
T/Tn 2.5 T/Tn 2.5 Torque

2 2

1.5 1.5

1 1

0.5 0.5

0 n/nn 0 n/nn
0 0.5 1 0 0.5 1

Fig. 3 Typical torque characteristics for the DOL start Fig. 5 Typical load torque characteristics

Typical applications with constant load are elevators, cranes

and conveyors. Linear load characteristics are found for cal-
endar rollers and smoothing machines; quadratic correlation
between speed and torque is typical for pumps and fans.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Description 9

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 14 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Some applications like conveyors or screws may need an ini- This relationship is the base for any starting method using
tial torque boost. However, for many applications it can be reduced voltage. It can be seen that the possibility of reduc-
seen that the torque needed is much lower than the torque ing the starting current depends on the correlation between
delivered by the induction motor in a DOL start. the motor’s and the load’s torque characteristic. For the com-
A common method to reduce both starting torque and cur- bination of an application with very low starting load and a
rent is to decrease the motor voltage during starting. The motor with very high starting torque, the starting current
following figure shows how the motor’s torque and current may be reduced significantly by means of decreasing the
characteristics are changed when the supply voltage is voltage during start. However, for applications with high
reduced. starting load it may – depending on the actual motor – not
be possible to reduce the starting current at all.

Torque
T/Tn 2.5 2.2 Reduced voltage starting
This section describes different starting methods which are
based on the reduced-voltage principle explained above. A
2
pump and its quadratic torque characteristic are used as an
example.
1.5 The star-delta starter is the simplest example of a reduced
Un voltage starter. The motor phases are first star connected; at
1 about 75% of nominal speed the phase connection is then
changed to delta. To enable star-delta start, both ends of all
U2<Un
three motor windings have to be available for connection.
0.5 Moreover, the motor has to be dimensioned for the (higher)
U3<U2 voltage in the delta connection. The following figure shows
the resulting torque and current characteristics.
0 n/nn
0 0.5 1
T/Tn 2..5 Torque

Current
I/In 8 2
Un
7
1.5
6
U2<Un
5 1

4
U3<U2 0.5
3

2
0 n/nn
1 0 0.5 1

0 n/nn
0 0.5 1 I/In 8 Current

Fig. 6 Reduced voltage start 7

6
A general rule of thumb is that the torque at each operating
point is roughly proportional to the square of the current. 5
This means when the motor current is decreased by a factor
4
of two by means of reducing the supply voltage, the torque
delivered by the motor will be decreased by a factor of four 3
(approximately).
2

T~I2 1
ILV = 1/2 IDOL -> TLV ≈ 1/4 TDOL 0 n/nn
ILV = 1/3 IDOL -> TLV ≈ 1/9 TDOL 0 0.5 1
LV=low voltage
DOL=Direct on line Fig. 7 Star-delta start

10 Description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 15 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

The disadvantage of the star-delta start is that it cannot be A softstarter i often used to keep the starting current below a
adapted to a special application. Both the voltage in star and desired level. For the example above, setting a current limit
in delta connection are defined by the supply, the resulting of three times the nominal current may be desirable. The
starting performance depends on the motor’s DOL charac- following figure shows the resulting torque and current char-
teristic. For some applications the star-delta starter cannot acteristics.
be used as the resulting torque in star connection is too low
to start rotating the load. On the other hand for low load
T/Tn Torque
applications further savings of starting current are impossi- 2.5
ble even though a big torque reserve is available. Moreover,
the resulting abrupt rise of torque first at start and later
2
when changing from star to delta connection may contrib-
ute to mechanical wear. The high transient currents during
start-delta transition create unnecessary excess heat in the 1.5
motor.
Better performance is achieved with a voltage ramp start, 1
which a simple electronic softstarter can provide. The volt-
age is increased linearly from an initial value to the full sup-
ply voltage by means of phase angle control. The resulting 0.5
torque and current characteristics are shown in the following
figure. 0 n/nn
0 0.5 1

T/Tn 2.5 Torque

I/In 8 Current

2 7

6
1.5
5

4
1
3
0.5 2

1
0 n/nn
0 0.5 1 0 n/nn
0 0.5 1

I/In 8 Current Fig. 9 Soft starting – voltage ramp with current limit

7 Once again the figure illustrates that the resulting perform-

6 ance depends on the combination of motor and load charac-
teristics. In the example above the motor torque is close to
5 the load torque at about half speed. This means for some
other applications with different load characteristics (for
4
example a linear torque-speed correlation) this particular
3 motor would need more than three times the nominal cur-
rent to start.
2
The most sophisticated electronic softstarters use torque
1 control, which results in an almost constant acceleration
during the start. A low starting current is also achieved.
0 n/nn
However, even this start method uses reduced motor voltage
0 0.5 1
and the quadratic correlation between current and torque
Fig. 8 Soft starting – voltage ramp described in the first section of this chapter is still valid. This
means, the lowest possible starting current is determined by
Obviously a much smoother start is realized compared to the the combination of motor and load characteristics.
star-delta start and the starting current is decreased.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Description 11

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 16 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

T/Tn 2.5 Torque T/Tn 2.5 Torque

2 2

1.5 1.5

1 1

0.5 0.5

0 n/nn 0 n/nn
0 0.5 1 0 0.5 1

I/In 8 Current I/IN 8 Current

7 7

6 6

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

0 n/nn 0 n/nn
0 0.5 1 0 0.5 1

Fig. 10 Soft starting – torque control Fig. 11 Rotor-resistance starting

For optimal starting performance, correct setting of the soft- Because of the low starting torque it is often not possible to
starter’s parameters such as initial torque and end torque at short-circuit the rotor windings and replace the rotor-resist-
start and start time is important. The choice of parameters is ance starter with a softstarter. However, it is always possible
explained in detail in section 8.7, page 55. to use a frequency inverter instead. The following illustra-
tion shows how the torque and current characteristics are
affected when the stator frequency is changed.
2.3 Other starting methods
In contrast to the preceding sections of this chapter, which
focused on squirrel-cage motors, slip-ring motors are dealt
with later on. A slip-ring motor is equipped with a wound
rotor; one end of each rotor winding is available for external
connection via slip-rings. These motors are often optimized
for rotor resistance starting, e.g. with short-circuited rotor
windings they develop a very low torque at an extremely
high current. For starting external resistances are connected
to the rotor windings. During the start, the resistance value
is decreased in several steps until the rotor windings are
short-circuited at nominal speed. The following figure
shows typical torque and current characteristics for a slip-
ring motor during the start with an external rotor-resistance
starter.

12 Description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 17 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2.4 Use of softstarters with

T/Tn 2.5 Torque
torque control
To determine if a specific application benefits from using a
2 softstarter at all, the correlation between the motor’s torque
characteristic during the start and the load’s requirements
f3<f2 f2<fn fn has to be evaluated. As it can be seen from the examples
1.5
above, the application will only benefit from using a soft-
starter if the load torque during the start is clearly below the
1 motor’s starting capacity. However, even loads with a high
initial release torque may profit from a softstarter. In this
case an initial torque boost can be used, thereafter the start
0.5
ramp is continued reducing the starting current considera-
bly.
0 n/nn
The profit can be maximized when using a softstarter with
0 0.5 1 torque control. To be able to configure the torque control
parameters for optimal performance, the load characteristics
I/In 8 Current (linear, square or constant load, need of initial release
torque) must be known. In this case a proper torque control
7 method (linear or square) can be chosen and torque boost
6 can be enabled if needed. A description of the load charac-
teristics of several common applications and guidelines for
5 proper settings are found in chapter 6. page 31, Applications
f3<f2 f2<fn fn and Functions Selection. Optimization of the torque control
4
parameter is explained in detail in section 8.7, page 55.
3

0 n/nn
0 0.5 1

Fig. 12 Voltage/frequency regulation

Thus, such a motor can be started with a quite simple fre-

quency inverter with voltage-frequency regulation. This
solution is even valid for all other applications, which for
some reason (high load torque compared to motor torque
etc.) cannot be started by a softstarter.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Description 13

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 18 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

14 Description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 19 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

3. Mounting
This chapter describes how to mount the MSF 2.0 soft- 3.1.1 Cooling
starter. Before mounting it is recommended that the installa-
tion be planned out first: MSF-017 to MSF-250
• Be sure that the softstarter suits the mounting location.
Table 4 MSF-017 to MSF-250
• The mounting site must support the weight of the soft-
starter. MSF Minimum free space (mm):
model above 1) below at side
• Will the softstarter continuously withstand vibrations
and/or shocks? -017, -030, -045 100 100 0
• Consider using a vibration damper. -060, -075, -085 100 100 0
• Check ambient conditions, ratings, required cooling air -110, -145 100 100 0
flow, compatibility of the motor, etc. -170, -210, -250 100 100 0
• Do you know how the softstarter will be lifted and trans- 1) Above: wall-softstarter or softstarter-softstarter
ported?
Make sure that the installation is performed in accordance MSF-310 to MSF-1400
with the local safety regulations of the electricity supply
Table 5 MSF-310 to MSF-1400.
company. And in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 for set-
ting up heavy current plants. Minimum free space (mm):
MSF
Care must be taken to ensure that personnel do not come model above 1) below at side
into contact with live circuit components.
-310, -370, -450 100 100 0
WARNING! Never operate the softstarter with -570, -710, -835 100 100 0
the front cover removed. -1000, -1400 100 100 100
1) Above: Wall-softstarter or softstarter-softstarter

3.1 Installation of the

softstarter in a cabinet
When installing the softstarter:
• Ensure that the cabinet will be sufficiently ventilated
after the installation.
• Keep the minimum free space, see the tables on page 15.
• Ensure that air can flow freely from the bottom to the
top.

NOTE: When installing the softstarter, make sure it does

not come into contact with live components. The heat
generated must be dispersed via the cooling fins to
prevent damage to the thyristors (free circulation of air).

MSF-017 to MSF-835 are all delivered as enclosed versions

with front opening. The units have bottom entry for cables
etc. see Fig. 20 on page 21 and Fig. 22 on page 23. MSF-
1000 and MSF-1400 are delivered as open chassis.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Mounting 15

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 20 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

3.1.2 Mounting schemes

MSF-017 to MSF-250

h1

Fig. 14 Hole pattern for screw attachment, MSF-310 to

MSF-835. Hole distance (mm).
46.0

w1
03-F97_1

Fig. 13 Hole pattern for MSF-017 to MSF-250 (backside

view).

Table 6

Tightening torque for bolt [mm]

Hole Hole Hole Hole
MSF Diam./
distance distance distance distance
Model screw Supply
w1 [mm] H1 [mm] E F Cable PE cable
and PE

-017, -030, -045 78.5 265 5.5/M5 8 8 0.6

-060, -075, -085 78.5 265 5.5/M5 12 8 0.6

-110, -145 128.5 345 5.5/M5 20 12 0.6

-170, -210, -250 208.5 445 5.5/M5 20 12 0.6

-310, -370, -450 460 450 44 39 8.5/M8 50 12 0.6

-570, -710, -835 550 600 45.5 39 8.5/M8 50 12 0.6

-1000, -1400 8.5/M8 50 12 0.6

Observe that the two mounting hooks supplied (see mounting the softstarter as upper support (only MSF-310 to
section 1.9, page 6 and Fig. 2 on page 7) must be used for MSF-835).

16 Mounting Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 21 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

208.50

16.80

h1
547

W3 W2 W1

Fig. 16 Busbar distances MSF-310 to MSF-835.

Table 7 Busbar distances

Dist. h1 Dist. W1 Dist.W2 Dist.W3

MSF model
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
-310 to -450 104 33 206 379
-570 to -835 129 35 239.5 444
30.20
46

-1000 -1400 55 322.5 590.5

03-F122_1

Fig. 15 Hole pattern for MSF-170 to MSF-250 with upper

mounting bracket instead of DIN rail.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Mounting 17

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 22 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Fig. 17 MSF-1000 to MSF-1400

Fig. 18 Hole pattern busbar MSF-1000 to MSF-1400.

18 Mounting Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 23 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4. Connections
The description of installation in this chapter follows the matised and wait until any visible condensation has evapo-
EMC standards and the Machinery Directive. rated before connecting the mains voltage.
If the softstarter is temporarily stored before being con-
nected, please check the technical data for environmental NOTE: The softstarter must be wired with shielded
conditions. If the softstarter is moved from a cold storage control cable to fulfil EMC regulations according to
room to the room where it is to be installed, condensation section 1.6, page 6.
can form on it. Allow the softstarter to become fully accli-
NOTE: For UL-approval use 75°C Copper wire only.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Connections 19

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 24 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4.1 Connecting mains and

motor cables

Fig. 19 Connection of MSF-017 to MSF-085.

Connection of MSF-017 to MSF-085 7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables

Device connections
1. Protective earth, (PE), mains supply, motor (on the
right and left inside of the cabinet)
2. Protective earth, (PE), control supply voltage
3. Control supply voltage connection 01, 02
4. Mains supply L1, L2, L3
5. Motor power supply T1, T2, T3
6. Current transformers (can be mounted outside for
bypass see section 8.7.5, page 67)

20 Connections Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 25 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Fig. 20 Connection of MSF-110 to MSF-145.

Connection of MSF-110 to MSF-145 5. Motor power supply T1, T2, T3

6. Current transformers (can be mounted outside for
Device connections bypass see section 8.7.5, page 67)
1. Protective earth, (PE), mains supply, motor (on the
7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables
left inside of the cabinet)
2. Protective earth (PE), control supply voltage
3. Control supply voltage connection 01, 02
4. Mains supply L1, L2, L3

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Connections 21

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 26 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Fig. 21 Connection of MSF-170 to MSF-250.

Connection of MSF-170 to MSF-250 5. Motor power supply T1, T2, T3

6. Current transformers (can be mounted outside for
Device connections bypass see section 8.7.5, page 67)
1. Protective earth, (PE), mains supply, motor (on the
7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables
left inside of the cabinet)
2. Protective earth (PE), control supply voltage
3. Control supply voltage connection 01, 02
4. Mains supply L1, L2, L3

22 Connections Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 27 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Fig. 22 Connection of MSF-310 to MSF-1400.

Connection of MSF-310 to MSF-1400

Device connections
1. Protective earth, (PE), mains supply and motor
2. Protective earth, (PE), control supply voltage
3. Control supply voltage connection 01, 02
4. Mains supply L1, L2, L3
5. Motor power supply T1, T2, T3
6. Current transformers (possible to mount outside for
bypass see section 8.7.5, page 67)
7. Mounting of EMC gland for control cables

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Connections 23

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 28 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4.2 Control Connection

Fig. 23 PCB (control board) connections.

Table 8 PCB Terminals

Terminal Function Electrical characteristics
01 100-240 VAC ±10% alternative
Control supply voltage
02 380-500 VAC ±10% see rating plate
PE Protective Earth

11 Digital input 1 0-3 V --> 0; 8-27 V--> 1.

12 Digital input 2 Max. 37 V for 10 sec. Impedance to 0 VDC: 2.2 kΩ.
Control signal supply voltage to PCB terminal 11 and 12, +12 VDC ±5%. Max. current from +12 VDC: 50 mA.
13
10 kΩ potentiometer, etc. Short circuit-proof but not overload-roof.
Analogue input, 0-10 V, 2-10 V, 0-20 mA and Impedance to terminal 15 (0 VDC) voltage signal:
14
4-20 mA/digital input. 125 kΩ, current signal: 100 Ω.
15 GND (common) 0 VDC
16 Digital input 3 0-3 V --> 0; 8-27 V--> 1.
17 Digital input 4 Max. 37 V for 10 sec. Impedance to 0 VDC: 2.2 kΩ.
Control signal supply voltage to PCB terminal 16 and 17, +12 VDC ±5%. Max. current from +12 VDC = 50 mA.
18
10 kΩ potentiometer, etc. Short circuit-proof but not overload-proof.
Analogue output contact:
19 Analogue output 0-10 V, 2-10 V; min load impedance 700Ω
0-20 mA and 4-20 mA; max load impedance 750Ω

21 Programmable relay K1. Factory setting is “Operation” 1-pole closing contact, 250 VAC 8 A or 24 VDC 8 A resis-
22 with indication by closing terminal 21 to 22. tive, 250 VAC, 3 A inductive.
23 Programmable relay K2. Factory setting is “Full voltage” 1-pole closing contact, 250 VAC 8 A or 24 VDC 8 A resis-
24 with indication by closing terminals 23 to 24. tive, 250 VAC, 3 A inductive.

31 Programmable relay K3. Factory setting is “All alarms”.

1-pole change-over contact, 250 VAC 8A or 24 VDC 8A
32 Indication by closing terminals 31 to 33 and opening ter-
resistive, 250 VAC, 3A inductive.
33 minals 32 to 33.

69-70 PTC Thermistor input Alarm level 2.4 kΩ. Switch back level 2.2 kΩ.

Controlling softstarter cooling fan temperature

71-72* Clickson thermistor
MSF-310 - MSF-1400
73-74* NTC thermistor Temperature measuring of softstarter cooling fin
75 Current transformer input, cable S1 (blue) Connection of L1 or T1 phase current transformer
Connection of L3, T3 phase (MSF 017 to MSF 250) or L2,
76 Current transformer input, cable S1 (blue)
T2 phase (MSF 310 to MSF 1400)
77 Current transformer input, cable S2 (brown) Common connection for terminals 75 and 76
78* Fan connection 24 VDC
79* Fan connection 0 VDC

*Internal connection, no customer use.

24 Connections Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 29 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4.3 Minimum wiring NOTE! If local regulations say that a mains contactor
The figure below shows the “minimum wiring”. See should be used, relay K1 can control it. Always use
section 3.1.2, page 16, for tightening torque for bolts etc. standard commercial, slow blow fuses, e.g. gl or gG
types, to protect the wiring and prevent short circuiting.
1. Connect Protective Earth (PE) to earth screw To protect the thyristors against short-circuit currents,
marked (PE). superfast semiconductor fuses can be used if preferred.
The normal guarantee is valid even if superfast
2. Connect the softstarter between the 3-phase mains sup- semiconductor fuses are not used. All signal inputs and
ply and the motor. On the softstarter the mains side is outputs are galvanically insulated from the mains
marked L1, L2 and L3 and the motor side T1, T2 and supply.
T3.
3. Connect the control supply voltage (100-240 VAC) for
the control card at terminals 01 and 02. 4.4 Wiring examples
Fig. 55 on page 79 gives an wiring example with the follow-
4. Connect PCB terminals 12 and 13 (PCB terminals 11
ing functions:
and 12 must be linked) e.g. to a 2-position switch (on/
oFF) or a PLC, etc., to obtain control of soft start/stop • Analogue start/stop, see description on page 79.
(for factory configuration of the digital inputs). • External control of parameter set, see section 8.9.6, page
5. Ensure the installation complies with the appropriate 90
local regulations. • Analogue output, see “Analogue output” on page 82
• PTC input, see description of Thermal motor protection
NOTE! The softstarter should be wired with a shielded
control cable to fulfil the EMC regulations outlined in
in section 8.3.1, page 46.
section 1.6, page 6.

Fig. 24 Wiring circuit, “minimum wiring”.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Connections 25

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 30 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

26 Connections Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 31 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

5. How to get started

This chapter briefly describes the set-up for basic soft start • Connect relay K1 (terminals 21 and 22 on the soft-
and soft stop using the default “Torque control” function. starter) to the contactor – the softstarter then controls
the contactor (for factory configuration of K1).
WARNING! Mounting, wiring and setting the • Connect terminals 12 and 13 to, e.g., a 2-way switch
device into operation must be carried out by (closing non-return) or a PLC and a jumper between 11
properly trained personnel. and 12, etc., to obtain control of soft start/soft stop. (For
factory configuration of digital inputs 1 and 2.)

5.1 Checklist • Ensure the installation complies with the appropriate

local regulations.
• Mount the softstarter as set out in chapter 3. page 15.
• Consider the power loss at rated current when dimen-
sioning a cabinet, max. ambient temperature is 40ºC. 5.2 Applications
• Check that the motor and supply voltage corresponds to
the values on the softstarter’s rating plate. WARNING! Make sure that all safety measures
have been taken before switching on the
• Connect the protective earth. power supply.
• Connect the motor circuit according to Fig. 25.
• Connect the control supply to terminals 01 and 02. The Switch on the control supply voltage (normally 1 x 230 V);
control supply voltage range is 100-240 VAC or 380- all segments in the display and the two LEDs will be illumi-
500 VAC, see rating plate. nated for a few seconds. Then the display will show menu
[100]. An illuminated display indicates there is control sup-
ply voltage to the softstarter unit. Check that you have
mains supply voltage to the mains contactor or to the thyris-
tors. The settings are carried out according as follows:

Start/Stop

Fig. 25 Standard wiring.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 How to get started 27

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 32 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

5.3 Motor data

Set the data, according to the motor type plate, to obtain
Setting
optimal settings for start, stop and motor protection. 214
NOTE! The default settings are for a standard 4-pole Nominal power factor
motor according to the nominal power of the softstarter.
The softstarter will run even if no specific motor data is 0. 8 6
selected, but the performance will not be optimal.
Default: 0.86
Range: 0.50-1.00
0.50-1.00 Nominal motor power factor.
Setting
210
Setting
Nominal motor voltage 215
4 0 0 Nominal frequency

Default: 400 V 5 0
Range: 200-700 V
Default: 50 Hz
200-700 Nominal motor voltage.
Range: 50 Hz, 60 Hz
50, 60 Nominal frequency.

211
Setting
5.4 Start and stop
Nominal motor current Setting
315
1 7
Start time
Default: Insoft in A
Range: 25-200% of Insoft in A 1 0
25-200 Nominal motor current.
Default: 10 s
Range: 1-60 s
1-60 Start time.

Setting
212
Nominal motor power Setting
320
7. 5
Stop method
Default: Pnsoft in kW
Range: 25-400% of Pnsoft in kW or HP. 4
25-400 Nominal motor power.
Default: 4 (Coast)
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
1 Linear torque control
Setting 2 Square torque control
213 3 Voltage control
4 Coast
Nominal motor speed
5 Brake
1 4 5 0
Default: Nnsoft in rpm
Default “Stop method” is Coast (freewheeling).
Range: 500-3600 rpm
500-3600 Nominal motor speed.

28 How to get started Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 33 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

5.5 Setting the start command 5.7 Starting

As default the softstarter is set up for remote operation via Start the motor by pressing the “START/STOP“ key on the
terminals 11, 12 and 13. For easy commissioning it is possi- control panel or through the remote control, PCB terminals
ble to give start and stop signals via the control panel. 11, 12 and 13. When the start command is given, the mains
contactor will be activated by relay K1 (softstarter terminals
Setting 21 and 22), and the motor then starts softly.
200
Control source Current (A)

2
Default: 2 (Remote control)
Range: 1, 2, 3
1 Control panel.
2 Remote control.
3 Serial communication control.
FLC

Menu [200] must be set to 1 to be able to operate from con-

trol panel. Time

NOTE! Factory default setting is remote control (2).

Fig. 26 Example of start current when the default torque con-
trol is used.
To start and stop from the control panel, the “START/
STOP” key is used.
To reset from the control panel, the “ENTER /RESET”
key is used. A reset can be done both when the motor is run-
ning and when the motor is stopped. A reset by the control
panel will not start or stop the motor.

5.6 Viewing the motor current

Set the display to menu [100]. Now the motor current can
be viewed on the display.

Read-out
100
Current

0. 0
Range: 0.0-9999 A

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 How to get started 29

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 34 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

30 How to get started Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 35 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

6. Applications and functions selection

This chapter is a guide to selecting the correct softstarter rat-
ing and softstarter functionality for different applications.
Starts per hour
To make the right choice the following tools are used:
Start
The norms AC53a and AC53b Duration

These norms help select the softstarter rating with regard to

Run Time
duty cycle, starts per hour and maximum starting current. Off

Start Current
Time
The Applications Rating List
With this list the softstarter rating can be selected depending
on the kind of application used. The list uses two levels, see
Table 9, page 33.

The Applications Function List

This table gives an overview of the most common applica- Duty Cycle = (Start Duration + Run Time)

tions and their challenges. For each application MSF 2.0 (Start Duration + Run Time + Off Time)

solutions are proposed and a reference to the MSF 2.0

menus, which can be used, is given. See Table 10, page 34. Fig. 28 Duty cycle, non-bypass.

The above example indicates a current rating of 210 Amps

6.1 Softstarter rating with a start current ratio of 5.0 x FLC (1050 A) for 30 sec-
onds with a 50% duty cycle and 10 starts per hour.
according to AC53a
The IEC 60947-4-2 standard for electronic softstarters NOTE! If more than 10 starts/hour or other duty cycles
defines AC53a as a norm for dimensioning of softstarters for are needed, please contact your supplier.
continuous running without bypass.
The MSF 2.0 softstarter is designed to run continuously. In the Applications Rating List two commonly used levels of
AC53a are specified. These are also given in the technical
data tables (see chapter 13. on page 109).
210A : AC-53a 5.0 - 30 : 50 - 10

Starts per hour 6.2 Softstarter rating

On-load factor (on-load
duty cycle as percent-
age of operation cycle)
according to AC53b
This norm is made for bypass operation. The MSF 2.0 soft-
Start time (seconds)
starter is designed to run continuously. In the event of high
Start current (multiple of
FLC) ambient temperature or for other reasons, an external bypass
contactor can be used to minimize the power loss at nominal
Rated FLC (Full Load Cur-
(03-F58)
rent) of starter under speed. In the Application Rating List, one level of AC53b is
prescribed conditions
specified, normal with bypass.

Fig. 27 AC53a rating example.

210A : AC-53b 5.0 - 30 : 1440

Off time (seconds between

starts)

Start time (seconds)

Start current (multiple of

FCL)
Rated FLC (Full Load Cur-
(03-F59) rent) of starter under pre-
scribed conditions

Fig. 29 AC53b rating example.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Applications and functions selection 31

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 36 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

The Applications Rating List

Start The first column in the Applications Rating List, see Table
Duration 9, page 33 gives various applications. If the machine or
application is not in this list, try to identify a similar
machine or application. If in doubt please contact your sup-
Off
Time plier. The second and third columns gives typical ratings for
Start Current

the machine or application. The ratings are divided in Nor-

mal/Normal with by-pass and Heavy duty.

Example
The application is a Roller Mill. From the Applications Rat-
ing List a Roller Mill is rated as a Heavy duty application
Fig. 30 Duty cycle, bypassed due to high starting current. The proper size of MSF 2.0 has
to be selected from the Heavy rating column, see Technical
The above example indicates a current rating of 210 Amps data.
with a start current ratio of 5.0 x FLC (1050 A) for 30 sec-
onds with a 24-minute interval between starts.

6.3 The Applications Rating

List
According to the norms AC53a and AC53b a softstarter can
have many current ratings.
With help of the Applications Rating List the correct rating
can be chosen for most applications.
The Applications Rating List uses two levels for the AC53a
norm and one level for the AC53b norm:

AC53a 5.0-30:50-10 (heavy)

This level will be able to start almost all applications and fol-
lows directly the type number of the softstarter.
Example: MSF-370 is designed for 370 A full load current
(FLC) and 5 times this current for a starting time of 30 sec-
onds.

AC 53a 3.0-30:50-10 (normal)

This level is for lighter applications and here the MSF 2.0
can manage a higher FLC.
Example: MSF-370 can be used for an application with
450 A FLC if the starting current is not more than 3 times
this current for a starting time of 30 seconds.

AC53b 3.0-30:330 (normal with bypass)

This level is for lighter applications when a bypass contactor
is used. The MSF 2.0 can in this case be used for applica-
tions with an even higher nominal current.

Example
An MSF-370 can be used for an application with a full load
current of 555 A if the starting current is no more than three
times this value and a bypass contactor is used.

NOTE! To compare softstarters it is important to ensure

that not only FLC (Full Load Current) is compared but
also the starting performance.

32 Applications and functions selection Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 37 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 9 Applications Rating List

Normal
AC53a 3.0-30:50-10
Heavy
Applications and
AC 53a 5.0-30:50-10
Normal with bypass
AC53b 3.0-30:300
General & Water
Centrifugal Pump x
Submersible Pump x
Conveyor x
Compressor, Screw x
Compressor, Reciprocating x
Fan x
Blower x
Mixer x
Agitator x
Metals & Mining
Belt Conveyor x
Dust Collector x
Grinder x
Hammer Mill x
Rock Crusher x
Roller Conveyor x
Roller Mill x
Tumbler x
Wire Draw Machine x
Food Processing
Bottle Washer x
Centrifuge x
Dryer x
Mill x
Palletiser x
Separator x
Slicer x
Pulp and Paper
Repulper x
Shredder x
Trolley x
Petrochemical
Ball Mill x
Centrifuge x
Extruder x
Screw Conveyor x
Transport & Machine Tool
Ball Mill x
Grinder x
Material Conveyor x
Palletiser x
Press x
Roller Mill x
Rotary Table x
Trolley x
Escalator x

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Applications and functions selection 33

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 38 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 9 Applications Rating List

Normal
AC53a 3.0-30:50-10
Heavy
Applications and
AC 53a 5.0-30:50-10
Normal with bypass
AC53b 3.0-30:300
Lumber & Wood Products
Bandsaw x
Chipper x
Circular Saw x
Debarker x
Planer x
Sander x

6.4 The Application Functions Challenge

This column describes possible challenges that are familiar
List for this kind of application.
This list gives an overview of many different applications
with their challenges and a possible solution with one of the MSF 2.0 Solution
many MSF 2.0 functions. Gives the possible solution for the challenge using one of the
MSF 2.0 functions.
Description and use of the table:
Menus
Application Gives the menu numbers and selection for the MSF 2.0
This column gives the various applications. If the machine function.
or application is not on this list, try to identify a similar "200;=1", means: program selection 1 in menu [200].
machine or application. If in doubt please contact your sup-
plier. "323;=1 / 320, 324", means: program selection 1 in menu
[323], menus [320] and [324] are related to this function.
Table 10 Application Functions List
Application Challenge MSF Solution Menus
Too fast starts and stops Pre-setting for pump application 300
310;=2,
Non-linear ramps Square torque control for square loads.
320;=2
Water hammer Square torque control 320;=2
PUMP
High current and peaks during starts Square torque control 310;=2
Pump is going in wrong direction Phase reversal alarm 440
Dry running Shaft power underload 401
High load due to dirt in pump Shaft power overload 400
Mechanical shock for compressor, motor and
Linear Torque control 310;=1
transmissions
Small fuses and low current available. Linear torque control and current limit at start. 310;=1, 314
Screw compressor going in wrong direction Phase sequence alarm 440
COMPRESSOR
Damaged compressor if liquid ammonia
Shaft power overload 400
enters the compressor screw.
Energy consumption due to compressor run-
Shaft power underload 401
ning unloaded
Mechanical shock for blower, motor and Torque control ensures smooth starts that minimize
BLOWER transmissions. High start current requires mechanical stress. 310;=1
large cables and fuses. Start current is minimized by torque-controlled start.

34 Applications and functions selection Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 39 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 10 Application Functions List

Application Challenge MSF Solution Menus
Mechanical shocks for transmissions and
Linear torque control 310;=1
transported goods.
330-333,
Loading or unloading conveyors Slow speed and accurate position control.
500,501
Conveyor jammed Shaft power overload 400
CONVEYOR
Conveyor belt or chain is off but the motor is
Shaft power underload 401
still running
Starting after screw conveyor has stopped Jogging in reverse direction and then starting in for-
335, 500
due to overload. ward.
Conveyor blocked when starting Locked rotor function 228, 229
High starting current in end of ramps
Square torque control for square load characteristics 310;=2
Slivering belts.
Catching the motor and going easy to zero speed and
FAN Fan is going in wrong direction when starting. 310;=2
then starting in right direction.
Belt or coupling broken
Shaft power underload 401
Blocked filter or closed damper.
High inertia load with high demands on Linear torque control gives linear acceleration and low
310;=1
torque and current control. starting current.
Dynamic vector brake without contactor for medium 320;=5
Need to stop quickly both for emergency and loads. 323;=1,324
PLANER production efficiency reasons. Reverse current brake with external contactor for heavy 320;=5
loads. 323;=2,324
Conveyor speed set from planer shaft power analogue
High speed lines 520-523
output.
Worn out tool Shaft power overload 400
Broken coupling Shaft power underload 401
Linear torque control gives linear acceleration and low
High inertia 310;=1
starting current.
Heavy load when starting with material Torque boost 316,317
Low power if a diesel powered generator is
ROCK CRUSHER Current limit at start 314
used.
Wrong material in crusher Shaft power overload 400
320;=5
Vibrations during stop Dynamic vector brake without contactor
323;=1,324
High inertia load with high demands on Linear torque ramp gives linear acceleration and low
310;=1
torque and current control. starting current.
Dynamic vector brake without contactor for medium 320;=5
loads. 323;=1,324
Need to stop quickly.
BANDSAW Reverse current brake with external contactor for heavy 320;=5
loads. 323;=2,324
Conveyor speed set from bandsaw shaft power ana-
High speed lines 520-523
logue output.
Worn out saw blade Shaft power overload 400
Broken coupling, saw blade or belt Shaft power underload 401
Linear torque control gives linear acceleration and low
High inertia load 310;=1
starting current.
Too high load or unbalanced centrifuge Shaft power overload 400
Dynamic vector brake without contactor for medium 320;=5
CENTRIFUGE loads. 323;=1,324
Controlled stop
Reverse current brake with external contactor for heavy 320;=5
loads. 323;=2,324
Braking down to slow speed and then positioning con- 330-333,
Need to open centrifuge in a certain position.
trol. 500,501

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Applications and functions selection 35

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 40 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 10 Application Functions List

Application Challenge MSF Solution Menus
Linear torque control gives linear acceleration and low
Different materials 310;=1
starting current.
MIXER Need to control material viscosity Shaft power analogue output 520-523
Broken or damaged blades Shaft power overload 400
Shaft power underload 401
Linear torque control gives linear acceleration and low
310;=1
Heavy load with high breakaway torque starting current.
Torque boost in beginning of ramp. 316,317
HAMMER MILL Jamming Shaft power overload 400
Reverse current brake with reversing contactor for 320;=5
Fast stop
heavy loads. 323;=2,324
Motor blocked Locked rotor function 228

Example 6.5.4 Shielded motor cable

Hammer Mill: It is not necessary to use shielded wires together with soft-
• Linear Torque control (menu 310=1) will give the best starters. This is due to the very low radiated emissions.
results.
• Torque boost to overcome high breakaway torque NOTE! The softstarter should be wired with a shielded
control cable to fulfil the EMC regulations outlined
(menus [316] and [317])
section 1.6, page 6.
• Overload alarm function for jamming protection (menu
[400])
• Stop function reverse current brake (menu [323], selec- 6.5.5 Pump control with softstarter
tion 2) can be used. Menus 324 and [325] to set the and frequency inverter
brake time and strength.
together
It is possible, e.g. in a pump station with two or more
6.5 Special conditions pumps, to use one frequency inverter on one pump and soft-
starters on each of the other pumps. The flow of the pumps
can then be controlled by one common control unit.
6.5.1 Small motor or low load
The minimum load current for the MSF 2.0 softstarter is 6.5.6 Starting with counter-
10% of the rated current of the softstarter, except for the
MSF-017 where the min. current is 2 A. Example: MSF- clockwise rotating loads
210, rated current = 210 A. Min. Current 21 A. Please note It is possible to start a motor clockwise, even if the load and
that this is “minimum load current” and not minimum rated motor are rotating counterclockwise e.g. fans. Depending on
motor current. the speed and the load “in the wrong direction” the current
can be very high.

6.5.2 Ambient temperature below

0°C 6.5.7 Running motors connected in
For ambient temperatures below 0°C an electric heater or parallel
similar must be installed in the cabinet. The softstarter can When starting and running motors connected in parallel,
also be mounted somewhere else since the distance between the total amount of the motor current must be equal or
the motor and the softstarter is not critical. lower than the rating of the connected softstarter. Please
note that it is not possible to have individual settings for
each motor or to use the internal thermal motor protection.
6.5.3 Phase compensation capacitor The start ramp can only be set for an average starting ramp
If a phase compensation capacitor is to be used, it must be for all the connected motors. This means that the start time
connected at the inlet of the softstarter, not between the may differ from motor to motor.
motor and the softstarter.
For motors connected in parallel, torque control is not rec-
ommended because of the risk of oscillation between the
motors. Voltage control with or without current limit is pre-
ferred instead. The use of the braking functionality is not
recommended for motors connected in parallel.

36 Applications and functions selection Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 41 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

6.5.8 Running motors linked

together
When starting and running motors mechanically linked
together but with one softstarter connected to each motor,
there are two kinds of operation available. The first is to start
the motors at the same time using voltage control with or
without current limit. The second is to start one motor first
with torque or voltage control and after the motor has
reached full speed, the voltage to the other motors is ramped
up using voltage control.

6.5.9 Step-up transformer for high

voltage motor
A step-up transformer can be used between the MSF and the
motor for controlling a motor rated at high voltage (e.g.
higher than 690 V). Torque control can be used for starting
and stopping. To compensate for the step-up transformer
magnetization current at start, the initial torque should be
set a little higher than normal. The motor data must be
recalculated for the lower voltage side of the transformer.

6.5.10 How to calculate heat

dissipation in cabinets
See chapter 13. on page 109 “Technical Data”, “Power loss
at rated motor load”, “Power consumption control card” and
“Power consumption fan”. For further calculations please
contact your local supplier of cabinets, e.g. Rittal.

6.5.11 Insulation test on motor

When testing the motor with high voltage e.g. insulation
test, the softstarter must be disconnected from the motor.
This is due to the fact that the softstarter will be seriously
damaged by the high peak voltage.

6.5.12 Operation above 1000 m

All ratings are stated at 1000 m over sea level.
If an MSF 2.0 is placed at 3000 m for example, it must be
derated.
To get information about motors and drives at higher alti-
tudes please contact your supplier to get technical informa-
tion no 151.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Applications and functions selection 37

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 42 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

38 Applications and functions selection Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 43 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

7. Operation of the softstarter

Fig. 31 MSF softstarter models MSF-017 to MSF-1400.

7.1 General description of user Check that you have voltage on the mains contactor or on
the thyristors. Set the motor data, menus [210] to [215], to
interface achieve correct functionality and optimized performance of
the build-in functions such as torque control, motor protec-
WARNING! Never operate the softstarter with tion, shaft power monitor etc.
the front cover removed.

7.2 Control panel

To obtain the required operation, a number of parameters
must be set in the softstarter.
Configuration is carried out either from the control panel or
by a computer/control system through the serial communi-
cation interface (option). Controlling the motor i.e. start/
stop, selection of parameter set, is done either from the con-
trol panel, through the remote control inputs or through the
serial communication interface (option).

Setting

WARNING! Make sure that all safety measures

have been taken before switching on the
power supply.

Switch on the control supply (normally 1*230 V); all seg-

ments in the display will be illuminated for a few seconds.
Then the display will show menu [100]. An illuminated dis-
play indicates that there is control supply voltage to the soft-
starter.
Fig. 32 Control panel.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Operation of the softstarter 39

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 44 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

The control panel is used for selection, programming and

presentation. It consists of:
Table 11 Menu structure of MSF 2.0.
• 2 light emitting diodes (LEDs).
• 1 display with three 7-segment digits showing the actual Function Menu number
menu number. General settings 100-101, 200-202
• 1 display with four 7-segment digits showing the actual Motor data 210-215
value. Motor protection 220-231
• Keyboard with eight keys. Parameter set handling 240-243
Auto reset 250-263
Serial communication 270-273
7.3 LED indication Operation settings 300-342
The two light emitting diodes indicate start/stop and run-
Process protection 400-440
ning motor/machine.
I/O settings 500-534
When a start command is given either from the control
View operation 700-732
panel, through the serial communication interface (option)
or through the remote control inputs, the start/stop LED Alarm list 800-814
will be illuminated. At a stop command the start/stop LED Softstarter data 900-902
will switch off. The start/stop LED flashes when the soft-
starter is in standby operation waiting for a start caused by
autoreset or analogue start/stop. 7.5 The keys
When the motor is running, the running LED flashes dur- The function of the control panel is based on a few simple
ing ramp up and down and is illuminated continuously at rules.
full motor voltage. 1. At power up menu [100] is shown automatically.
2. Use the “NEXT ” and “PREV ” keys to move
Voltage between menus. To scroll through menu numbers, press
and hold either the “NEXT ” or the “PREV ”
key.

UN
3. The “+” and “–” keys are used to increase respectively
decrease the value of setting. The value is flashing during
setting.
4. The “ENTER ” key confirms the setting just made,
Time and the value will go from flashing to stable.
Running LED Running LED Running LED Running LED 5. The “START/STOP” key is only used to start and stop
flashing on flashing off the motor/machine.
Start/stop LED Start/stop LED
on off 6. The and
JOG
keys are only used for JOG from the
JOG

control panel. The Jog function must be enabled in

Fig. 33 LED indication at different operation situations. menu [334] or [335].

7.4 The menu structure

The menus in MSF 2.0 are organized in a 1-level structure
and they are divided into the groups set out in table 8.
For easier commissioning the menus are divided into three
groups, Read-out, Setting and Multi Setting. Read-out
menus are only for reading; Setting menus are for setting
one parameter and Multi Setting menus are for setting sev-
eral parameters which cannot be undone. The menus are
selected by navigating backwards and forwards through the
menu system. Sub-menus simplify setting but are not availa-
ble when the corresponding main function is not activated.

40 Operation of the softstarter Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 45 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 12 The keys

START
Start/stop motor operation.
STOP

Display previous menu.

PREV

Display next menu.

NEXT

Decrease value of setting.

Increase value of setting.

Confirm setting just made. ENTER

Alarm reset.
RESET

JOG Reverse JOG

JOG Forward JOG

7.6 Control panel lock

The control panel can be locked to prevent parameter being
set by unauthorised personnel.
• Lock control panel by simultaneously pressing both
"NEXT " and "ENTER " for at least 2 sec. The
message ’- Loc’ will be displayed for 2 seconds when
locked.
• To unlock control panel, simultaneously press the same
2 keys "NEXT " and "ENTER " for at least 2
sec. The message ’unlo’ will be displayed for 2 seconds
when unlocked.
In locked mode it is possible to operate the softstarter from
the control panel and to view all parameters and read-outs,
but it is not possible to change any parameters.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Operation of the softstarter 41

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 46 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

7.7 Overview of softstarter

operation and parameter
set-up
Table showing how parameters can be set and operation car-
ried out.
Table 13 Control sources

Operation

Control panel lock Setting of parameters

Start/Stop Alarm reset
Control source

Unlocked
Control panel Control panel Control panel
Control panel control panel
Menu [200]=1 Locked
Control panel Control panel ------------------
control panel

Unlocked Remote and

Remote Control panel
Remote control panel control panel
Menu [200]=2 Locked Remote and
Remote -------------------
control panel control panel

Unlocked Serial comm. and

Serial comm. Serial comm.
Serial comm. control panel control panel
Menu [200]=3 Locked Serial comm. and
Serial comm. Serial comm.
control panel control panel

NOTE: If external control of parameter set is chosen in

menu [240] no parameters except for parameter set
[249] and control source [200] can be changed.

42 Operation of the softstarter Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 47 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8. Functional description
This functional description for Softstarter MSF 2.0 The MSF 2.0 provides extensive setting possibilities via
describes the menus and parameters in the softstarter unit. menus on the control panel, remote control or serial com-
You will find a short description of each function, their aims munication. The menus are numbered according to the
and settings. menu overview in Table 10.

Table 14 Menu overview

Function Menu number Description See section

100-101
General settings General basic settings. 8.1
200-202
Motor data 210-215 For insertion of technical data for the actual motor. 8.2

Motor protection 220-231 Protection associated with the motor in the application. 8.3

Parameter set
240-243 Selection and programming of parameter sets. 8.4
handling

Auto reset 250-263 Automatic reset of active alarm and restart of MSF 2.0. 8.5

Serial
270-273 Serial communication settings for the data transfer. 8.6
communication
Settings associated with the operation, for example the start- and
Operation settings 300-342 8.7
stop procedures.
Process protection 400-440 Protection associated with the process. 8.8

I/O settings 500-534 In- and output settings for control and monitoring. 8.9

View operation 700-732 For read-out of measured values. 8.10

Alarm list 800-814 Latest error. Available alarms. 8.11

Softstarter data 900-902 Displays softstarter type, software variant and version. 8.12

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 43

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 48 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8.1 General settings NOTE: If control panel (1) or remote control (2) is
General settings for MSF 2.0 contains the following menus: configured, the setting can only be changed via control
panel to serial communication control (3). However, if
[100] Current serial communication control (3) is configured, the
[101] Automatic return menu setting can be changed either via serial communication
or via control panel.
[200] Control source
[201] Control panel locked for settings Setting
[202] Enable US units
200
Control source
8.1.1 Current [100] 2
This read-out menu shows the actual current to the motor.
Default: 2 (remote control)
Read-out Range: 1, 2, 3
100
1 Control panel.
Current 2 Remote control.

0. 0 3 Serial communication control.

Range: 0.0-9999A
8.1.4 Control panel lock [201]
The MSF 2.0 Control panel can be locked to prevent
NOTE! This is the same read-out as menu [700]. parameter being set by unauthorised personnel.
• Lock control panel by simultaneously pressing both keys
8.1.2 Automatic return menu [101] "NEXT " and "ENTER " for at least 2 seconds.
The message “- Loc” will be displayed for 2 seconds.
When the MSF 2.0 is powered up, menu [100] (Current
read-out) is shown as default. When another menu has been • To unlock control panel, simultaneously press the same
selected by the user (moving through the menu list with the two keys "NEXT " and "ENTER " for at least 2
“NEXT” or “PREV” keys) this menu will remain active. seconds. The message “unlo” will be displayed for 2 sec-
Alternatively a specific menu can be chosen as automatic onds.
return menu. The chosen menu will be shown automatically In locked mode, all parameters and read-outs (menus) can
after 60 seconds without any control panel activity. be displayed, but it is forbidden to change any parameters
via the control panel.
Setting
101 The message ’-Loc’ will be displayed if someone tries to set a
parameter in locked mode.
Automatic return menu The key lock status can be read out in menu [201].
o F F
NOTE: If menu [200] is configured for serial
Default: oFF communication control, the softstarter may still be
Range: oFF, 1-999 configured via serial communication, regardless of the
control panel lock status.
oFF Automatic return menu is disabled.
1-999 Automatic return menu.
Read-out
201
8.1.3 Control source [200] Control panel locked for
The softstarter can be controlled either via the control panel, settings
remote control or the serial communication interface. n o
Remote control via terminals 11,12 and 13 is the default set-
ting. Default: no
Range: no, YES
NOTE: Depending on the setting in this menu, the no Control panel is not locked
softstarter may be configured via control panel or via YES Control panel is locked
serial communication. See Table 13, page 42 for more
information.

44 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 49 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8.1.5 Enable US units [202] 8.2 Motor data

By default all read-out and configuration values are given in For optimal performance the MSF 2.0 softstarter should be
SI units. If preferred, US customary units can be chosen configured according to the motor’s rating plate:
instead. in this case the following units are used:
[210] to [215] Nominal motor data
• Powers are set and shown in HP, menus [212] and [703]
• Power consumption is shown in MHph, menu [731] NOTE: The default factory settings are for a standard 4-
pole motor according to the nominal current and power
• Shaft torque is shown in Ibft, menu [705]
of the softstarter. The softstarter will run even if no
• Temperature is shown in degrees Fahrenheit, menu specific motor data is selected, but the performance will
[707] not be optimal.

NOTE: When the setting for US units is changed, the Nominal motor voltage.
motor data in menus [210-215] is reset to the default
values for the chosen units (SI or US customary units) in Setting
all parameter sets. 210
[210] Nominal motor voltage – new default value (460 V, Nominal motor voltage
for US units enabled) 4 0 0
[211] Nominal motor current – new default value depend-
Default: 400 V
ing on softstarter size.
Range: 200-700 V
[212] Nominal motor power – new default value depending
on softstarter size 200-700 Nominal motor voltage.

[213] Nominal motor speed – new default value depending

on softstarter size NOTE: Make sure the softstarter’s maximum voltage
rating is suitable for selected motor voltage.
[215] Nominal frequency – new default value (60 Hz, for
US units enabled)
Nominal motor current. The current range is related to the
If the setting is changed and confirmed with “ENTER”, size of the softstarter.
“SEt” is displayed for 2 seconds to indicate successful selec-
tion. Setting
211
Setting
202 Nominal motor current

Enable US units 1 7
o F F Default: Insoft in A
Range: 25-200% of Insoft in A
Default: oFF
25-200 Nominal motor current
Range: oFF, on
oFF Values are presented in kW, Nm etc. Nominal motor power in kW or HP. The power range is
on Values are presented in HP, lbft etc. related to the size of the softstarter.

Setting
212
Nominal motor power

7. 5
Default: Pnsoft in kW
Range: 25-400% of Pnsoft in kW or HP.
25-400 Nominal motor power.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 45

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 50 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Nominal motor speed. Off

The protection method is disabled.
Setting
213 Warning
The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
Nominal motor speed relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
1 4 5 0 However, the motor is not stopped and operation continues.
The alarm message will disappear and the relay will be reset
Default: Nnsoft in rpm wen the fault disappears. The alarm may also be reset manu-
ally.
Range: 500-3600 rpm
500-3600 Nominal motor speed. Coast
The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
Nominal motor power factor. relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
The motor voltage is automatically switched off. The motor
Setting freewheels until it stops.
214
Stop
Nominal power factor The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
0. 8 6 The motor is stopped according to the stop settings in
menus [320] to [325].
Default: 0.86
Range: 0.50-1.00 Brake
0.50-1.00 Nominal motor power factor. The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
The brake function is activated according to the braking
Nominal motor frequency
method chosen in menu [323] and the motor is stopped
according to the alarm brake settings in menus [326] to
Setting
215 [327] (braking strength and braking time).

Nominal frequency 8.3.1 Thermal motor protection

5 0 With MSF 2.0 an internal thermal model of the motor or an
external signal from a PTC can be used for thermal motor
Default: 50 Hz protection. It is also possible to combine both protection
Range: 50 Hz, 60 Hz methods. Slight overload for a long time and several over-
50, 60 Nominal frequency. loads of short duration will be detected with both methods.

Thermal motor protection [220]

8.3 Motor protection Thermal motor protection is activated by choosing an alarm
The MSF 2.0 softstarter is equipped with different motor action in menu [220]. After that menus [221] to [223] will
protection functions. The following menus are available to be available so that the type of the protection (internal and/
configure these protection methods: or PTC) can be chosen. If the operation has been inter-
[220]-[223] Thermal motor protection rupted due to a thermal motor protection alarm, a manual
reset and a new start signal is needed to restart the motor.
[224]-[227] Start limitation The reset and the start signal can be given via control panel,
[228]-[229] Locked rotor remote or via serial communication depending on the con-
trol source chosen in menu [200]. Regardless of the chosen
[230] Single phase input failure
control source, it is always possible to initiate a reset via the
[231] Current limit start time expired control panel.
For these protection methods the following options are
available (all options may not be available for all protection NOTE: A reset via the control panel will never start the
methods – check the description of the relevant menu for motor.
details):

46 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 51 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Setting Setting
220 222
Thermal motor protection Internal protection class
(Alarm code F2)
2 1 0
Default: 2 (Coast) Default: 10 s
Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 Range: oFF, 2-40 s
oFF Thermal motor protection is disabled. oFF Internal protection class is disabled.
1 Warning Selection of the thermal curve as set out in
2-40
2 Coast Fig. 34.

3 Stop
4 Brake

NOTE: Check that the motor current is configured

PTC input [221] properly in menu [211].
This menu is available if thermal motor protection is ena-
bled in menu [220]. To use the PTC functionality, connect NOTE! If an external bypass contactor is used, check
the PTC to terminals 69 and 70. See fig. 53. If the motor that the current transformers are placed and connected
gets too warm (PTC resistance above 2.4 kOhm), an F2 correctly.
alarm will occur. The alarm will remain active until the
motor has cooled down (PTC resistance below 2.2 kOhm).
CAUTION! Used thermal capacity is set to 0 if
the control board loses its supply (terminal 01
22 1
Setting ! and 02). This means that the internal thermal
model starts with a “cold” motor, which
perhaps in reality is not the case. This means that the
PTC input motor can be overheated.
o F F
Default: oFF Used thermal capacity [223]
Range: oFF, on This menu is available if thermal motor protection is acti-
oFF Motor PTC input is disabled. vated in menu [220] and an internal protection class is cho-
sen in menu [222]. The menu shows the thermal capacity of
on Motor PTC input is enabled.
the motor according to the thermal curve chosen in menu
[222].
NOTE: Open terminals will give an F2 alarm immediately.
Make sure the PTC is always connected or the terminals Read-out
are shorted. 22 3
Used thermal capacity
Internal protection class [222]
This menu is available if thermal motor protection is ena-
0
bled in menu [220]. In this menu an internal protection Range: 0-150%
class can be chosen, which enables internal thermal motor
protection. With this setting a thermal curve as set out in
Fig. 34 is configured. The motor’s thermal capacity is calcu-
lated continuously based on the chosen curve. If the thermal
capacity exceeds 100% an F2 alarm occurs and the action
chosen in menu [220] is performed. The alarm remains
active until the motor model cools down to 95% of its ther-
mal capacity. The used thermal capacity is shown in menu
[223].

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 47

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 52 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Overload time (s) Normal load

Internal protection class: 10 s
Current: 3 x Inom
Overload time: 65 s

Heavy load
Internal protection class: 10 s
Current: 5 x Inom
Overload time: 25 s

Current (x Inom)

Fig. 34 The thermal curve

8.3.2 Start limitation sen control source, it is always possible to initiate a reset via
Start limitation is used to protect the motor by limiting the the control panel.
numbers of starts per hour or securing a minimum time
delay between starts. Both protection methods can be used NOTE: A reset via the control panel will never start the
separately or in combination. motor.

Start limitation [224] 224

Setting

Start limitation is enabled in this menu by choosing a proper

alarm action. The available options are: Start limitation (Alarm code
F11)
Off o F F
The protection method is disabled.
Default: oFF
Warning Range: oFF, 1, 2
Alarm message F11 is shown in the display and relay K3 is oFF Start limitation is disabled.
activated (for default configuration of the relays). However,
1 Warning
the start will be allowed.
2 Coast
Coast
Alarm message F11 is shown in the display and relay K3 is
activated (for default configuration of the relays). The start
will not be allowed.
A Start limitation alarm is automatically reset when a new
start signal is given. The start signal can be given via control
panel, remote or via serial communication depending on the
control source chosen in menu [200]. Regardless of the cho-

48 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 53 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Number of starts per hour [225] Read-out

This menu is available if start limitation is enabled in menu 227
[224]. In this menu the allowed number of starts per hour is
Time to next allowed start
configured. If this number is exceeded, an F11 alarm occurs
and the action chosen in menu [224] is performed. The 0
alarm is active until the hour has expired and a new start can
be allowed. Range: 0- 60 min

Setting
225 8.3.3 Locked rotor
This alarm is used to avoid high motor current due to a
Number of starts per hour mechanically locked rotor. If the operation has been inter-
o F F rupted due to a locked rotor alarm, a manual reset and a new
start signal is needed to restart the motor. The reset and the
Default: oFF start signal can be given via control panel, remote or via
serial communication depending on the control source cho-
Range: oFF, 1-99
sen in menu [200]. Regardless of the chosen control source,
oFF Starts per hour protection is disabled it is always possible to initiate a reset via the control panel.
1-99 Number of starts per hour.
NOTE: A reset via the control panel will never start the
motor.
Min. time between starts [226]
This menu is available if start limitation is enabled in menu
[224]. In this menu a minimum time between consecutive Locked rotor [228]
starts can be configured. If a new start attempt is made Locked rotor alarm is activated in this menu by choosing a
before the configured minimum time is expired an F11 proper alarm action.
alarm will occur and the action chosen in menu [224] is per-
formed. The alarm remains active until the chosen mini-
Setting
mum time has expired and a new start can be allowed. 22 8
Setting Locked rotor alarm (Alarm code
226 F5)
o F F
Min. time between starts
Default: oFF
o F F Range: oFF, 1, 2

Default: oFF oFF Locked rotor alarm is disabled.

Range: oFF, 1-60 min 1 Warning

Min. time between starts protection is disa- 2 Coast

oFF
bled.
1-60 Min. time between starts.
Locked rotor time [229]
This menu is available if Locked rotor alarm is enabled in
Time to next allowed start [227] menu [228]. In this menu the time delay for detection of a
locked rotor is configured. If a high motor current (4.8
This menu is available if start limitation is enabled in menu
times the nominal motor current) is floating for a time
[224] and at least one of the protection methods described
exceeding the chosen value, an F5 alarm will occur and the
above is configured (number of starts per hour or minimum
action chosen in menu [228] will be performed.
time between starts). In this menu the remaining time to the
next allowed start is shown. If both protection methods
Setting
mentioned above are activated, the shown time is the total
time delay to the next start, which is allowed by both meth-
229
ods. Locked rotor time

5. 0
Default: 5.0 s
Range: 1.0-10.0 s
1.0-10.0 Locked rotor time.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 49

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 54 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

NOTE: Check that the motor current is configured 8.3.5 Current limit start time expired
properly in menu [211]. If current limit at start is activated in menu [314], an F4
alarm can be activated if the operation is still at current limit
when the configured start time has expired. A current limit
8.3.4 Phase input failure start time expired alarm is automatically reset when a new
All phase input failures shorter than 100 ms are ignored. start signal is given. The start signal can be given via control
panel, remote or via serial communication depending on the
control source chosen in menu [200]. Regardless of the cho-
Multiple phase input failure sen control source, it is always possible to initiate a reset via
If the failure duration time is above 100 ms, operation is control panel.
temporary stopped and a new soft start is made if the failure
disappears within 2 s. If the failure duration time is longer
NOTE: A reset via the control panel will never start the
than 2 s an F1 alarm occurs and the voltage to the motor
motor.
remains off. During deceleration, regardless of the failure
duration time, the motor voltage is automatically switched
off and the motor freewheels until it stops. Current limit start time expired [231]
In this menu the alarm for current limit start time expired
Single phase input failure can be enabled and a proper action can be selected.
During acceleration and deceleration the behaviour is the
same as described above for multiple phase input failure. Setting
When running with full voltage, the softstarter can be con- 23 1
figured for different actions in the event of a single phase
Current limit start time expired
input failure (menu [230]).
(alarm code F4)
A phase input failure alarm is automatically reset when a 2
new start signal is given. The start signal can be given via
Default: 2
control panel, remote or via serial communication depend-
ing on the control source chosen in menu 200. Regardless of Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4
the chosen control source, it is always possible to initiate a Current limit start time expired protection is
oFF
reset via the control panel. disabled.
1 Warning
NOTE: A reset via the control panel will never start the 2 Coast
motor. 3 Stop
4 Brake
Single phase input failure [230]
The softstarter’s action on a single phase input failure occur- NOTE: If the action for current limit start time expired is
ring during full voltage running can be configured in this configured as Warning or the protection is not activated
menu. In the event of a single phase input failure, alarm F1 at all, the softstarter will ramp up to full voltage with a
is activated after 2 s (see description above) and the chosen ramp time of 6 s if the start time has expired in current
limit mode. The current is then no longer controlled.
action is performed. The alarm remains active until the fail-
ure disappears.

Setting
23 0
Single phase input failure (alarm
code F1)
2
Default: 2
Range: 1, 2
1 Warning
2 Coast

50 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 55 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8.4 Parameter set handling Setting

The use of different parameter sets can be helpful when
24 0
using one softstarter to start different motors or when work-
Select parameter set
ing under various load conditions. There are four parameter
sets available in MSF 2.0. Parameter set handling is control- 1
led by the following menus:
Default: 1
[240] Select parameter set
Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
[241] Actual parameter set 0 External control of parameter sets.
[242] Copy parameter set 1, 2, 3, 4 Selection of parameter sets 1-4.
[243] Reset to factory setting
Actual parameter set [241]
8.4.1 Select parameter set [240] This menu is available when external control of parameter
sets is chosen in menu [240]. This menu shows which
parameter set is actually selected via the digital inputs.

Parameter Set 4 Read-out

24 1
Parameter Set 3

Parameter Set 2 Actual parameter set

Parameter Set 1 1
200, 210, 211, 212, 213,
214, 220, 221, 222, 224, Range: 1, 2, 3, 4
225, 226, 228, 229, 230,
231, 250, 251, 252, 253,
254,
259,
255,
260,
256,
261,
257,
262,
258,
263,
8.4.2 Copy parameter set [242]
310, 311, 312, 313, 314, When programming a new parameter set, this function will
315, 316, 317, 320, 321, simplify the procedure. It is possible to copy an already pro-
322, 324, 325, 326, 327,
330, 331, 332, 333, 334, grammed parameter set into another set as follows:
335, 340, 341, 342, 400,
401, 402, 403, 404, 405, • Select a copy alternative in this menu, for example P1-2.
406, 407, 408, 409, 410, Press Enter. “CoPY” is displayed for 2 seconds to indi-
412, 420, 430, 431, 432, cate successful copy process. After that, “no” is displayed.
433, 434, 435, 436, 437,
438, 500, 501, 502, 503, • Go to menu [240] and select parameter set 2.
504, 520, 521, 522, 523,
000 • Make the required new settings in corresponding menus
for parameter set 2.
Common for all parameter sets
Multi Setting
24 2
101, 201, 202, 215, 240, 242, 243, 270,
271, 272, 273, 300, 323, 411, 440, 510,
Copy parameter set
511, 512, 513, 530, 531, 532, 533, 534,
732 n o
Default: no
no, P1-2, P1-3, P1-4, P2-1, P2-3, P2-4,
Fig. 35 Parameter overview Range:
P3-1, P3-2, P3-4, P4-1, P4-2, P4-3
no No action
Select parameter set [240] Copy parameter set 1 to parameter set 2
P1-2 etc.
In this menu one of the parameter sets 1-4 can be selected etc.
directly or external control of parameter sets via digital
inputs can be chosen. If external control of parameter sets is
NOTE: Copying parameter sets is only allowed when the
chosen, the digital inputs have to be configured properly (see
softstarter is not running.
description of menus [510] to [513]). By default digital
inputs 3 and 4 (terminals 16 and 17) are configured for
external control of parameter sets.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 51

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 56 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8.4.3 Reset to factory setting [243] The following settings should be applied:
This menu enables all parameters to be reset to the default • Activate thermal motor protection, e.g. set menu [220]
values. This includes all four parameter sets and the com- to 2 (Coast).
mon parameters except for parameter [202] (enable US
• Activate internal thermal motor protection, e.g. set
units). As Enable US units is not reset to default, the values
menu [222] to 10 (thermal curve for 10 s).
loaded for the normal motor data in menus [210] to [215]
correspond to the chosen units (SI or US customary), see • Insert maximum number of restarts: e.g. set menu [250]
description of menu [202] on page 45 for more information. to 3.
The alarm list, the power consumption and the operation • Activate thermal motor protection to be automatically
time will not be affected by resetting the parameters. When reset: e.g. set menu [251] to 100.
the reset of all parameters to the factory default values has
been executed successfully, menu [100] is shown on the dis- • Configure one of the relays to give an alarm when exter-
play. nal assistance is required: e.g. set menu [532] to 19 (all
alarms which need manual reset).
Multi Setting The autoreset functionality is not available if control panel is
2 43 chosen as control source in menu [220].

Reset to factory settings

WARNING: A flashing start/stop LED
n o indicates standby mode e.g. waiting for
autoreset. The motor may be started
Default: no automatically at a moment’s notice.
Range: no, YES
no No action NOTE: The autoreset cycle will be interrupted when a
Reset all parameters to the factory default stop signal is given (remote or via serial communication)
YES or if the control source is changed to control panel in
values.
menu [200].

NOTE! Reset to factory settings is not allowed when the

softstarter is running. 8.5.1 Autoreset attempts [250]
In this menu the maximum allowed number of automati-
cally generated restart attempts is set. If any number of
8.5 Autoreset autoreset attempts is selected in this menu the Autoreset
For several non-critical application-related failure condi- functionality is activated and menus [251] to [263], will
tions, it is possible to automatically generate a reset and ini- become available. If an alarm occurs for which autoreset is
tiate a restart to overcome the fault condition. Autoreset enabled (in menus [251] to [263]), the motor will automati-
functionality is configured using the following menus: cally be restarted when the fault has disappeared and the
delay time has expired. For each automatically generated
[250] Autoreset attempts.
restart, the internal autoreset counter (not visible) will go up
[251] to [263] Autoreset items. one place. If no alarm occurs for more than 10 minutes, the
In menu [250] the maximum number of automatically gen- autoreset counter will be decreased by one. When the maxi-
erated restarts allowed can be set. When this number is mum number of autoreset attempts is reached, no further
exceeded and a new fault occurs, the softstarter will stay in restart will be allowed and the softstarter will remain in fault
fault condition because external assistance is required. In condition. In this case a manual reset (either via control
menus [251] to [263], autoreset is enabled for the different panel, remote or serial communication, see description on
protection types by choosing a delay time. If a fault occurs page 39) is needed.
for which autoreset is enabled, the motor is stopped accord- Example:
ing to the action chosen for the relevant protection method
• Autoreset attempts (menu [250]=5)
(see menus [220] to [231] and [400] to [440] for description
of protection methods and configuration of actions on fail- • Within 10 minutes 6 alarms occur.
ures). When the fault has disappeared, and the configured • At the 6th trip there is no autoreset, because the autore-
delay time has elapsed, the motor is restarted. set counter contains already 5 autoreset attempts.
Example: • To reset, apply a normal reset. This will also reset the
The motor is protected by internal thermal protection. autoreset counter.
When a thermal protection alarm occurs, the softstarter
should wait until the motor is cooled down enough before
resuming normal operation. When this problem occurs sev-
eral times in a short period of time, external assistance is
required.

52 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 57 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

NOTE: The internal autoreset counter is reset to zero if a Start limitation autoreset [252]
stop signal is given. After each new start signal (via This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu
remote or serial communication) the maximum number [250]. In this menu the delay time for an autoreset after a
of restart attempts will be allowed as configured in start limitation alarm (alarm code F11) is configured. The
menu [250]. delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. This
means the minimum time between starts has to be expired
Setting (if Minimum time between starts protection is enabled) and
250 a start has to be allowed for the actual hour (if starts per
hour protection is enabled). When the delay time has
Autoreset attempts elapsed, the alarm will be reset and a restart attempt will
o F F automatically be made.

Default: oFF
Locked rotor alarm autoreset [253]
Range: oFF, 1-10
This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu
oFF Autoreset disabled. [250]. In this menu the delay time for an autoreset after a
1-10 Number of Autoreset attempts. locked rotor alarm (alarm code F5) is configured. As a
locked rotor cannot be detected in stopped state, the delay
time starts counting immediately after the alarm action has
8.5.2 Autoreset items [251]-[263] been executed. When the delay time has elapsed, the alarm
Menus [251] to [263] are available if autoreset is enabled in will be reset and a restart attempt will automatically be
menu [250]. With these menus the delay time for autoreset made.
is configured. The delay time starts counting when the fault
is gone. When the delay time has elapsed, the alarm will be
reset and a restart attempt will automatically be made. Current limit start time expired
autoreset [254]
NOTE: Enabling autoreset for an alarm has no effect if This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu
the alarm action for the respective alarm is set to oFF or [250]. In this menu the delay time for an autoreset after a
Warning (1). current limit start time expired alarm (alarm code F4) is
configured. As a current limit start time expired fault condi-
tion cannot be detected in stopped state, the delay time
Thermal motor protection autoreset starts counting immediately after the alarm action has been
[251] executed. When the delay time has elapsed, the alarm will be
This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu reset and a restart attempt will automatically be made.
[250]. In this menu the delay time for thermal motor pro-
tection autoreset is configured. The delay time starts count- Max power alarm autoreset [255]
ing when the fault is gone. This means the internal thermal
This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu
motor model has to cool down to a thermal capacity of 95%
[250]. In this menu the delay time for an autoreset after a
(if internal thermal motor protection is enabled) and the
max power alarm (alarm code F6) is configured. As a max
PTC resistance has to go down to 2.2 kOhm (if PTC is ena-
power fault condition cannot be detected in stopped state,
bled), which indicates that the motor has cooled down.
the delay time starts counting immediately after the alarm
When the delay time has elapsed, the alarm will be reset and
action has been executed. When the delay time has elapsed,
a restart attempt will automatically be made.
the alarm will be reset and a restart attempt will automati-
cally be made.
Setting
251
Min power alarm autoreset [256]
Thermal motor protection
This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu
o F F autoreset
[250]. In this menu the delay time for an autoreset after a
min power alarm (alarm code F7) is configured. As a min
Default oFF power fault condition cannot be detected in stopped state,
Range: oFF, 1-3600 s the delay time starts counting immediately after the alarm
Thermal motor protection autoreset is disa- action has been executed. When the delay time has elapsed,
oFF the alarm will be reset and a restart attempt will automati-
bled
Delay time for thermal motor protection
cally be made.
1-3600
autoreset

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 53

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 58 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

External alarm autoreset [257] has elapsed, the alarm will be reset and a restart attempt will
This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu automatically be made.
[250]. In this menu the delay time for an autoreset after a
external alarm (alarm code F17) is configured. The delay Serial communication autoreset [262]
time starts counting when the fault is gone. This means the This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu
external alarm signal input has to be closed. When the delay [250]. In this menu the delay time for autoreset after a serial
time has elapsed, the alarm will be reset and a restart attempt communication broken alarm (alarm code F15) is config-
will automatically be made. ured. The delay time starts counting when the fault is gone.
This means serial communication has to be re-established.
Phase input failure autoreset [258] When the delay time has elapsed, the alarm will be reset and
a restart attempt will automatically be made.
This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu
[250]. In this menu the delay time for an autoreset after a
phase input failure (alarm code F1) is configured. As a phase Softstarter overheated autoreset [263]
input failure cannot be detected in stopped state, the delay This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu
time starts counting immediately after the alarm action has [250]. In this menu the delay time for autoreset after a soft-
been executed. When the delay time has elapsed, the alarm starter overheated alarm (alarm code F3) is configured. The
will be reset and a restart attempt will automatically be delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. This
made. means the softstarter has to be cooled down. When the delay
time has elapsed, the alarm will be reset and a restart attempt
Voltage unbalance alarm autoreset will automatically be made.
[259]
This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu 8.6 Serial communication
[250]. In this menu the delay time for an autoreset after a There are several serial communication options available for
voltage unbalance alarm (alarm code F8) is configured. The MSF 2.0 (see page 107 for more information). The soft-
delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. Usually, starter can be configured and controlled via serial communi-
the mains voltage will not be available to the softstarter in cation if this is configured in menu [200] (see page 44). The
stopped state as the mains contactor is deactivated. In this following parameters are available to configure serial com-
case a voltage unbalance failure cannot be detected in munication:
stopped state and the delay time starts counting immediately
after the alarm action has been executed. When the delay [270] Serial comm. unit address
time has elapsed, the alarm will be reset and a restart attempt [271] Serial comm. baudrate
will automatically be made.
[272] Serial comm. parity
[273] Serial comm. contact broken
Over voltage alarm autoreset [260]
This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu
NOTE: The communication parameters [270] to [272]
[250]. In this menu the delay time for an autoreset after an must be set up via the control panel. To enable
over voltage alarm (alarm code F9) is configured. The delay configuration via the control panel, menu [200] must be
time starts counting when the fault is gone. Usually, the set to 1 (control panel) or 2 (remote control).
mains voltage will not be available to the softstarter in
stopped state as the mains contactor is deactivated. In this
case an over voltage failure cannot be detected in stopped Serial comm. unit address [270]
state and the delay time starts counting immediately after Serial communication unit address.
the alarm action has been executed. When the delay time
has elapsed, the alarm will be reset and a restart attempt will
Setting
automatically be made. 270
Serial comm. unit address
Under voltage alarm autoreset [261]
This menu is available if autoreset is activated in menu 1
[250]. In this menu the delay time for an autoreset after an
under voltage alarm (alarm code F10) is configured. The Default: 1
delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. Usually, Range: 1-247
the mains voltage will not be available to the softstarter in 1-247 Unit address.
stopped state as the mains contactor is deactivated. In this
case an under voltage failure cannot be detected in stopped
state and the delay time starts counting immediately after
the alarm action has been executed. When the delay time

54 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 59 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Serial comm. baudrate [271] Brake

Serial communication baudrate. Alarm message F15 is shown in the display and relay K3 is
activated (for default configuration of the relays). The brake
function is activated according to the braking method cho-
Setting
271 sen in menu [323] and the motor is stopped according to
the alarm brake settings in menus [326] to [327] (braking
Serial comm. baudrate strength and braking time).

9. 6 A serial communication broken alarm is automatically reset

when a new start signal is given. The start signal can be
Default: 9.6 kBaud given via control panel, remotely or via serial communica-
Range: 2.4 - 38.4 kBaud tion depending on the control source chosen in menu 200.
Regardless of the chosen control source, it is always possible
2.4-38.4 Baudrate.
to initiate a reset via control panel.

Serial comm. parity [272] NOTE: A reset via control panel will never start the
Serial communication parity. motor.

Setting .
272
Setting
Serial comm. parity 273
0 Serial comm. contact broken
(alarm code F15)
Default: 0 o F F
Range: 0, 1
Default: 2
0 No parity
Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4
1 Even parity.
oFF Serial comm. contact broken disabled
1 Warning
Serial comm. contact broken [273] 2 Coast
If the softstarter is configured for control via serial commu- 3 Stop
nications (menu [200] = 3) and the serial communication
4 Brake
contact is broken during operation, an F15 alarm can be
configured to occur. In this menu the alarm can be enabled
and an action to be performed can be chosen. The following
options are available: 8.7 Operation settings
Operation settings include parameters for configuration of
Off starting and stopping, some of these can be pre-configured
Serial communication contact broken alarm is disabled. for pump applications. Furthermore, some special settings
for stop behaviour at alarm, parameters for slow speed and
Warning
jog and additional settings such as bypass operation, power
Alarm message F15 is shown in the display and relay K3 is
factor control and control of the internal fan are included in
activated (for default configuration of the relays). However,
this section.
the motor is not stopped and operation continues. The
alarm message will disappear and the relay will be reset when [300] Preset pump control parameters
the fault disappears. The alarm may also be reset manually [310]-[317] Start
from the control panel.
[320]-[327] Stop including stop at alarm
Coast [330]-[335] Slow speed/JOG
Alarm message F15 is shown in the display and relay K3 is
activated (for default configuration of the relays). The motor [340]-[342] Additional settings
voltage is automatically switched off. The motor freewheels The MSF Softstarter controls all three phases supplied to the
until it stops. motor. In contrast to a simple softstarter controlling only
one or two phases, the three-phase control enables different
Stop
starting methods, voltage, current and torque control. A cur-
Alarm message F15 is shown in the display and relay K3 is
rent limit can even be used in combination with either volt-
activated (for default configuration of the relays). The motor
age or torque control.
is stopped according to the stop settings in menus [320] to
[325].

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 55

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 60 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

With voltage control the output voltage to the motor is line-

arly increased to full line voltage during the set start time. Current (A)
The softstarter gives a smooth start but does not get any
feedback on current or torque. The typical settings to opti-
mize a voltage controlled start are the initial voltage and the
start time.
With current control the output voltage to the motor is reg-
ulated so the set current limit is not exceeded during the
start. Even with this starting method the starter does not get
any feedback on the motor torque. However, current control
can be combined with both voltage and torque control. The Time
typical settings to optimize a current controlled start are the
Speed
current limit and the maximum starting time.
Torque control is the most sophisticated way of starting
motors. The softstarter continually monitors the motor
torque and controls the output voltage to the motor so the
torque follows the set ramp. Both linear- and square torque
ramps can be chosen according to the application requir-
ments. In this way constant acceleration can be accom-
plished during start which is very important in many
applications. Torque control can also be used for stopping
with constant deceleration. For pumps constant deceleration Time
is important for avoiding water hammer.
Fig. 36 Pump control. Current at start and speed at stop.

8.7.1 Preset pump control [300] When the pre-setting of the parameters for pump control
With this multi-setting parameter the MSF 2.0 softstarter has been executed successfully, “SEt” is shown in the display
can easily be configured for pump applications. The follow- for two seconds. After that “no” will be shown again.
ing parameters are set if preset pump control parameters are
chosen. Note: Pre-setting of parameters for pump control is not
[310] Start method is set to square torque control (2) allowed when the softstarter is running.

[312] Initial torque at start is set to 10%

Multi Setting
[313] End torque at start is set to 125% 300
[315] Start time is set to 10 seconds
Preset pump control parameters
[314] and [316] Current limit at start and torque boost are
deactivated. n o
[320] Stop method is set to square torque control (2) Default: no
[321] End torque at stop is set to 10% Range: no, YES
[325] Stop time is set to 15 seconds. no No action

These settings will lead to a smooth start with linear acceler- YES Preset parameters for pump control
ation and a linear stop without water hammer for most
pump applications. However, if the pre-set parameters need
to be adapted for a specific application, the values in the rel-
evant menus can be adapted.
The following figure shows typical current characteristics at
start and speed curve at stop.

56 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 61 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8.7.2 Start Torque control

With MSF 2.0, torque control, voltage control and direct The default settings for initial torque at start is 10% and for
on-line are available as start methods. Torque control is end torque at start it is 150%. In Fig. 37 the resulting torque
available both for loads with a linear torque characteristic curve is shown versus time for linear and square torque char-
like conveyors and planers and with square torque character- acteristics.
istics for pumps and fans. In general torque control is
recommended as a starting method; voltage control may be
Torque
used when for some special reasons a linear voltage ramp is
1 Linear
desired. With Direct on-line (DOL) as a start method, nei- 2 Square
ther the current nor the voltage will be controlled; full volt-
age is applied to the motor immediately. DOL can be used
to start the motor if the softstarter has been damaged and
End torque
the thyristors are short-circuited.
All start methods can be combined with a current limit. Nominal torque
However, only a properly configured torque-controlled start
will lead to constant acceleration. For this reason it is not
recommended to set a current limit for pump applications.
Initial torque
With a proper set-up of the torque control parameters, the
starting current will be very low. For applications with varia- Start time Time
ble load characteristics from start to start, the current limit
functionality may be useful to avoid overloading the mains Fig. 37 Torque control at start
fuses. However, as the motor torque is proportional to the
square of the current, setting a low current limit will limit A Properly configured torque-controlled start will lead to a
the motor torque considerably. If the current limit is set too linear speed increase and low starting current without cur-
low in relation to the application's requirements, the motor rent peaks.
will not be able to accelerate the load.
Current (A)
Start method [310]
In this menu the start method is chosen. The menus neces-
sary for configuration of the start will be available depending
on the chosen start method.

Setting
310
Start method

1
Time
Default: 1
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4 Speed
1 Linear torque control
2 Square torque control
3 Voltage control
4 Direct on-line, DOL

Time

Fig. 38 Current and speed in torque control

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 57

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 62 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

To optimize the start, use the setting for initial torque at

start, menu [311] and end torque at start, menu [312]. Voltage
When the start command is given, the motor should imme-
diately start to rotate to avoid unnecessary heat development
in the motor. If required, increase the initial torque at start.
Un
The end torque at start should be adjusted so that the time
for the motor to come up to nominal speed approximately
matches the start time set in menu [315]. If the actual start
time is much shorter than the set start time in menu [315],
the End torque at stop can be decreased. If the motor does Start
not reach full speed before the start time set in menu [315] Time
has expired, the end torque at stop has to be increased to
avoid current peaks and jerking at the end of the ramp. This
Fig. 39 Menu numbers for initial voltage and start time.
may be needed for high inertia loads such as planers, saws
and centrifuges.
The read-out of shaft torque in percentage of Tn in menu
Initial voltage at start [313]
[706] may be useful for fine-tuning the start ramp. This menu is available if voltage control is chosen as start
method in menu [310]. In this menu the initial voltage at
start is set.
Initial torque at start [311]
This menu is available if torque control is selected in menu
[310]. In this menu the initial torque at start is set.
Setting
313
Setting
311 Initial voltage at start

Initial torque at start 3 0

1 0 Default: 30%
Range: 25-90% U
Default: 10%
25-90 Sets initial voltage at start.
Range: 0-250% Tn
0-250 Initial torque at start.
Direct on-line, DOL
If this alternative is selected in menu [310], the motor can
End torque at start [312] be accelerated as if it was connected directly to the mains.
This menu is available if torque control is selected in menu
[310]. In this menu the end torque at start is set. For this type of operation:
Check whether the motor can accelerate the required load
Setting (DOL start). This function can be used even with shorted
312 thyristors.

End torque at start

1 5 0 6-7 x Inom

Default: 150%
Range: 25-250% Tn
25-250 End torque at start.

FLC
Voltage control
Voltage control can be used when a linear voltage ramp is
desired. The voltage to the motor will be ramped up linearly, Time
from initial voltage up to full mains voltage.
Fig. 40 DOL-start.

58 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 63 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Current limit If the starting time is exceeded and the softstarter is still
Current limit at start can be used together with all start operating at current limit, an alarm will be activated accord-
methods to limit the current to a defined max level when ing to “Current limit start time expired” settings for motor
starting (150-500% of In). However, only a properly config- protection, menu [231]. Operation may be stopped or con-
ured torque-controlled start will lead to linear acceleration. tinued with a pre-defined voltage ramp. Note that the cur-
For this reason it is not recommended to set a current limit rent will rise unchecked if the operation continues.
for pump applications. Moreover, as the motor torque is
proportional to the square of the current, setting a low cur- Start time [315]
rent limit will limit the motor torque considerably. If the In this menu the desired start time is set. This menu is not
current limit is set too low in relation to the application’s available if DOL is chosen as a start method and no current
requirements, the motor will not be able to accelerate the limit is configured.
load.
The combination DOL start and current limit at start gives Setting
a start ramp with constant current. The softstarter will con- 315
trol the current up to the set current limit immediately at
start, and keep it there until the start is completed or the set Start time
start-up time expires.
1 0
Current Default: 10 s
Range: 1-60 s
1-60 Start time.

Current limit

Torque boost
FLC
In specific applications torque boost is required for the start.
The torque boost parameter enables a high torque to be
Starting time obtained by providing a high current for 0.1-2 seconds at
Time
start. This enables a soft start of the motor even if the break
away torque is high at start. For example in crushing mills
Fig. 41 Direct on-line start in combination with current limit applications etc.
at start.
When the torque boost function has finished, starting con-
tinues according to the selected start method.
Current limit at start [314]
In this menu the current limit at start is set.

Setting
314 Torque boost
Current limit

Current limit at start

o F F
FLC
Default: oFF
Range: oFF, 150-500% of In
oFF Current limit disabled. Torque boost active time Time
150-500 Current limit at start.
Fig. 42 The principle of the torque boost when starting the
motor.
NOTE: Even though the current limit can be set as low as
150% of the nominal motor current value, this minimum
value cannot be used generally. If the current limit is set
too low in relation to the application’s requirements, the
motor will not be able to accelerate the load.

NOTE: Check that the nominal motor current is

configured properly in menu [211] if the current limit
functionality is used.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 59

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 64 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Torque boost current limit [316] Stop method [320]

In this menu torque boost is enabled and the current limit In this menu the stop method is chosen. The menus neces-
for torque boost is configured. sary for configuring the stop will be available depending on
the chosen stop method.
Setting
316 Setting
320
Torque boost current limit

3 0 0 Stop method

Default: oFF
4
Range: oFF, 300-700% of In Default: 4
oFF Torque boost disabled Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
300-700 Torque boost current limit. 1 Linear torque control
2 Square torque control
3 Voltage control
Torque boost active time [317]
4 Coast
This menu is available if torque boost is enabled in menu
5 Brake
[316]. In this menu the time for the torque boost to be
active is selected.
Torque control
Setting
317 With torque control at stop, the torque to the motor will be
controlled from the nominal torque down to the chosen end
Torque boost active time torque at stop (menu [321]). Examples for the torque ramps
for linear and square torque control are shown in Fig. 43.
o F F The default value for end torque at stop is 0; this value may
be increased if the motor is standing still before the stop is
Default: 1.0 s
finished to avoid unnecessary heat development in the
Range: 0.1-2.0 s motor. With the end torque at stop set properly, the motor
0.1-2.0 Torque boost active time. speed will decrease linearly down to standstill.

NOTE! Check whether the motor can accelerate the load Torque
with "Torque boost" without any harmful mechanical 1 Linear
stress. 2 Square

NOTE: Check that the nominal motor current is

configured properly in menu [221].
Nominal torque

8.7.3 Stop
With MSF 2.0, four stop methods are available: torque con-
trol, voltage control, coast and braking. Torque control is End torque
available for loads with linear or square torque characteristic. Stop time Time
A torque or voltage-controlled stop is used for applications
where the motor stopping suddenly could harm the applica- Fig. 43 Torque control at stop
tion, e.g. water hammer in pump applications. In general a
torque-controlled stop is recommended for these applica-
tions. The voltage-controlled stop can be used if a linear
voltage ramp is desired. When coast is selected as a stop
method, the voltage to the motor will be switched off and
the motor will be left freewheeling. Braking may be used in
applications where the motor needs to be stopped quickly,
e.g for planers and bandsaws.
Any start method except for direct on-line (DOL) can be
combined with any stop method, e.g. torque control can be
used at start and brake for stop. The DOL start method can
only be combined with coast or brake stop methods.

60 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 65 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

End torque at stop [321] Braking

This menu will be available if torque control is chosen as Braking can be used in applications where there is a need for
stop method in menu [320] (alternative 1 or 2). In this a quick stop.
menu the end torque at stop is configured.
There are two built-in braking methods: dynamic vector
brake for normal loads and reverse current brake for heavy
Setting
321 loads with high inertia. In both braking methods the MSF
2.0 continuously detects the motor speed. At low speed the
DC brake mode is activated until the motor is standing still.
End torque at stop
The MSF 2.0 will automatically turn off the output voltage
0 when the motor has stopped or when the stop time has
expired. Optionally an external rotation senaor can be con-
Default: 0% nected via digital input, see description for menu [500] on
Range: 0-100% of Tn page 77 for more information.
0-100 End torque at stop.
Dynamic vector brake
Voltage control With dynamic vector brake, the braking torque applied to
the motor will increase with decreasing speed. Dynamic vec-
With voltage control at stop, the voltage to the motor will be
tor brake can be used for all loads which are not rotating too
decreased to the chosen step down voltage at stop immedi-
close to synchronous speed when the motor voltage is
ately after a stop signal. Then the voltage to the motor will
switched off. This is valid for most applications as the load
follow a linear ramp down to the minimum voltage of 25%
speed usually decreases because of frictional losses in gears or
of the nominal voltage. An example of this voltage ramp is
belt drives as soon as the motor voltage is switched off.
shown in Fig. 44.
However, loads with very high inertia may remain at high
speed even though the motor is not supplying any torque.
Voltage For these applications the reverse current brake can be used
instead.
When the dynamic vector brake is used, no additional con-
nections or contactors are needed.
Un

Reverse current brake

With reverse current brake, a very high braking torque can
be applied to the motor even close to synchronous speed. All
Stop
kind of loads can be stopped quickly using reverse current
Time brake, including loads with very high inertia. If high braking
torques are needed, it should be checked carefully whether
Fig. 44 Menu numbers for step down voltage at stop and stop the motor, the gear or belt drive and the load can withstand
time. the high mechanical forces. To avoid harmful vibrations, it is
generally recommended to select as low a braking torque as
Step down voltage at stop [322] possible which also fulfils the demands for a short braking
time.
This menu is available if voltage control is chosen as stop
method in menu [320] (alternative 3). In this menu the step For reverse current brake, two mains contactors are needed.
down voltage at stop is chosen in percentage of the nominal The connection is shown in Fig. 45. The contactors have to
motor voltage. be controlled by the MSF’s relay outputs. During start and
full voltage operation contactor K1 will be closed, for brak-
Setting ing K1 will be opened and after a time delay K2 will be
322 closed to change the phase sequence.

Step down voltage at stop NOTE: For several start/stops it is recommend that the
1 0 0 motor temperature be monitored using the PTC input.

Default: 100%
Range: 100-40% of U
100-40 Step down voltage at stop.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 61

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 66 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

WARNING: When reverse current brake is

selected, the relays K1 and K2 are
automatically programmed for reverse
current brake functionality. The relay setting
remains even if reverse current brake is deactivated.
Therefore it may be necessary to adapt the relay
functions manually.

Start/Stop

Fig. 45 Reverse current brake wiring example.

Braking method [323] Braking strength [324]

This menu is available if brake is selected as stop method in This menu is available if brake is selected as stop method in
menu [320] (alternative 5) or if alarm brake is activated in menu [320] (alternative 5). In this menu the braking
menu [326] (see description of menus [326] to [327] for strength is selected. To avoid unnecessary heat development
more information). In this menu the brake method is in the motor and high mechanical stress it is generally rec-
selected. ommended to select as low a braking strength as possible
which still fulfils the demands for a short braking time.
Setting
323 Setting
324
Braking method

1 Braking strength

Default: 1
1 5 0
Range: 1, 2 Default: 150%
1 Dynamic vector brake Range: 150-500%
2 Reverse current brake 150-500 Braking strength.

62 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 67 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Stop time [325] Alarm braking time [327]

This menu is available if any stop method except coast is This menu is available if alarm brake is enabled in menu
selected in menu [320] (alternative 1, 2, 3 or 5). In this 327. In this menu the braking time to be used in the event
method the desired stop time is selected. of braking as an alarm action is configured.

Setting Setting
325 327
Stop time Alarm braking time

1 0 1 0
Default: 10 s Default: 10 s
Range: 1-120 s Range: 1-120 s
1-120 Stop time. 1-120 Alarm braking time.

Alarm braking 8.7.4 Slow speed and JOG functions

For most alarms it is possible to configure them so that when MSF 2.0 is able to run the motor at a fixed slow speed for a
they are triggered either operation continues or the motor limited period of time. The slow speed will be about 14% of
stops (see chapter 9. page 95 for more information). Brake is the full speed in the forward direction and 9% in the reverse
one of the actions available. If this option is chosen, the direction.
braking functionality is activated according to the brake
method selected in menu [323] (see description of the brak- NOTE: As the motor torque during slow speed is limited
ing functionality above for more information). While the to about 30% of the nominal torque, slow speed can not
braking strength and stop time chosen in menus [324] and be used in applications which need a high brake-away
[325] are used for braking on a stop signal, different braking torque to start rotating.
strengths and times can be configured in menus [326] and
[327] if braking is activated by an alarm. This function may The following functions are possible:
mainly be used in combination with an external alarm (see
description on page 73), where an external signal is used to Slow speed during a selected time period
initiate a quick stop with a higher braking strength and a Slow speed will be active for a selected time period before a
shorter braking time compared to normal operation. start is initiated or after a stop is performed.
If alarm braking is disabled in menu [326] and brake is cho- Slow speed controlled by an external signal
sen as an alarm action, the voltage to the motor will be
The time period during which slow speed is active before a
switched off and the motor will freewheel if the specific
start is initiated or after a stop is performed is controlled by
alarm occurrs.
an external signal via the analogue/digital input. Slow speed
will be active until a selected number of pulses has been
Alarm braking strength [326] detected on the input.
In this menu braking as an alarm action is enabled and the Slow speed using the JOG commands
alarm braking strength is selected. If alarm braking is not Slow speed can be activated independently from a start or
activated, the motor will be left freewheeling if an alarm stop via the control panel using the jog keys, via remote con-
occurs for which brake is configured as alarm action. trol using the analogue/digital input or via serial communi-
cation depending on the control source chosen in menu
Setting [200].
326
Alarm braking strength

o F F
Default: oFF
Range: oFF, 150-500%
oFF Coast – motor voltage is switched off.
150-500 Alarm braking strength.

NOTE: If alarm brake is enabled, the braking method

chosen in menu [323] is used.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 63

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 68 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Speed

nN

0.14 x nN

Slow speed Start time Full voltage Stop time Slow speed Time
at start running at stop
Stopped
Start command

Closed

External Open
signal
Time when signal is ignored

Fig. 46 Slow speed controlled by an external signal.

Slow speed for a selected time Slow speed controlled by an external

Slow speed in forward direction can be activated before a signal
start and/or after a stop. The resulting speed curve is shown
Slow speed controlled by an external signal is basically the
in Fig. 47 overleaf. Slow speed will be active for the time
same functionality as slow speed during a selected time
period selected in menus [331] and [332]. Slow speed can be
described above. An external signal connected to the ana-
combined with any start and stop method. However, when
logue/digital input is also used to deactivate slow speed
slow speed at stop is used, it should be ensecured that the
before the set time period has expired.
motor speed is decreased to a low value when slow speed is
activated. If necessary, brake can be activated as stop method When slow speed at start is configured and the analogue/
in menu [320]. digital input (menu [500]) is configured for slow speed, the
motor will start rotating at slow speed in a forward direction
The slow speed strength can be adapted to the application’s after a start signal. When the number of edges set in menu
requirements in menu [330]. Maximum available slow speed [501] is detected on the analogue/digital input, slow speed is
strength corresponds to about 30% of nominal motor deactivated and a start is performed according to the start
torque. settings (menu [310] Off ).
If so desired, the DC brake can be activated after slow speed When slow speed at stop is configured and the analogue/dig-
at stop. If activated, the DC brake will be active for the time
ital input (menu [500]) is configured for slow speed, the
period chosen in menu [333].
motor will start rotating with slow speed in forward direc-
Slow speed during a selected time is configured using the tion after a stop has performed. When the number of pulses
following menus: set in menu [501] is detected on the analogue/digital input,
slow speed is deactivated and the DC brake is activated if
[330] Slow speed strength
configured in menu [333].
[331] Slow speed time at start
[332] Slow speed time at stop
[333] DC-brake at slow speed
[324] Braking strength

64 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 69 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Slow speed controlled by an external signal is configured Slow speed time at start [331]
using the following menus: In this menu slow speed at start is activated and the time is
[500] Digital/analogue input set for which slow speed is active before a start. If slow speed
at start is controlled by an external signal via the analogue/
[501] Digital input pulses
digital input, the set time becomes the maximum time for
[330] Slow speed strength which slow speed is activated before a start is performed – if
[331] Slow speed time at start the number of edges set in menu [501] is not detected dur-
ing the slow speed period.
[332] Slow speed time at stop
[333] DC-brake at slow speed Setting
331
[324] Braking strength
Slow speed time at start
Slow speed strength [330] o F F
In this menu the slow speed strength is selected. The chosen
setting applies for both slow speed during a selected time Default: oFF
period, slow speed controlled by an external signal and slow Range: oFF, 1-60 s
speed using the JOG commands. The maximum setting oFF Slow speed at start is disabled
(100) for the slow speed strength corresponds to about 30%
1-60 Slow speed time at start.
of the nominal motor torque.

Setting
330
Slow speed strength

1 0
Default: 10
Range: 10-100
10-100 Slow speed strength.

Speed

nN Nominal speed

0.14 x nN Slow speed

Slow speed Start time Full voltage Stop time Slow speed Time
at start running at stop

Start command Stop command Stopped

Fig. 47 Slow speed at start/stop during a selected time period.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 65

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 70 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Slow speed time at stop [332]

In this menu slow speed at stop is activated and the time is
set for which slow speed is active after a stop. If slow speed at
stop is controlled by an external signal via the analogue/dig-
ital input, the set time becomes the maximum time for
which slow speed is activated after a stop – if the number of
edges is set in menu [501] is not detected during the slow
speed period. Fig. 48 Jog keys

Setting If remote control is chosen (menu [200]=2) and the JOG

33 2 commands are enabled in menus [334] and [335], the JOG
commands can be given via analogue/digital input. The ana-
Slow speed time at stop
logue/digital input can be configured either for jog forward
o F F or jog reverse (see description of menu [500] on page 77 for
more information). Slow speed will be active as long as the
Default: oFF signal on the analogue/digital input is active.
Range: oFF, 1-60 s If serial communication control is chosen (menu [200]=3)
oFF Slow speed at stop is disabled and the JOG commands are enabled in menus [334] and
1-60 Slow speed time at stop. [335], the JOG commands can be given via serial communi-
cation. (See separate instruction manual for serial communi-
cations options.)
DC brake at slow speed [333]
In this menu the DC brake can be activated after slow speed
at stop. This may be useful for loads with high interia or if
JOG forward enable [334]
an exact stop position is desired. The DC brake will be In this menu the command for JOG in forward direction is
active during the time set in this menu. enabled. Depending on the control source chosen in menu
[200], the JOG forward command may be accepted from
the control panel, via remote control or serial communica-
NOTE: The brake strength used for DC brake after slow tion.
speed corresponds to the brake strength used for
braking as stop method. The braking strength can be
adjusted in menu [324]. NOTE! The enable functions are for all control sources.

Setting Setting
333 334
DC Brake at slow speed JOG forward enable

o F F o F F
Default: oFF Default: oFF
Range: oFF, 1-60 s Range: oFF, on
oFF DC brake at slow speed disabled. oFF JOG forward disabled
1-60 DC brake duration time at slow speed. on JOG forward enabled

Slow speed using the JOG commands

Slow speed in forward or reverse direction can be activated
using the JOG commands. To use the JOG commands these
have to be independently enabled for slow speed in forward
or reverse direction in menus [334] and [335]. Depending
on the control source chosen in menu [200], the JOG com-
mands are accepted via control panel, remotely via analogue/
digital input or via serial communications.
If the control panel is chosen as control source (menu
[200]=1) and the JOG commands are enabled in menus
[334] and [335], the JOG keys on the control panel can be
used. Slow speed in forward or reverse direction will be
active as long as the relevant button is pushed.

66 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 71 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

JOG reverse enable [335] CAUTION: If the current transformers are not
moved outside the softstarter, several alarm
In this menu the command for JOG in reverse direction is
enabled. Depending on the control source chosen in menu
! functions will not work properly.
[200,], the JOG reverse command may be accepted from the
control panel, via remote control or serial communication.

Setting
335
JOG reverse enable

o F F
Default: oFF
Range: oFF, on
oFF JOG reverse disabled
on JOG reverse enabled

8.7.5 Additional settings [340]-[342]

In this section the bypass functionality, power factor control
and the control of the internal fan are described.

Bypass [340]
As the MSF 2.0 is designed for continuous running, a by-
pass contactor is not normally needed. However, where there
is high ambient temperature or other special conditions, the
use of a bypass contactor can be advantageous. In this case
the by-pass contactor can be controlled by one of the relays.
By default, relay K2 is configured to control a bypass contac-
tor (for full voltage functionality, see description of menus
[530]-[532] on page 85 for more information).
The use of a bypass contactor can be combined with any
start and stop method without any connection changes
being necessary. However, to use the motor protection func-
tions, the load monitor and the viewing functions in
bypassed state, the current transformers have to be moved
outside the softstarter. For this purpose an optional exten-
sion cable is available, see chapter 12. page 107 (Options)
for more information. Figures 49 - 51 below show a connec-
tion example.
If a bypass contactor is used, bypass operation must be ena-
bled in menu [340] for the softstarter to work properly.

Setting
340
Bypass

o F F
Default: oFF
Range: oFF, on
oFF Bypass disabled
on Bypass enabled.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 67

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 72 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Current transformer
position and connec- Start/Stop
tion.

For MSF-017 to MSF-

250, see Fig 50.

For MSF-310 to MSF-

1400, see Fig 51.

Fig. 49 Bypass wiring example MSF 310-1400.

Blue to Blue to Blue to Blue to

terminal 75 terminal 76 terminal 75 terminal 76

Brown to Brown to Brown to Brown to

terminal 77 terminal 77 terminal 77 terminal 77

Fig. 50 Current transformer position for Bypass on MSF-017 Fig. 51 Current transformer position for Bypass on MSF-310
to MSF-250. to MSF-1400.

68 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 73 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Power Factor Control PFC [341] 8.8.1 Load monitor

During operation, the softstarter continuously monitors the The MSF 2.0 has a built-in load monitor, which continu-
load of the motor. Particularly when idling or when only ously supervises the motor shaft power. This means, the
partially loaded, it is sometimes desirable to improve the process can easily be protected both from overload and
power factor. If Power Factor Control (PFC) is selected, the underload conditions. The load monitor functionality
softstarter reduces the motor voltage when the load is lower. includes both alarms and pre-alarms for overload (max
Power consumption is reduced and the degree of efficiency power) and underload (min power). While the max. and
improved. min power alarms can be configured to affect operation
(OFF, Warning, Coast, Stop, Brake), the respective pre-
Setting alarms only give an indication that an over- or underload sit-
341 uation may be close. The pre-alarm status is available on one
of the programmable relays K1 to K3 if so configured (see
Power Factor Control PFC description of the relays, menus [530] to [532] on page 85
o F F for more information)
All load monitor alarms and pre-alarms are configured using
Default: oFF a delay time and an alarm margin. The alarm margin is cho-
Range: oFF, on sen as a percentage of nominal motor load. A max power
oFF PFC disabled alarm will occur when the actual power exceeds the normal
load plus the max power alarm margin and a min power
on PFC enabled.
alarm will occur when the actual load is lower than the nor-
mal load minus the min power margin. Normal load is the
CAUTION: If Power Factor Control is used, the shaft power needed under normal operation conditions. The
EMC Directive will not be complied with.
! External measures will be necessary to meet
default normal load is considered to be 100% of the nomi-
nal motor power. Depending on the dimensioning of the
the requirements of the EMC Directive. motor with respect to the application, this value may need to
be adapted. Normal load can easily be adapted by using the
Autoset function in menu [411]. When an Autoset is per-
Fan continuously on [342] formed the actual motor shaft power will be measured and
This menu enables the internal fan to be switched on con- stored to the Normal load.
tinuously. the default setting is for the fan only to run when
the softstarter heatsink is too warm. The lifetime of the fan A start delay can be configured to avoid faulty alarms due to
is increased by only running it when needed. initial over- or underload situations at start.
Fig. 52 illustrates the load monitor functionality with an
Setting example of a load curve.
342
If the operation has been interrupted due to a max or min
Fan continuously on
power alarm, a manual reset and a new start signal is needed
to continue operation. The reset and the start signal can be
o F F given via control panel, remotely or via serial communica-
tion depending on the control source chosen in menu [200].
Default: oFF Regardless of the chosen control source, it is always possible
Range: oFF, on to initiate a reset via control panel.
Fan is controlled by the heatsink tempera-
oFF
ture NOTE: A reset via control panel will never start the
on Fan is running continuously. motor.

NOTE! The load monitor alarms are disabled during

8.8 Process protection deceleration.
The MSF 2.0 softstarter is equipped with different functions
for process protection:
NOTE: When using the load monitor, check that the
[400]-[413] Load monitor nominal motor power is set properly in menu [212].
[420] External alarm
[430]-[440] Mains protection

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 69

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 74 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Pload

Start Overload situation Underload situation

16%

Max alarm margin [403] Operation area

8%
Max pre-alarm
margin [405]
Normal load
(Autoset)
Min pre-alarm
margin [407]
8%

Min alarm margin [409]

16%

Start delay [402] Time

Max power pre-alarm [406]
Max power alarm [404]
Min power pre-alarm [408]
Min power alarm [410]
Response time

Fig. 52 Load monitor alarm functions

For max and min power alarms the following alarm actions Brake
are available: The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
Off The brake function is activated according to the braking
The protection method is deactivated.
method chosen in menu [323] and the motor is stopped
Warning according to the alarm brake settings in menus [326] to
The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and [327] (braking strength and braking time).
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays). If the operation has been interrupted due to a max or min
However, the motor is not stopped and operation continues. power alarm, a reset signal and a new start signal are needed
The alarm message will disappear and the relay will be reset to restart the motor. The reset and the start signal can be
when the fault disappears. The alarm may also be reset man- given via control panel, remotely or via serial communica-
ually. tion depending on the control source chosen in menu [200].
Regardless of the chosen control source, it is always possible
Coast to initiate a reset via control panel.
The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
NOTE: A reset via control panel will never start the
The motor voltage is automatically switched off. The motor
motor.
freewheels until it stops.

Stop
The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
The motor is stopped according to the stop settings in
menus [320] to [325].

70 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 75 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Max power alarm [400] Setting

In this menu max power alarm is enabled and a proper alarm 402
action is selected. The pre-alarm functionality for max
Start delay power alarms
power is automatically enabled together with the max power
alarm. 1 0
Setting Default: 10 s
400 Range: 1-999 s
Start delay for power alarms and pre-
Max power alarm (alarm code 1-999
alarms.
F6)
o F F
Default: oFF Max power alarm margin [403]
Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 This menu is available if Max power alarm is enabled in
oFF Max power alarm is disabled.
menu [400]. In this menu the max power alarm margin is
configured. The margin is selected as percentage of nominal
1 Warning
motor power. A max power alarm will occur if the actual
2 Coast motor shaft power exceeds the normal load (menu [412])
3 Stop plus the chosen max power alarm margin for a longer time
4 Brake period than the max power alarm response delay set in menu
[404].

Min power alarm [401] Setting

In this menu min power alarm is enabled and a proper alarm
403
action is selected. The pre-alarm functionality for min
Max power alarm margin
power is automatically enabled together with the min power
alarm. 1 6
Setting Default: 16%
401 Range: 0-100% of Pn
0-100 Max power alarm margin
Min power alarm (alarm code F7)

o F F Max power alarm response delay [404]

Default: oFF This menu is available if max power alarm is enabled in
Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 menu [400]. In this menu the response delay for the max
oFF Min power alarm is disabled. power alarm is configured. A max power alarm will occur if
the actual motor shaft power exceeds the normal load (menu
1 Warning
[412]) plus the max power alarm margin set in menu [403]
2 Coast for a longer time period than the chosen max power alarm
3 Stop response delay.
4 Brake
Setting
404
Start delay power alarms [402]
This menu is available if max or min power alarm is enabled Max power alarm response
delay
in menu [400] or [401]. In this menu the start delay for the
power alarms and pre-alarms is selected. A start delay is use-
0. 5
ful for avoiding faulty alarms due to initial over- or under- Default: 0.5 s
load situations. The start delay begins when a start of the Range: 0.1-90.0 s
motor is initiated.
0.1-90.0 Response delay for max power alarm.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 71

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 76 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Max power pre-alarm margin [405] Setting

This menu is available if max power alarm is enabled in 407
menu [400]. In this menu the max power pre-alarm margin
Min power pre-alarm margin
is configured. The margin is selected in percent of nominal
motor power. A max power pre-alarm will occur if the actual 8
motor shaft power exceeds the normal load (menu [412])
plus the chosen max power pre-alarm margin for a longer Default: 8%
time period than the max power pre-alarm response delay set Range: 0-100% of Pn
in menu [406]. The max power pre-alarm status is available 0-100 Min power pre-alarm margin.
on one of the programmable relays K1-K3 if so configured
(see description of the relays, menus [530] to [532] for more
information). Min power pre-alarm response delay
[408]
Setting
405 This menu is available if min power alarm is enabled in
menu [401]. In this menu the response delay for min power
Max power pre-alarm margin pre-alarm is configured. A min power pre-alarm will occur if
the actual motor shaft power is below the normal load
8 (menu [412]) minus the min power pre-alarm margin set in
menu [407] for a longer time period than the chosen min
Default: 8%
power pre-alarm response delay.
Range: 0-100% of Pn
0-100 Max power pre-alarm margin. Setting
408
Max power pre-alarm response delay Min power pre-alarm response
delay
[406] 0. 5
This menu is available if max power alarm is enabled in
menu [400]. In this menu the response delay for max power Default: 0.5 s
pre-alarm is configured. A max power pre-alarm will occur if Range: 0.1-90.0 s
the actual motor shaft power exceeds the normal load (menu 0.1-90.0 Response delay for Min power pre-alarm.
[412]) plus the max power pre-alarm margin set in menu
[405] for a longer time period than the chosen max power
pre-alarm response delay. Min power alarm margin [409]
This menu is available if min power alarm is enabled in
Setting menu [401]. In this menu the min power alarm margin is
406 configured. The margin is selected as a percentage of nomi-
nal motor power. A min power alarm will occur if the actual
Max power pre-alarm response
motor shaft power is below the normal load (menu [412])
delay
0. 5 minus the chosen min power alarm margin for a longer time
period than the min power alarm response delay set in menu
Default: 0.5 s [410].
Range: 0.1-90.0 s
0.1-90.0 Response delay for Max power pre-alarm. Setting
409

Min power pre-alarm margin [407] Min power alarm margin

This menu is available if min power alarm is enabled in 1 6

menu [401]. In this menu the min power pre-alarm margin
is configured. The margin is selected as a percentage of nom- Default: 16%
inal motor power. A min power pre-alarm will occur if the Range: 0-100% of Pn
actual motor load is below the nominal load (menu [412]) 0-100 Min power alarm margin.
minus the chosen min power pre-alarm margin for a longer
time period than the min power pre-alarm response delay set
in menu [408]. The min power pre-alarm status is available
on one of the programmable relays K2-K3 if so configured
(see description of the relays, menus [530] to [532] for more
information.

72 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 77 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Min power alarm response delay [410] NOTE: When using the load monitor, check that the
This menu is available if min power alarm is enabled in nominal motor power is set properly in menu [212].
menu [401]. In this menu the response delay for min power
alarm is configured. A min power alarm will occur if the
Setting
actual motor shaft power is below the normal load (menu 41 2
[412]) minus the min power alarm margin set in menu
[409] for a longer time period than the chosen min power Normal load
alarm response delay.
1 0 0
Setting Default: 100%
410
Range: 0-200% of Pn
Min power alarm response delay 0-200 Normal load

0. 5
Output shaft power [413]
Default: 0.5 s
This menu is available if max or min power alarm is enabled
Range: 0.1-90.0 s in menu [400] or [401]. The menu provides a read-out of
0.1-90.0 Response delay for Min power alarm. the actual shaft power. It can be used as input information
when the normal load is set manually.

Autoset [411] Read-out

This menu is available if max or min power alarm is enabled 413
in menu [400] or [401]. The Autoset command performs a
measurement of the actual motor load and automatically sets Output shaft power
the normal load in menu [412].
0
To perform an Autoset, select YES, and press Enter during
normal operation. If Autoset has been executed successfully, Range: 0-200% of Pn
“SEt” is shown in the display for two seconds. After that
“no” is shown again. An Autoset can also be initiated via the
analogue/digital input, see description of menu [500] for 8.8.2 External alarm [420]
more information. The MSF 2.0 can generate an alarm according to the status
of an external signal. For a detailed description of the exter-
NOTE: Autoset is only allowed during full voltage
nal alarm functionality see section 8.9.5, page 89.
running. The following alternatives are available for external alarm:

Off
Multi Setting
41 1 External alarm is deactivated.

Warning
Autoset
Alarm message F17 is shown in the display and relay K3 is
n o activated (for default configuration of the relays) if the exter-
nal alarm input is opened. However, the motor is not
Default: no stopped and operation continues. The alarm message will
Range: no, YES disappear and the relay will be reset when the external alarm
no No action input is closed again. The alarm may also be reset manually.
YES Autoset Coast
Alarm message F17 is shown in the display and relay K3 is
activated (for default configuration of the relays) if the exter-
Normal load [412] nal alarm input is opened. The motor voltage is automati-
This menu is available if Max or Min power alarm is enabled cally switched off. The motor freewheels until it stops.
in menu [400] or [401]. Normal load is the shaft power
needed under normal operation conditions. By default, Nor- Stop
mal load is considered to be 100% of the nominal motor Alarm message F17 is shown in the display and relay K3 is
power. Depending on the dimensioning of the motor with activated (for default configuration of the relays) if the exter-
respect to the application, this value may need to be nal alarm input is opened. The motor is stopped according
adapted. Normal load can easily be adapted by using the to the stop settings in menus [320] to [325].
Autoset function in menu [411]. Normal load is set as aper-
centage of nominal motor power.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 73

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 78 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Brake The alarm message will disappear and the relay will be reset
Alarm message F17 is shown in the display and relay K3 is when the fault disappears. The alarm may also be reset man-
activated (for default configuration of the relays) if the exter- ually.
nal alarm input is opened. The brake function is activated
according to the braking method chosen in menu [323] and
Coast
The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
the motor is stopped according to the alarm brake settings in
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
menus [326] to [327] (braking strength and braking time).
The motor voltage is automatically switched off. The motor
Spinbrake freewheels until it stops.
The functionality for the spinbrake alternative is the same as
described above for the brake alternative. However, if spin-
Stop
The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
brake is chosen, braking can even be initiated from an inac-
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
tive state by opening the external alarm input. This means
The motor is stopped according to the stop settings in
the softstarter can catch a freewheeling motor and brake it
menus [320] to [325].
down to standstill. The spinbrake alternative is only availa-
ble for external alarm. Brake
If the operation has been interrupted due to an external The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
alarm, a reset signal and a new start signal are needed to relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
restart the motor. The reset and the start signal can be given The brake function is activated according to the braking
via control panel, remotely or via serial communication method chosen in menu [323] and the motor is stopped
depending on the control source chosen in menu [200]. according to the alarm brake settings in menus [326] to
Regardless of the chosen control source, it is always possible [327] (braking strength and braking time).
to initiate a reset via control panel.. An overvoltage, undervoltage or voltage unbalance alarm is
automatically reset when a new start signal is given. If the
NOTE: A reset via control panel will never start the operation has been interrupted due to a phase reversal alarm,
motor. a reset signal and a new start signal are needed to restart the
motor. The reset and the start signal can be given via control
Setting panel, remotely or via serial communication depending on
420 the control source chosen in menu [200]. Regardless of the
chosen control source, it is always possible to initiate a reset
External alarm (alarm code F17) via control panel.
o F F NOTE: A reset via control panel will never start the
Default: oFF motor.
Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
oFF External alarm is disabled. Voltage unbalance alarm [430]
1 Warning In this menu voltage unbalance alarm is enabled and a
2 Coast proper action is selected.
3 Stop
4 Brake Setting
430
5 Spinbrake
Voltage unbalance alarm (alarm
code F8)
8.8.3 Mains protection o F F
The MSF 2.0 continuously monitors the mains voltage.
Default: oFF
This means the motor can easily be protected from over- and
undervoltages as well as from voltage unbalance conditions. Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4
A phase reversal alarm is also available. oFF Voltage unbalance alarm is disabled.
For mains protection the following alternatives are available: 1 Warning
2 Coast
Off
3 Stop
The protection method is deactivated.
4 Brake
Warning
The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays).
However, the motor is not stopped and operation continues.

74 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 79 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Unbalance voltage level [431] Overvoltage level [434]

This menu is available if voltage unbalance alarm is enabled This menu is available if overvoltage alarm is enabled in
in menu [430]. In this menu the maximum allowed voltage menu [433]. In this menu the voltage level for an overvolt-
unbalance level is selected. If the difference between any two age alarm is selected. If any line voltage exceeds the chosen
line voltages exceeds the chosen level for the response delay level for the response delay time set in menu [435], an over-
time set in menu [432], a voltage unbalance alarm will occur voltage alarm will occur and the action selected in menu
and the action selected in menu [430] will be executed. [433] will be executed.

Setting Setting
431 43 4
Voltage unbalance level Overvoltage level

1 0 1 1 5
Default: 10% Default: 115%
Range: 2-25% of Un Range: 100-150% of Un
2-25 Voltage unbalance level. 100-150 Overvoltage level

Response delay voltage level Response delay overvoltage alarm

unbalance alarm [432] [435]
This menu is available if voltage unbalance alarm is enabled This menu is available if overvoltage alarm is enabled in
in menu [430]. In this menu the response delay for voltage menu [433]. In this menu the response delay for overvoltage
unbalance alarm is selected. If the difference between any alarm is selected. If any line voltage exceeds the level set in
two line voltages exceeds the level set in menu [431] for the menu [434] for the chosen response delay time, an overvolt-
chosen response delay time, a voltage unbalance alarm will age alarm will occur and the action selected in menu [433]
occur and the action selected in menu [430] will be exe- will be executed.
cuted.
Setting
Setting 43 5
432
Response delay overvoltage
Response delay voltage alarm
unbalance alarm 1
1
Default: 1s
Default: 1s
Range: 1-90 s
Range: 1-90 s
1-90 Response delay for overvoltage alarm.
1-90 Response delay for voltage unbalance alarm.

Undervoltage alarm [436]

Overvoltage alarm [433]
In this menu undervoltage alarm is enabled and a proper
In this menu overvoltage alarm is enabled and a proper action is selected.
action is selected.
Setting
Setting 436
433
Undervoltage alarm (alarm code
Overvoltage alarm (alarm code F10)
o F F F9) o F F
Default: oFF
Default: oFF
Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4
Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4
oFF Undervoltage alarm is disabled.
oFF Overvoltage alarm is disabled.
1 Warning
1 Warning
2 Coast 2 Coast

3 Stop 3 Stop
4 Brake 4 Brake

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 75

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 80 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Undervoltage level [437] Phase reversal alarm [440]

This menu is available if undervoltage alarm is enabled in In this menu phase reversal alarm is enabled and a proper
menu [436]. In this menu the voltage level for an undervolt- action can be chosen. The softstarter will detect the phase
age alarm is selected. If any line voltage is below the chosen sequence prior to each start attempt. If the actual phase
level for the response delay time set in menu [438], an und- sequence does not match the phase sequence stored during
ervoltage alarm will occur and the action selected in menu activation of phase reversal alarm, the action chosen in this
[436] will be executed. menu will be executed. If alternative 2 (Coast) is chosen, no
start will be performed if the wrong phase sequence is
Setting detected.
437 To activate phase reversal alarm, a motor has to be con-
nected and the mains voltage has to be switched on. This
Undervoltage level
means activation of phase reversal alarm can either be done
8 5 in stopped state with the mains contactor switched on man-
ually or during full voltage running.
Default: 85%
Range: 75-100% of Un Setting
75-100 Undervoltage level 440
Phase reversal alarm (alarm
Response delay undervoltage alarm o F F code F16)

[438]
Default: oFF
This menu is available if undervoltage alarm is enabled in
menu [436]. In this menu the response delay for undervolt- Range: oFF, 1, 2
age alarm is selected. If any line voltage is below the level set oFF Phase reversal alarm is disabled.
in menu [437] for the chosen response delay time, an under- 1 Warning
voltage alarm will occur and the action selected in menu 2 Coast
[436] will be executed.

Setting NOTE! The actual phase sequence can be viewed in

438 menu [439].

Response delay undervoltage

alarm
1
Default: 1s
Range: 1-90 s
1-90 Response delay for undervoltage alarm

Phase sequence [439]

In this menu the actual phase sequence is shown.

NOTE! The actual phase sequence can only be shown

with a motor connected.

Read-out
439
Phase sequence

L- - -
Range: L123, L321
L123 Phase sequence L1, L2, L3
L321 Phase sequence L3, L2, L1
L- - - Phase sequence can not be detected

76 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 81 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8.9 I/O settings Autoset

When the analogue/digital input is configured for Autoset, a
In this section the programmable inputs and outputs are
rising edge on the input will initiate an Autoset. Note that
described.
an Autoset only can be performed during full voltage run-
[500]-[513] Input signals ning. See description of load monitor functionality in sec-
[520]-[534] Output signals tion 8.8.1, page 69 for more information

A connection example using most of the available in- and The following alternatives are available when using the input
outputs is shown in Fig. 53. for analogue signals:

This section includes also detailed descriptions of the follow- Analogue start/stop: 0-10 V/0-20 mA or
ing functions: 2-10 V/4-20 mA:
• Start/stop/reset command functionality The analogue/digital input is used for the reference signal
which controls analogue start stop. Two signal ranges
• Start right/left functionality
(0-10 V/0-20 mA or 2-10 V/4-20 mA) can be chosen. Ana-
• External alarm functionality logue start/stop is activated if alternative 6 or 7 is chosen in
menu [500]. See the description of Analogue start/stop on
• External control of parameter set
page 79 for more information.

8.9.1 Input signals Setting

The MSF 2.0 has one programmable analogue/digital input 500
and four programmable digital inputs for remote control.
Analogue/digital input

Analogue/digital input [500] o F F

The analogue/digital input can either be programmed for Default: oFF
analog or digital functionality. The following alternatives are Range: oFF, 1-7
available when using the input for digital signals:
oFF Analogue/digital input disabled
Rotation sensor 1 Digital, Rotation sensor
An external rotation sensor can be used for the braking func- 2 Digital, Slow speed
tions. If the analogue/digital input is configured for rotation
3 Digital, Jog forward
sensor functionality in menu [500], braking will be deacti-
vated if the number of edges chosen in menu [501] is 4 Digital, Jog reverse
detected on the input. 5 Digital, Autoset
6 Analogue start/stop: 0-10 V/0-20 mA
Slow speed
7 Analogue start/stop: 2-10 V/4-20 mA
This alternative is used for slow speed controlled by an exter-
nal signal (see the description of slow speed and jog func-
tions in section 8.7.4, page 63 for more information). If the
number of edges set in menu [501] is detected on the input,
slow speed at start or stop will be finished.

Jog Forward
With this alternative, slow speed in forward direction can be
activated via the analogue/digital input. Slow speed will be
active as long as the input signal is high. See the description
of slow speed and jog functions in section 8.7.4, page 63 for
more information. Note that "JOG" forward has to be ena-
bled in menu [334] to use this function.

Jog reverse
With this alternative, slow speed in reverse direction can be
activated via the analogue/digital input. Slow speed will be
active as long as the input signal is high. See the description
of slow speed and jog functions in section 8.7.4, page 63 for
more information. Note that "JOG" reverse has to be ena-
bled in menu [335] to use this function.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 77

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 82 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Relay outputs PTC input

Start/stop Analogue Parameter set Measuring

reference

Digital inputs Analogue/ Analogue Digital inputs

digital out
in

Fig. 53 Connection example when using the digital and analogue inputs and outputs

Digital input Digital input pulses [501]

The analogue/digital input is used as a digital input if one of This menu is available if the analogue/digital input is pro-
alternatives 1-5 in menu [500] is selected. Jumper J1 has to grammed for digital input signals for rotation sensor (alter-
be set for voltage control, which is the default setting. native 1) or for slow speed (alternative 2) in menu [500]. In
this menu the number of edges is chosen to deactivate the
The input signal is interpreted as 1 (high) when the input
braking function or the slow speed function respectively. .
voltage exceeds 5 V. When the input voltage is below 5 V the
input signal is interpreted as 0 (low). The input signal can be
generated using the internal control supply voltage by con- NOTE: All edges, both positive and negative transitions,
necting a switch between terminal 14 (analogue/digital will be counted.
input) and 18 (supply voltage to terminals 14, 16 and 17).
Setting
501
Digital input pulses

1
Default: 1
Range: 1-100
1-100 Number of edges
Fig. 54 Wiring for digital input signal.

78 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 83 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Analogue input [502] for a longer time than the analogue start/stop delay
The analogue/digital input is used as an analogue input if time set in menu [504]. A stop will be performed if the ref-
one of alternatives 6-7 in menu [500] is selected. In this erence signal exceeds the analogue start/stop off-value cho-
case, the input can be configured for voltage or current sig- sen in menu [503] for a longer time than the analogue start/
nal using jumper J1 (see Fig. 55). By default jumper J1 is set stop delay time set in menu [504].
to voltage signal. According to the chosen alternative in
menu [500], the signal will be interpreted as 0-10 V/ NOTE: If the selected analogue start/stop on-value is
0-20 mA or 2-10 V/4-20 mA (see Fig. 56). bigger than or equal to the off-value, a level above the
on-value at the analogue input will cause a start. A value
below the off-value will in this case cause a stop.

15 The start/stop LED on the front of the MSF will be flashing

if the softstarter is in standby mode waiting for an analogue
start.
Analogue/digital
input Warning: A flashing start/stop LED is indicating standby
mode - e.g. waiting for an analogue start. The motor may
be started automatically at a moment's notice
Fig. 55 Wiring for analogue/digital input and setting of J1 for
analogue current or voltage control.
Analogue start/stop on-value [502]
This menu is available if analogue start/stop is activated in
menu [500] (alternative 6 or 7). If the reference signal on
the analogue/digital input is below the chosen on-level for a
longer time than the analogue start/stop delay time chosen
in menu [504], a start will be performed..

NOTE: If the selected analogue start/stop on-value is

bigger than or equal to the off-value, a level above the
on-value at the analogue/digital input will cause a start.

NOTE: An analogue start will only be performed if the

softstarter has been set to standby mode by a valid start
signal via remote control or serial communication.
Input
signal
The analogue start/stop on-value is chosen as a percentage of
the input signal range. This means, if the analogue/digital
Fig. 56 Analogue input input is configured for 0-10 VDC/0-20 mA (alternative 6 in
menu [500]), 25% corresponds to 2.5 V or 5 mA. If the
analogue/digital input is configured for 2-10 VDC/4-20 mA
Analogue start/stop (alternative 7 in menu [500]), 25% corresponds to 4 V or
Starts and stops can be performed according to a process sig- 8 mA.
nal on the analogue/digital input. This means that e.g. the
operation of a pump may be controlled according to a flow Setting
signal. 502
Analogue start/stop is available if remote control or serial Analogue start/stop on-value
communication control is chosen in menu [200] (alterna-
tives 2 or 3). 2 5
Default: 25%
NOTE: Analogue start/stop is not available if control
panel is chosen as control source in menu [200] Range: 0-100% of input signal range
(alternative 1). 0-100 Analogue start/stop on-value.

If a start signal is given via remote or serial communication

(according to the setting in menu [200]), the softstarter will
check the reference signal on the analogue/digital signal. A
start will be performed if the level of the reference signal is
below the analogue start/stop on-value chosen in menu

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 79

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 84 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Analogue start/stop off-value [503]

This menu is available if analogue start/stop is activated in
menu [500] (alternatives 6 or 7). If the reference signal on
the analogue/digital input exceeds the chosen off-level for a
longer time than the analogue start/stop delay time chosen 1 2
in menu [504], a stop will be performed.
Digital inputs

NOTE: If the selected analogue start/stop off-value is

less than or equal to the on-value, a level below the off- 16 17 18
value at the analogue/digital input will cause a stop.
3 4

NOTE: A stop will also be performed if the softstarter Digital inputs

receives a stop signal via remote control or serial
communication. Fig. 57 Wiring for digital inputs 1-4.

The analogue start/stop off-value is chosen as a percentage of The four digital inputs are electrically identical.The digital
the input signal range. This means if the analogue/digital inputs can be used for remote control of start, stop and reset,
input is configured for 0-10 V / 0-20 mA (alternative 6 in for choice of parameter set and for external alarm.
menu [500]), 25% corresponds to 2.5 V or 5 mA. If the
Stop signal
analogue/digital input is configured for 2-10 V / 4-20 mA
If remote control is chosen in menu [200] (alternative 2),
(alternative 7 in menu [500]), 25% corresponds to 4 V or
one digital input has to be programmed as stop signal.
8 mA.

NOTE: No starts will be allowed if the input set for stop

Setting
503 signal is open or if no input is configured for stop signal.

Analogue start/stop off-value If the motor is running a stop will be performed according
7 5 to the stop settings in menus [320] to [325] as soon as the
input configured for stop signal is opened. If more than one
Default: 75% input is configured for stop signal, opening one of these will
lead to a stop. Accordingly no starts will be allowed if any of
Range: 0-100% of input signal range
these inputs is open.
0-100 Analogue start/stop off-value.
Start and reset signal
The digital inputs can be configured for several different
Analogue start/stop delay time [504] start signals (start, start R or start L signal). Closing any
This menu is available if analogue start/stop is activated in input, which is configured for start, will start the motor.
menu [500] (alternatives 6 or 7). In this menu the delay Moreover, a rising edge on any input configured for start is
time for starts and stops caused by the analogue reference interpreted as a reset signal.
signal is set.
NOTE: If more than one digital input is configured for any
Setting of the start signals (start, start R or start L), closing
504 more than one of these inputs at the same time will lead
to a stop. However, if several digital inputs are
Analogue start/stop delay time configured for the same start functionality, e.g. start R,
closing any of these inputs will lead to a start.
1 s
Default: 1s Naturally the softstarter has no way of controlling the
Range: 1-999 s
motor’s running direction internally. However, if two mains
contactors – one for each phase sequence – are used, these
1-999 Delay time for analogue start/stop
can be controlled by the softstarter using the programmable
relays. The settings for the programmable relays in menus
Digital inputs [530] to [532] correspond to the different start signals,
which can be chosen for the digital inputs. In this way dif-
The MSF 2.0 has four programmable digital inputs. The ferent running directions for the motor can be chosen.
four inputs and their corresponding control supply termi-
nals are shown overleaf in Fig. 57.

80 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 85 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Example Digital input 1 function [510]

1. If only one running direction is used, digital input 1 can In this menu the function for digital input 1 (terminal 11) is
be configured for start signal and digital input 2 for stop selected.
signal (default setting). In this case relay K1 may be con-
figured for operation (default setting) and can control
Setting
the mains relay. When digital inputs 1 and 2 are closed, 51 0
the mains contactor will be activated and the motor will
start. When digital input 2 is opened the motor will Digital input 1 function
stop. The mains contactor will be deactivated after the
stop has been finished. 1
2. If two running directions are desired, digital input 1 can Default: 1
be configured for start R, digital input 2 for stop and Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
digital input 3 for start L. Relay K1 controls the mains
oFF Digital input 1 is disabled
contactor for running in right direction and may be con-
figured for Operation R. Relay K2 controls the mains 1 Start signal
contactor with the opposite phase sequence for running 2 Stop signal
in left direction and may be configured for Operation L. 3 Parameter set, input 1
In this case closing digital inputs 1 and 2 (start right 4 Parameter set, input 2
command) will lead to activation of the mains contactor
5 External alarm signal
for running in right direction and the motor will start in
right direction. Opening digital input 2 will lead to a 6 Start R signal
stop; the mains contactor for running right will be deac- 7 Start L signal
tivated after the stop has been finished. Closing digital
inputs 2 and 3 (while digital input 1 is open) will lead to
activation of the mains contactor for running in left Digital input 2 function [511]
direction and the motor will start in left direction. In this menu the function for digital input 2 (terminal 12) is
For more information see the description of the start right/ selected.
left functionality in section 8.9.4, page 87.
Setting
External alarm 51 1
The digital inputs can be configured as external alarm
inputs. If an input configured for external alarm is opened, Digital input 2 function
the action chosen in menu [420] for external alarm is per- 2
formed. See description of the external alarm functionality
in section 8.9.5, page 89 for more information. Default: 2
Range: Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
NOTE: If more than one digital input is configured for oFF Digital input 2 is disabled.
external alarm, opening any of these will lead to an
external alarm. 1 Start signal
2 Stop signal

Parameter set 3 Parameter set, input 1

This configuration enables choice of parameter set by an 4 Parameter set, input 2
external signal. See description of external control of param- 5 External alarm signal
eter set in section 8.9.6, page 90 for more information. 6 Start R signal
7 Start L signal

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 81

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 86 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Digital input 3 function [512] selection is made by jumper J2 on the control board. The
In this menu the function for digital input 3 (terminal 16) is default setting for J2 is voltage signal according to Fig. 58.
selected.

Setting
51 2
Digital input 3 function

3
Default: 3
Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 Fig. 58 Wiring for analogue output and setting of J2 for ana-
oFF Digital input 3 is disabled. logue current or voltage signal.
1 Start signal
2 Stop signal Analogue output [520]
3 Parameter set, input 1 In this menu the analogue output can be set to provide
either one of the signal ranges shown in Fig. 59.
4 Parameter set, input 2
5 External alarm signal
6 Start R signal
7 Start L signal

Digital input 4 function [513]

In this menu the function for digital input 4 (terminal 17) is
selected.

Setting
51 3
Digital input 4 function

4 Output
signal

Default: 4
Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 Fig. 59 Analogue output
oFF Digital input 4 is disabled.
1 Start signal Setting
2 Stop signal 520
3 Parameter set, input 1
Analogue output
4 Parameter set, input 2
5 External alarm signal
o F F
6 Start R signal Default: oFF
7 Start L signal Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4
oFF Analogue output is disabled.

8.9.2 Output signals 1 Analogue signal 0-10 V/0-20 mA

The MSF 2.0 has one programmable analogue output and 2 Analogue signal 2-10 V/4-20 mA
three programmable relays. 3 Analogue signal 10-0 V/20-0 mA
4 Analogue signal 10-2 V/20-4 mA
Analogue output
The analogue output can present current, voltage, shaft
power and torque for connection to a recording instrument,
PLC etc. The external device is connected to terminals 19
(+) and 15 (-) according to Fig. 58 below. The analogue out-
put can be configured for voltage or current signal. The

82 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 87 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Analogue output function [521]

This menu is available if the analogue output is enabled in
menu [520] (alternatives 1-4). In this menu the desired out-
put function is chosen.

Setting
521
Analogue output function

1
Default: 1
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4
Output
1 RMS current signal

2 Line voltage
3 Shaft power
4 Torque Fig. 60 Scaling of analogue output

The scaling of the analogue output is reset to the default val- With the scaling for wide range (menu [522]=50 and menu
ues (0-100%) if a new output value is chosen in menu [523]=500) according to the example in Fig. 60 the follow-
[521]. ing will apply.
If 0-10 V/0-20 mA is chosen in menu [520] (alternative 1)
and RMS current is chosen as output value in menu [521]
Analogue output scaling (alternative 1), a current of 100% of the nominal motor cur-
By default the scaling of the analogue output corresponds to rent gives approximately 1.1 V or 2.2 mA at the analogue
Fig. 60. In this case the signal range of the analogue output output.
chosen in menu [520] corresponds to 0 to 100% of the
nominal motor current In, the nominal motor voltage Un,
the nominal motor power Pn or the nominal motor torque Scaling analogue output, min [522]
Tn respectively. This menu is available if the analogue output is enabled in
menu [520]. In this menu the minimum value to be shown
Example at the analogue output is chosen. The value is chosen in per-
If 0-10 V / 0-20 mA is chosen in menu [520] (alternative 1) cent of In, Un, Pn or Tn according to the output value cho-
and RMS current is chosen as output value in menu [521] sen in menu [521].
(alternative 1), a current of 100% of the nominal motor cur-
rent gives 10 V or 20 mA at the analogue output. A current
Setting
of 25% of the nominal motor current gives 2.5 V or 5 mA at 52 2
the analogue output.
The scaling of the analogue output may be adapted for Scaling analogue output, min
higher resolution or if values above the nominal values are to
be monitored. The scaling is done by choosing a minimum
0
scaling value in menu [522] and a maximum value in menu Default: 0%
[523]. An example for a different scaling is shown in Fig. 60. Range: 0-500%
0-500 Minimum output value

NOTE: The minimum value for scaling the analogue

output is reset to the default value 0% if a new output
value is chosen in menu [521].

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 83

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 88 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Scaling analogue output, max [523] grammed to react only to one specific power alarm or pre-
This menu is available if the analogue output is enabled in alarm (11 - 14).
menu [520]. In this menu the maximum value to be shown With setting All alarms (15) the relay will be activated for
at the analogue output is chosen. The value is chosen as a any alarm. As the power pre-alarms are not considered to be
percentage of In, Un, Pn or Tn according to the output value real alarms, the relay will not react to those. With alternative
chosen in menu [521]. 16 chosen, even the power alarms are excluded. When
External alarm (17) is chosen, only an External alarm will
Setting activate the relay. With setting 18, Autoreset expired, the
52 3 relay will be activated when an additional fault occurs after
the maximum allowed number of autoreset attempts have
Scaling analogue output, max been executed. This may indicate that external help is
1 0 0 needed to rectify a re-occurring fault (see description of
Autoreset in section 8.5, page 52 for detailed information).
Default: 100% With alternative 19 the relay will indicate all alarms which
Range: 0-500%
need a manual reset. This includes all alarms which are not
solved with an automatic Autoreset, e.g. all alarms for which
0-500 Maximum output value.
Autoreset is not enabled and each alarm occurring after the
maximum allowed number of autoreset attempts has been
NOTE: The maximum value for scaling the analogue executed.
output is reset to the default value 100% if a new output
value is chosen in menu [521].

Programmable relay outputs Motor

voltage
Time
The softstarter has three built-in relays, K1, K2 and K3. All
three relays are programmable.
For relay K1 (terminals 21 and 22) and K2 (terminals 23
and 24) the contact function can be programmed in menus Time
operation
[533] and [534] respectively to be normally open (NO) or
normally closed (NC). Relay K3 is a change-over relay with
three terminals (31-33), the NO functionality is available Full voltage Time
between terminals 31 and 32, NC functionality between ter-
minals 32 and 33.
Run
The relays can be used to control mains contactors or a Time
bypass contactor or to indicate alarm conditions. As illus-
trated in Fig. 61 overleaf, the Operation setting (alternative
Brake
1) should be chosen to activate the mains contactor both
during start, full voltage operation and stop. If a by-pass
contactor is used, this can be controlled by a relay with the Start Full Stop
time voltage time
setting Full voltage (2). The settings Run (5) and Brake (4) delay
are used when reverse current brake is chosen as stop 0,1 s
method. In this case one relay has to be configured for Run
and will control the mains contactor during the start and Fig. 61 The relay functions for operation, run and full voltage.
during full voltage operation. Another relay has to be config-
ured for Brake and will control the contactor with reversed
phase sequence during braking. For security reasons the relay
configured for Brake will not be activated until after a time
delay of 500 ms after deactivation of the relay configured for
Run.
The settings Run R, Run L, Operation R and Operation L
are used for the start right/left functionality. Consult section
8.9.4, page 87 for more information.
Different alarms can also be indicated on the relay outputs.
With the setting Power pre-alarms (alternative 3), both a
Max power pre-alarm or a Min power pre-alarm occurring
will activate the relay. When Power alarms (10) is chosen as a
setting, both a Max power alarm or a Min power alarm will
activate the relay. If so desired, the relays can instead be pro-

84 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 89 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Relay K1 [530] Relay K2 [531]

In this menu the function for relay K1 (terminals 21 and 22) In this menu the function for relay K2 (terminals 23 and 24)
is chosen. is chosen.

Setting Setting
530 531
Relay K1 Relay K2

1 2
Default: 1 Default: 2
Range: oFF, 1 - 19 Range: oFF, 1-19
oFF Relay inactive oFF Relay inactive
1 Operation See menu “Relay K1 [530]” for setting
1-19
2 Full voltage alternatives.

3 Power pre-alarms
4 Brake NOTE: If relay K2 is chosen to be inactive (oFF), the relay
state is determined by the contact function in menu
5 Run [534].
6 Run R
7 Run L
WARNING: When reverse current brake is
8 Operation R activated by changing the settings in menu
9 Operation L [320] (stop method), [323] (braking method)
or [326] (alarm brake strength), relay K2 is
10 Power alarms
automatically set for Brake (4). If a different setting is
11 Max power alarm desired for the specific application, the relay setting has
12 Max power pre-alarm to be changed afterwards.
13 Min power alarm
14 Min power pre-alarm
Relay K3 [532]
15 All alarms (except power pre-alarms)
In this menu the function for relay K3 (terminals 31-33) is
All alarms (except power alarms and pre- chosen.
16
alarms)
17 External alarm Setting
18 Autoreset expired 532
19 All alarms which need manual reset
Relay K3

NOTE: If relay K1 is chosen to be inactive (oFF), the relay 1 5

state is determined by the contact function in menu
Default: 15
[533].
Range: oFF, 1-19
oFF Relay inactive
WARNING: When reverse current brake is
activated by changing the settings in menu See menu “Relay K1 [530]” for setting
1-19
[320] (stop method), [323] (braking method) alternatives.
or [326] (alarm brake strength), relay K1 is
automatically set for Run (5). If a different setting is
desired for the specific application, the relay setting has
to be changed afterwards.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 85

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 90 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

K1 contact function [533] Serial communication

In this menu the contact function for relay K1 can be cho- For description of the start, stop and reset commands via
sen. The available alternatives are Normally open (1=Clos- serial communication see the operation instruction supplied
ing on relay activation) and Normally closed (2=Opening on with this option.
relay activation).

Setting
Remote control
533 When remote control is chosen in menu [200], the digital
inputs are used to start and stop the motor and to reset
K1 contact function upcoming alarms. In the following sections different possi-
1 bilities for connecting the digital inputs are described. For
the following explanations the following settings are
Default: 1 assumed:
Range: 1, 2
Menu Description Setting
1 Normally open (N.O.)
510 Digital input 1 (terminal 11) Start signal (1)
2 Normally closed (N.C.)
511 Digital input 2 (terminal 12) Stop signal (2)

K2 contact function [534]

In this menu the contact function for relay K2 can be cho-
2-wire start/stop with automatic reset
sen. The available alternatives are Normally open (1=Clos- at start
ing on relay activation) and Normally closed (2=Opening on
relay activation).

Setting
534
K2 contact function Start/
Reset
1 Stop

Default: 1
Range: 1, 2
1 Normally open (N.O.)
2 Normally closed (N.C.)
Fig. 62 2-wire connection of terminals for start/stop/automatic
reset at start
8.9.3 Start/stop/reset command
functionality An external switch is connected between terminals 12 and
Starting/stopping of the motor and alarm reset is done either 13 and a jumper is connected between terminals 11 and 12.
from the control panel, through the remote control inputs
Start
or through the serial communication interface depending on
Closing terminal 12 to terminal 13 will give a start com-
the control source chosen in menu [200].
mand. If terminal 12 is closed to terminal 13 at power up, a
start command is given immediately (automatic start at
Control panel power up).
To start and stop from the control panel, the “START/ Stop
STOP” key is used.
Opening terminal 12 will give a stop command.
To reset from the control panel, the “ENTER /RESET”
Reset
key is used.
When a start command is given there will automatically be a
Regardless of the chosen control source, it is always possible reset.
to initiate a reset via the control panel.

NOTE! A reset via the control panel will never start the
motor.

86 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 91 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2-wire start/stop with separate reset The connection between terminal 11 and 13 is normally
open and the connection between terminal 12 and 13 is nor-
mally closed.

Start
Closing terminal 11 momentarily to terminal 13, will give a
start command. There will not be an automatic start at
Start/ power up as long as terminal 11 is open.
Stop
Reset Stop
To stop, terminal 12 is momentarily opened.

Reset
When a start command is given there will automatically be a
reset.

Fig. 63 2-wire connection of terminals for start/stop/separate

reset
8.9.4 Start right/left functionality
The digital inputs can be configured to enable starting a
One external switch is connected between terminals 11 and motor in two different directions in combination with the
13 and a second switch is connected between terminals 12 programmable relays K1 and K2. A connection example is
and 13. shown in Fig. 65. For the following description of the start
right/left functionality, the following settings for the digital
Start inputs are assumed.
Closing terminals 11 and 12 to terminal 13 will give a start
command. If terminals 11 and 12 are closed at power up, a Menu Description Setting
start command is given immediately (automatic start at
510 Digital input 1 (terminal 11) Start R signal (6)
power up).
511 Digital input 2 (terminal 12) Stop signal (2)
Stop
512 Digital input 3 (terminal 16) Start L signal (7)
Opening terminal 12 will give a stop command.
Reset
When terminal 11 is opened and closed again a reset is
given. A reset can be given both when the motor is running
and when it is stopped.

3-wire start/stop with automatic reset

at start

Stop

Start/Reset

Fig. 64 Connection of terminals for start/stop/reset

An external switch is connected between terminals 11 and

13 and a second switch is connected between terminals 12
and 13.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 87

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 92 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Stop

Start Right / Start Left /

Reset Reset

Fig. 65 Connection for start right/left

The configuration of the relays depends on the application's If both start terminals (11 and 16) are closed to their respec-
requirements. For applications which do not use the reverse tive supply voltage at the same time, a stop is performed in
current brake functionality, the following settings may be the same way as described above. In this case no start will be
used. allowed.
A motor can be reversed from right to left direction as fol-
Menu Description Setting lows: When the motor is running in right direction, termi-
530 Relay K1 (terminals 21 and 22) Operation R (8) nal 11 is opened. Terminal 16 is then closed to terminal 18.
531 Relay K2 (terminals 23 and 24) Operation L (9) In this case the voltage to the motor is switched off and the
mains contactor for running right is deactivated by relay K1.
After a time delay of 500 ms the mains contactor for run-
With these settings the functionality is as follows:
ning left will be activated by relay K2 and a start in left
If terminals 11and 12 are closed to terminal 13 while termi- direction will be performed. The motor can be reversed
nal 16 is open, the mains contactor for running in right from running left to running right in the same way by open-
direction will be activated by relay K1 and the motor will ing terminal 16 while running left and then closing terminal
start in right direction. If terminal 12 is opened, a stop 11.
according to the stop settings in menus [320] to [325] will
be performed. When the stop is finished, the mains contac- CAUTION: Very high currents can arise when
tor for running right will be deactivated by relay K1. the motor is reversed from running at full speed
If terminal 12 is closed to terminal 13 and terminal 16 is
! in one direction to running at full speed in the
opposite direction.
closed to terminal 18 while terminal 11 is open, the mains
contactor for running in left direction will be activated by
relay K2 and the motor will start in left direction. If terminal
12 is opened, a stop according to the stop settings in menus
[320] to [325] will be performed. When the stop is finished,
the mains contactor for running left will be deactivated by
relay K2.

88 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 93 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

WARNING: If configured according to the

description above, relays K1 and K2 will
never be activated at the same time. There is NOTE: When reverse current brake is activated by
a time delay of 500 ms for the change-over changing the settings in menu [320] (stop method),
between the relays. However, if the relays are not [323] (braking method) or [326] (alarm brake strength),
configured properly, they may be activated at the same relay K1 is automatically set for Run (5) and relay K2 is
time. automatically set for Brake (4). To use the start right/
left functionality in combination with reverse brake, the
For applications which use the reverse current brake func- relay settings have to be adapted as described above
once reverse current brake has been enabled.
tionality, the following settings for the relays may be used.

Menu Description Setting 8.9.5 External alarm functionality

530 Relay K1 (terminals 21 and 22) Run R (6) The external alarm functionality is used to generate an alarm
531 Relay K2 (terminals 23 and 24) Run L (7) depending on the state of an external alarm signal. Each of
the digital inputs can be configured for external alarm signal.
With these settings the functionality is as follows: Fig. 66 shows a connection example with digital input 3
(terminal 16) configured for external alarm signal.
If terminals 11and 12 are closed to terminal 13 while termi-
nal 16 is open, the mains contactor for running in right
direction will be activated by relay K1 and the motor will
start in right direction. If terminal 12 is opened the voltage
to the motor is switched off and the mains contactor for
running right is deactivated by relay K1. After a time delay
of 500 ms the mains contactor for running left will be acti-
vated by relay K2 and the reverse current brake will brake External alarm
the motor to standstill. When the stop is finished, the mains
contactor for running left will be deactivated by relay K2.
If terminal 12 is closed to terminal 13 and terminal 16 is
closed to terminal 18 while terminal 11 is open, the mains Fig. 66 Connection of terminals for external alarm
contactor for running in left direction will be activated by
relay K2 and the motor will start in left direction. If terminal If any digital input is configured for external alarm signal,
12 is opened the voltage to the motor is switched off and the opening this input will cause an external alarm to occur if
mains contactor for running left is deactivated by relay K2. external alarm is enabled in menu [420].
After a time delay of 500 ms the mains contactor for run-
ning right will be activated by relay K1 and the reverse cur- NOTE: If more than one digital input is configured for
rent brake will brake the motor to standstill. When the stop external alarm signal, opening any of these inputs will
is finished, the mains contactor for running right will be generate an external alarm if external alarm is enabled
deactivated by relay K1. in menu [420].

If both start terminals (11 and 16) are closed to their respec-
tive supply voltage at the same time, a stop is performed in The following alarm actions are available for external alarm:
the same way as described above. In this case no start will be
Off
allowed.
External alarm is disabled.
A motor can be reversed in the same way as described above
for applications which do not use the reverse current brake Warning
functionality. An F17 alarm message is shown in the display and relay K3
is activated (for default configuration of the relays) if the
external alarm input is opened. However, the motor is not
WARNING: If configured according to the
description above, relays K1 and K2 will stopped and operation continues. The alarm message will
never be activated at the same time. There is disappear and the relay will be reset when the external alarm
a time delay of 500 ms for the change-over input is closed again. The alarm may also be reset manually.
between the relays. However, if the relays are not
configured properly, they may be activated at the same Coast
time. An F17 alarm message is shown in the display and relay K3
is activated (for default configuration of the relays) if the
external alarm input is opened. The motor voltage is auto-
matically switched off. The motor freewheels until it stops.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 89

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 94 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Stop
The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays)
if the external alarm input is opened. The motor is stopped
according to the stop settings in menus [320] to [325].

Brake
The appropriate alarm message is shown in the display and
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays)
if the external alarm input is opened. The brake function is
activated according to the braking method chosen in menu Fig. 67 Connection of external control inputs.
[323] and the motor is stopped according to the alarm brake
settings in menu [326] - [327] (Braking strength and brak- Table 15 How parameter set inputs are evaluated
ing time). Parameter Set PS1 (16-18) PS2 (17-18)
Spinbrake 1 Open Open
The functionality for the spinbrake alternative is the same as 2 Closed Open
described above for the brake alternative. However, if spin- 3 Open Closed
brake is chosen, braking can even be initiated from an inac- 4 Closed Closed
tive state by opening the external alarm input. This means
the softstarter can catch a freewheeling motor and brake it It is possible to use just one digital input to change between
down to standstill. The Spinbrake alternative is only availa- two parameter sets. According to the example above, digital
ble for external alarm. input 3 is configured for PS1. If no digital input is config-
ured for PS2, PS2 is considered to be open. In this case dig-
External alarm can be used together with any setting for the
ital input 3 can be used to change between parameter set 1
control source chosen in menu [200].
and 2.
If the operation has been interrupted due to an external
Changing the parameter set via external signal is only exe-
alarm, a reset signal and a new start signal are needed to
cuted in stopped mode and at full voltage operation. If the
restart the motor. The reset and the start signal can be given
input signals for PS1 and PS2 are changed during accelera-
via control panel, remote or via serial communication
tion or deceleration, only the new parameters for the control
depending on the control source chosen in menu [200].
source (menu [200]), the analogue/digital input (menu
Regardless of the chosen control source, it is always possible
[500]), the digital input pulses (menu [501]), the analogue
to initiate a reset via control panel.
start/stop on- and off-value (menus [502] and [503]) and
the analogue start/stop delay (menu [504]) are loaded
NOTE: A reset via control panel will never start the immediately. All other parameters will not change until the
motor. softstarter is in stopped mode or at full voltage running. In
this way a change of the control source will take effect
immediately, which can be useful for changing from remote
8.9.6 External control of parameter to manual operation for maintenance.
set
The parameter set can be chosen via the digital inputs if NOTE: No parameters, except for the control source in
external control of parameter set is chosen in menu [240] menu [200] and the parameter set in menu [240], may
(alternative 0). For this purpose any of the digital inputs can be changed if external control of parameter set is
be configured for parameter set input 1 (PS1, alternative 3 activated in menu [240] (alternative 0).
in menus [510] to [513]) or parameter set input 2 (PS2,
alternative 4 in menus [510] to [513]). Fig. 67 shows a con-
nection example for external control of parameter set, in this
example digital inputs 3 and 4 are configured for PS1 and
PS2.

90 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 95 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8.10 View operation Output shaftpower

MSF 2.0 includes numerous viewing functions which elimi- The output shaft power is shown in kW or in HP depending
nate the need for additional transducers and meters for on the setting for Enable US units in menu [202].
monitoring the operation.
Read-out
[700] to [716] Operation (current, voltage, power etc.) 703
[720] to [725] Status (softstart status, input/output status)
Output shaftpower
[730] to [732] Stored values (operation time etc.)
0. 0
8.10.1 Operation Range: -999-9999 kW or HP

RMS current Output shaftpower in percentage unit

Read-out Read-out
700 704
Current Output shaftpower in
0. 0 0 percentage units

Range: 0.0-9999 A Range: 0-200% of Pn

NOTE! This is the same read-out as menu [100]. NOTE: This is the same read-out as menu [413].

Line main voltage Shaft torque

The shaft torque is shown in Nm or in lbft depending on
Read-out the setting for Enable US units in menu [202].
701
Read-out
Line main voltage 70 5
0 Shaft torque
Range: 0-720 V
0. 0
Range: -999-9999 Nm or lbft
Power factor
Read-out Shaft torque in percentage unit
702
Read-out
Power factor 706
0. 0 0 Shaft torque in percentage units
Range: 0.00-1.00
0
Range: 0-250% of Tn

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 91

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 96 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Softstarter temperature Line main voltage L1-L3

The softstart temperature is shown in degrees Celsius or in
degrees Fahrenheit depending on the setting for Enable US Read-out
units in menu [202]. 712
Line main voltage L1-L3
Read-out
707 0
Softstarter temperature Range: 0-720 V
Lo
Range: Low, 30-96°C or low, 85-204°F Line main voltage L2-L3
Read-out
Current phase l1 713

Read-out Line main voltage L2-L3

708
0
Current phase L1 Range: 0-720 V
0. 0
Range: 0.0-9999 A Phase sequence
Read-out
Current phase L2 714

Read-out Phase sequence

709 L - - -
Current phase L2 Range: L- -, L123, L321
0. 0
Range: 0.0-9999 A Used thermal capacity
Read-out
Current phase L3 715

Read-out Used thermal capacity

71 0
0
Current phase L3 Range: 0-150%
0. 0
Range: 0.0-9999 A Time to next allowed start
Read-out
Line main voltage L1-L2 716

Read-out Time to next allowed start

711
0
Line main voltage L1-L2 Range: 0-60 min
0
Range: 0-720 V

92 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 97 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8.10.2 Status Analogue/digital input value

Value on the analogue/digital input as a percentage of the
Softstarter status
input range. This read-out depends on the configuration of
the analogue/digital input in menu [500], e.g. if the ana-
Read-out
720 logue/digital input is configured for analogue start/stop
0-10 V/0-20 mA (alternative 6), an input signal of 4 V or
8 mA will be shown as 40%. However, if the analogue/dig-
Softstarter status
ital input is configured for analogue start/stop 2.10 V/4-20
0 mA (alternative 7), an input signal of 4 V or 8 mA will be
shown as 25%.
Range: 1-12
1 Stopped, no alarm Read-out
2 Stopped, alarm 723
3 Run with alarm
Analogue/digital input value
4 Acceleration
5 Full voltage
0
6 Deceleration Range: 0-100%
7 Bypassed
8 PFC
Relay status
9 Braking
Status of the relays K1 to K3 from the left to the right. L or
10 Slow speed forward H are displayed for relay status low (opened) or high
11 Slow speed reverse (closed). The status described for relay K3 corresponds to
Standby (waiting for Analogue start/stop or the status of terminal 3.
12
Autoreset)
Read-out
724
Digital Input Status
Status of the digital inputs 1- 4 from left to right. L or H are Relay status
displayed for input status low (open) or high (closed). L L L
Read-out Range: LLL-HHH
721
Digital input status Analogue Output value
L L L L Value on the analogue output as a percentage of the output
range. This read-out depends on the configuration of the
Range: LLLL-HHHH analogue output in menu [520], e.g. if the analogue/digital
input is configured for 0-10 V/0-20 mA (alternative 1) or
for 10-0 V/20-0 mA (alternative 3), an output signal of 4 V
Analogue/digital Input status or 8 mA will be shown as 40%. However, if the analogue
Status of the analogue/digital input when it is used as digital output is configured for 2-10 V/4-20 mA (alternative 2) or
input. L and H are displayed for input status low (open) and 10-2 V/20-4 mA (alternative 4), an output signal of 4 V or
high (closed). 8 mA will be shown as 25%.

Read-out Read-out
722 725
Analogue/digital input status Analogue Output value

L 0
Range: L, H Range: 0-100%

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 93

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 98 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8.10.3 Stored values 8.11 Alarm list

Operation time. The operation time is the time during The alarm list is generated automatically. It shows the latest
which the motor connected to the softstarter is running, not 15 alarms (F1-F17). The alarm list can be useful for tracking
the time during which the supply power is on. failures in the softstarter or its control circuit. In the alarm
If the actual value for the operation time exceeds 9999 hours list both the alarm message and the operation time is saved
the display will alternate between the four lower digits and for each alarms that occurs. In menu [800] the latest alarm
the higher digits. message and the corresponding operation time are shown
alternately, in the same way, older alarms are shown in
Example menus [801] to [814].
If the actual operation time is 12467, 1 will be shown for
1 s, then 2467 will be shown for 5 s and so on. Example
• If the latest alarm was a phase input failure (F1), which
occurred at operation time 524. F1 is shown for 4 s then
Read-out
730 524 is shown for 2 s and so on.
• If the latest alarm was a thermal motor protection alarm
Operation time (F2), which occurred at operation time 17852. F2 is
0 shown for 3 s, after that 1 is shown for 1 s, then 7852 is
shown for 2 s and so on.
Range: 0-9 999 999 h

Alarm list, latest error

Energy consumption
Read-out
Read-out
80 0
7 31
Alarm list, latest error
Energy consumption
F 1
0. 0 0 0 Range: F1-F17
Range: 0.000-2000 MWh

Alarm list, error

Reset energy consumption
In this menu the stored power consumption (menu [713]) Read-out
can be reset to 0.
801
Alarm list, error 14
Multi Setting
73 2 F 1
Reset energy consumption Range: F1-F17

n o
Menu Function
Default: no
802 Alarm list, error 13
Range: no, YES
803 Alarm list, error 12
no No action
804 Alarm list, error 11
YES Reset power consumption
805 Alarm list, error 10
806 Alarm list, error 9
807 Alarm list, error 8
808 Alarm list, error 7
809 Alarm list, error 6
810 Alarm list, error 5
811 Alarm list, error 4
812 Alarm list, error 3
813 Alarm list, error 2
814 Alarm list, error 1

94 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 99 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8.12 Softstarter data

In menus [900] to [902] the softstarter type is shown and
the softstarter’s software version is specified.

Softstarter type
Read-out
900
Softstarter type

1 7
Range: 17-1400 A

Software variant
Read-out
901
Software variant text

V 2 2 0
Range: Same as label

Software version
Read-out
902
Software version text

R 1 5
Range: Same as label

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Functional description 95

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 100 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

96 Functional description Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 101 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

9. Protection and alarm

MSF 2.0 is equipped with functions for motor protection, Brake
process protection and protection of the softstarter itself. The appropriate alarm code is flashing in the display and
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays)
if an alarm occurs. The brake function is activated according
9.1 Alarm codes to the braking method chosen in menu [323] and the motor
Different alarm codes are used for the different errors, see is stopped according to the alarm brake settings in menus
Table 16 for a description of the alarm codes used. When an [326] to [327] (braking strength and braking time). If alarm
alarm occurs, this is indicated with the appropriate alarm braking is deactivated in menu [326] and Brake is chosen as
message flashing in the display. If more than one alarm is an alarm action, the action will be the same as described
active at the same time, the alarm code for the last alarm is above for Coast.
presented on the display. The alarm code for each occurring
Brake as an alarm action may mainly be used in combina-
alarm is also saved in the alarm list in menus [800] to [814].
tion with External alarm, where an external signal is used to
initiate a quick stop with a higher braking strength and a
9.2 Alarm actions shorter braking time compared to normal operation.

For most protection methods a proper action can be chosen Spinbrake

to be performed if the relevant alarm occurs. The following The functionality for the Spinbrake alternative is the same as
alternatives are available as alarm actions (all alternatives described above for the Brake alternative. However, if Spin-
may not be available for all protection methods - check brake is chosen, braking can even be initiated from an inac-
Table 16): tive state. This means the softstarter can catch a freewheeling
motor and brake it down to standstill.
Off
The alarm is deactivated. The Spinbrake alternative is only available for External
alarm. It may be useful e.g. for test running of planers and
Warning bandsaws after tool exchange. It may be desirable to acceler-
The appropriate alarm code is flashing in the display and ate the tool up to a specific speed and then leave it coasting
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays) to check if there is any unbalance. In this case it is possible to
if an the alarm occurs. However, the motor is not stopped activate braking immediately by opening the external input.
ans operation continues. The alarm message in the display In Table 16 below the alarm actions available for each alarm
will disappear and the relay will be reset when the alarm has type are specified in detail.
disappeared. The alarm may also be reset manually. This set-
ting alternative may be useful if it is desired to control oper-
ation in alarm state by an external control unit. 9.3 Reset
Coast For the following explanations it is important to distinguish
The appropriate alarm code is flashing in the display and between Reset and Restart. Reset means that the alarm mes-
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays) sage on the display disappears and the alarm relay K3 (for
if an the alarm occurs. The motor voltage is automatically default configuration of the relays) is deactivated. If the
switched off. The motor is freewheels until it stops. operation has been interrupted due to an alarm the soft-
starter is prepared for a Restart. However, giving a Reset sig-
This setting alternative is useful if continuous running or nal without giving a new start signal will never lead to a
active stopping could harm the process or the motor. This start.
may be appplicable for applications with very high inertia
that use braking as the normal stop method. In this case it The Reset signal can be given via control panel, remotely or
may be a good idea to choose Coast as alarm action on ther- via serial communication depending on the control source
mal motor protection alarm, because continuous running or chosen in menu [200]. Regardless of the chosen control
braking could harm the motor seriously when this alarm has method, it is always possible to give a Reset signal via control
occurred. panel.
If an alarm occurs whose alarm action is configured for
Stop Warning (see description of alarm actions above), the alarm
The appropriate alarm code is flashing in the display and
will automatically be reset as soon as the failure disappears.
relay K3 is activated (for default configuration of the relays)
The alarm may also be reset manually by giving a Reset sig-
if an alarm occurs. The motor is stopped according to the
nal as described above.
stop settings in menus [320] to [325].
If operation has been interrupted due to an alarm, a Reset
This setting is useful for applications where a correct stop is
signal and a new start signal may be needed to Restart the
important. This may apply to most pump applications, as
motor. However, some alarms are automatically reset when a
Coast as an alarm action could cause water hammer.
new start signal is given. Table 16 covers all alarm types and

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Protection and alarm 97

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 102 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

whether they need a Reset signal (manual reset) or if they are possible until the failure has disappeared. If a new start sig-
reset automatically when a new start signal is given. nal is given while the failure still is active, the alarm message
An alarm can always be reset by giving a Reset signal, even if will appear flashing in the display and the alarm relay K3
the failure that caused the alarm has not disappeared yet. will be activated again (for default configuration of the
Giving a Reset will cause the alarm message on the display to relays).
disappear and the alarm relay K3 to be deactivated (for MSF 2.0 is also provided with an Autoreset function. This
default configuration of the relays). However, if operation functionality is described in detail in section 8.5, page 52.
has been interrupted due to an alarm, a Restart will not be

9.4 Alarm overview

Table 16 Alarm overview

Alarm
Alarm description Alarm action Protection system Reset
code
Warning Motor protection Automatic Reset when new start signal is
F1 Phase input failure.
Coast (menu [230]) given.
Off
Warning
Thermal motor protec- Motor protection
F2 Coast Separate Reset signal needed.
tion (menu [220])
Stop
Brake
F3 Soft start overheated Coast Separate Reset signal needed.
Off
Warning
Current limit start time Motor protection Automatic Reset when new start signal is
F4 Coast
expired. (menu [231]) given.
Stop
Brake
Off
Motor protection
F5 Locked rotor alarm. Warning Separate Reset signal needed.
(menu [228])
Coast
Off
Warning
Process protection
F6 Max power alarm. Coast Separate Reset signal needed.
(menu [400])
Stop
Brake
Off
Warning
Process protection
F7 Min power alarm. Coast Separate Reset signal needed.
(menu [401])
Stop
Brake
Off
Warning
Voltage unbalance Process protection Automatic Reset when new start signal is
F8 Coast
alarm. (menu [430]) given.
Stop
Brake
Off
Warning
Process protection Automatic Reset when new start signal is
F9 Overvoltage alarm. Coast
(menu [433]) given.
Stop
Brake
Off
Warning
Process protection Automatic Reset when new start signal is
F10 Undervoltage alarm. Coast
(menu [436]) given.
Stop
Brake

98 Protection and alarm Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 103 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 16 Alarm overview

Alarm
Alarm description Alarm action Protection system Reset
code
Off
Motor protection Automatic Reset when new start signal is
F11 Start limitation. Warning
(menu [224]) given.
Coast
F12 Shorted thyristor. Coast Separate Reset signal needed.
F13 Open thyristor. Coast Separate Reset signal needed.
F14 Motor terminal open. Coast Separate Reset signal needed.
Off
Warning Control source pro-
Serial communication Automatic Reset when new start signal is
F15 Coast tection (menu
contact broken. given.
Stop [273])
Brake
Off
Process protection
F16 Phase reversal alarm. Warning Separate Reset signal needed.
(menu [440])
Coast
Off
Warning
Coast Process protection
F17 External alarm. Separate Reset signal needed.
Stop (menu [420])
Brake
Spinbrake

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Protection and alarm 99

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 104 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

100 Protection and alarm Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 105 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

10. Troubleshooting

10.1 Fault, cause and solution

Observation Fault indication Cause Solution

The display is not
None No control supply voltage. Switch on the control supply voltage.
illuminated.
F1 Fuse defective. Renew the fuse.
The motor does not (Phase input failure) No mains supply. Switch on the mains supply.
run.
Check the PTC input if PTC protection
is used.
PTC connection could be open. If internal thermal motor protection
F2
Incorrect nominal motor current is used, perhaps an other internal
(Thermal motor protection)
could be entered in menu [211]. thermal protection class could be
used (menu [222]).
Cool down the motor and restart.
Check ventilation of cabinet.
Check the size of the cabinet.
Ambient temperature too high.
F3 Clean the cooling fins.
Softstarter duty cycle exceeded.
(Softstarter overheated) If the fan(s) is (are) not working cor-
Could be fan failure.
rectly, contact your local MSF sales
outlet.
F4 Current limit parameters are per- Increase the start time (menu [315])
(Current limit start time haps not matched to the load and and/or the current limit at start
expired) motor. (menu [314]).
Check the machine and motor bear-
F5 Something stuck in the machine
ings. Perhaps the Locked rotor time
(Locked rotor) or perhaps motor bearing failure.
can be set longer (menu [229]).
Check the machine.
F6 Perhaps the Max power alarm
Overload
(Max power alarm) response delay can be set longer
menu [404].
Check the machine.
F7 Perhaps the Min power alarm
Underload
(Mn power alarm) response delay can be set longer
menu [410].
F8
Mains supply voltage unbalance. Check mains supply.
(Voltage unbalance)
F9
Mains supply overvoltage. Check mains supply.
(Overvoltage)
F10
Mains supply undervoltage. Check mains supply.
(Undervoltage)
Wait and start again.
Number of starts per hour Perhaps the number of starts per
F11
exceeded, min time between hour could be increased in menu
(Start limitation)
starts not kept. [225] or the min time between starts
could be decreased (menu [226]).
Initiate a reset and a restart. If the
F13
Perhaps a damaged thyristor. same alarm appears immediately,
(Open thyristor)
contact your local MSF sales outlet.
If the fault is not found, reset the
alarm and inspect the alarm list. If
alarm F12 is found, a thyristor is
F14 Open motor contact, cable or
probably shorted.
(Motor terminal open) motor winding.
Initiate a restart. If alarm F14
appears immediately, contact your
local MSF sales outlet.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Troubleshooting 101

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 106 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Observation Fault indication Cause Solution

The motor does not Initiate a reset and try to establish
run. contact. Check contacts, cables and
option board.
Verify
- Serial communication unit address
F15
Serial communication contact bro- [270].
(Serial communication contact
ken. - Baudrate menu [271].
broken)
- Parity menu [272].
If the fault is not found, run the
motor from the control panel if
urgent set menu [200] to 1. See also
manual for serial communication.
F16 Incorrect phase sequence on
Switch L2 and L3 input phases.
(Phase reversal) main supply.
Check the digital input configured for
External alarm. Check the configura-
F17 (External alarm) External alarm signal input open
tion of the digital inputs (menus
[510] to [513]).
Start command comes perhaps
from incorrect control source. (I.e. Give start command from correct
----
start from control panel when control source menu [200].
remote control is selected).
Check fuses and mains supply.
The motor is running Select a different alarm action for
but an alarm is F1 Failure in one phase.
Single phase input failure in menu
given. (Phase input failure) Perhaps fuse is defective.
[230] if stop is desired at single
phase loss.
Increase the start time (menu [315])
and/or the current limit at start
F4 Current limit parameters are per-
(menu [314]). Select a different
(Current limit start time haps not matched to the load and
action for Current limit start time
expired) motor.
expired alarm in menu [231], if stop
is desired at current limit time-out.
When stop command is given, a free-
wheel stop is made. Initiate a reset
and a restart. If alarm F14 appears
immediately, contact your local MSF
sales outlet.
Perhaps a damaged thyristor.
If the motor must be started urgently,
F12 the softstarter can start the motor
(Shorted thyristor) direct on-line (DOL). Set the start
method to DOL in this case (menu
[310]=4).
Bypass contactor is used but
menu [340] ’Bypass’ is not set to Set menu [340] Bypass to on.
“on”.
Initiate a reset and try to establish
contact. Check contacts, cables and
option board.
Verify
- Serial communication unit address
F15
Serial communication contact bro- [270].
(Serial communication contact
ken. - Baudrate menu [271].
broken)
- Parity menu [272].
If the fault is not found, run the
motor from the control panel if
urgent, see also manual for serial
communication.

102 Troubleshooting Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 107 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Observation Fault indication Cause Solution

Input nominal motor data in menus
[210]-[215]. Select the proper torque
control alternative in menu [310] (lin-
ear or square) according to the load
If “Torque control” or “Pump con-
characteristic.
trol” is selected, it is necessary to
Select a correct initial- and end
input motor data into the system.
torque at start in menus [311] and
[312]. If ’Bypass’ is selected, check
that the current transformers are
correctly connected.
When starting, motor reaches Start time too short. Increase start time [315].
full speed but it jerks or
vibrates. If voltage control is used as start
method, the initial voltage at start
The motor jerks etc. Adjust initial voltage at start [311].
may be too low. Starting voltage
incorrectly set.
Motor too small in relation to rated Use a smaller model of the soft-
current of softstarter. starter.
Motor too large in relation to load
Use larger model of softstarter.
of softstarter.
Starting voltage not set Readjust the start ramp.
correctly. Select the current limit function.
Readjust the start and/or stop ramp
Ramp times not set correctly.
Starting or stopping time too time.
long. Motor too large or too small in
Change to another motor size.
relation to load.
Input nominal motor data in menus
[210]-[215]. Adjust alarm margins
It is necessary to input nominal
and normal load in menus [402] -
The monitor function motor data for this function.
No alarm or pre-alarm [412]. Use Autoset [411] if needed. If
does not work. Incorrect alarm margins or normal
a Bypass contactor is used, check
load.
that the current transformers are
correctly connected.
Adjust the response delay times for
Unexplainable
F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, F10 Alarm delay time is too short. the alarms in menus [229], [404],
alarm.
[410], [432], [435] and [438].
PTC input terminal could be open. PTC input terminal should be short
Motor could still be too warm. circuit if not used. Wait until motor
F2
If internal motor protection is PTC gives an OK (not overheated) sig-
(Thermal motor protection)
used, the cooling in the internal nal. Wait until the internal cooling is
model may take some time. done. Try to restart after a while.
The system seems
locked in an alarm. Check that cables from power part
are connected in terminals 71 to 74.
F3 Ambient temperature to high. MSF-017 to MSF-250 should have a
(Softstarter overheated) Perhaps fan failure. jumper between terminals 71 and
72. Check also that the fan(s) is(are)
rotating.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Troubleshooting 103

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 108 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Observation Fault indication Cause Solution

If menu 240, “Parameter set” is
set to “0”, the system is config-
Set the menu 240, “Parameter set”
ured for external control of param-
to a value between “1” - “4” and
eter set. Most parameters are not
then any parameter can be changed.
allowed to be changed in this
mode.
During start, stop and slow speed
Set parameters during standstill or
changing parameters is not per-
full voltage running.
Parameter will not mitted.
be accepted.
If control source is serial comm., it
Change parameters from the actual
is impossible to change parame-
control source.
ters from keyboard and vice versa.
Read-out values cannot be altered.
Some menus include only read-
In Table 14, read-out menus have ’----
out values and not parameters.
’ in the factory setting column.
Unlock control panel by pressing the
Control panel is locked for set-
-Loc keys “NEXT” and “ENTER’”for at
tings.
least 3 sec.

104 Troubleshooting Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 109 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

11. Maintenance
In general the softstarter is maintenance-free. There are
however some things which should be checked regularly. In
particular, if the surroundings are dusty the unit should be
cleaned regularly.

WARNING! Do not touch parts inside the

enclosure of the unit when the control supply
voltage or the mains supply voltage is
switched on.

11.1 Regular maintenance

• Check that nothing in the softstarter has been damaged
by vibration (loose screws or connections).
• Check external wiring, connections and control signals.
Tighten terminal screws and busbar bolts if necessary.
• Check that printed circuit boards, thyristors and cooling
fins are free from dust. Clean with compressed air if nec-
essary. Make sure the printed circuit boards and the thyr-
istors are undamaged.
• Check for signs of overheating (changes in colour on
printed circuit boards, oxidation of solder points etc.).
Check that the temperature is within permissible limits.
• Check that the cooling fan(s) permit free air flow. Clean
any external air filters if necessary.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Maintenance 105

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 110 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

106 Maintenance Emotron AB 014135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 111 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

12. Options
The following options are available. Please contact your sup- 12.3 External control panel
plier for more detailed information.
The external control panel option is used to move the con-
trol panel from the softstarter to the front of a panel door or
12.1 Serial communication control cabinet.
For serial communication the MODBUS RTU (RS232/ The maximum distance between the softstarter and the
RS485) option board is available, order part number: 01- external control panel is 3 m.
1733-00. The part number to order for the external control panel is
01-2138-00. A separate data sheet for this option is availa-
ble.

Fig. 68 Option RS232/485

12.2 Fieldbus systems

Various option boards are available for the following bus sys-
tems:
• PROFIBUS DP order part number: 01-1734-01
• Device NET, order part number: 01-1736-01
Each system has its own board. The option is delivered with
an instruction manual containing all the details for the
installation and set-up of the board and the protocol for pro-
gramming.

Fig. 70 Use of the external control panel.

Fig. 69 Profibus Option

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Options 107

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 112 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

12.3.1 Cable kit for external current

transformers 33±0.5
This kit is used for the bypass function, to connect the cur-
rent transformers externally. order part number: 01-2020-
00.

83.5
60
30±0.5
41±0.5
41±0.5
Fig. 71 Cable kit 47

70-300 mm
12.4 Terminal clamp
Data: Single cables, Cu or Al
Cables 95-300 mm2 35±0.5
MSF type Cu Cable 310
Bolt for connection to busbar M10
Dimensions in mm 33x84x47 mm
Part no. single 9350
Data: Parallel cables, Cu or Al
86.5
58

Cables 2x95-300 mm2

MSF type and Cu Cable 310 to 835
Bolt for connection to busbar M10
Dimensions in mm 35x87x65
30±0.5
Part no. parallel 9351 41±0.2
65
2x95-300 mm

Fig. 72 The terminal clamp.

108 Options Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 113 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

13. Technical data

13.1 Electrical specifications

Table 17 Typical motor power at mains voltage 400 V

Heavy Normal Normal with bypass

AC-53a 5.0-30:50-10 AC-53a 3.0-30:50-10 AC-53b 3.0-30:300
MSF model
Power @400V Rated current Power @400V Rated current Power @400V Rated current
[kW] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [A]

MSF-017 7.5 17 11 22 11 25

-030 15 30 18.5 37 22 45

-045 22 45 30 60 37 67

-060 30 60 37 72 45 85

-075 37 75 45 85 55 103

-085 45 85 45 96 55 120

-110 55 110 75 134 90 165

-145 75 145 75 156 110 210

-170 90 170 110 210 132 255

-210 110 210 132 250 160 300

-250 132 250 132 262 200 360

-310 160 310 200 370 250 450

-370 200 370 250 450 315 555

-450 250 450 315 549 355 675

-570 315 570 400 710 450 820

-710 400 710 450 835 500 945

-835 450 835 500 960 630 1125

-1000 560 1 000 630 1125 800 1400

-1400 800 1 400 900 1650 1000 1800

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Technical data 109

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 114 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 18 Typical motor power at mains voltage 460 V

Heavy Normal Normal with bypass

AC-53a 5.0-30:50-10 AC-53a 3.0-30:50-10 AC-53b 3.0-30:300
MSF model
Power @460V Rated current Power @460V Rated current Power @460V Rated current
[hp] [A] [hp] [A] [hp] [A]

MSF-017 10 17 15 22 20 25

-030 20 30 25 37 30 45

-045 30 45 40 60 50 68

-060 40 60 50 72 60 85

-075 60 75 60 85 75 103

-085 60 85 75 96 100 120

-110 75 110 100 134 125 165

-145 100 145 125 156 150 210

-170 125 170 150 210 200 255

-210 150 210 200 250 250 300

-250 200 250 200 262 300 360

-310 250 310 300 370 350 450

-370 300 370 350 450 450 555

-450 350 450 450 549 500 675

-570 500 570 600 710 650 820

-710 600 710 700 835 800 945

-835 700 835 800 960 900 1125

-1000 800 1 000 900 1125 1000 1400

-1400 1000 1 400 1250 1650 1500 1800

110 Technical data Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 115 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 19 Typical motor power at mains voltage 525 V

Heavy Normal Normal with bypass

AC-53a 5.0-30:50-10 AC-53a 3.0-30:50-10 AC-53b 3.0-30:300
MSF model
Power @525V Rated current Power @525V Rated current Power @525V Rated current
[kW] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [A]

MSF-017 11 17 15 22 15 25

-030 18,5 30 22 37 30 45

-045 30 45 37 60 45 68

-060 37 60 45 72 55 85

-075 45 75 55 85 75 103

-085 55 85 55 96 75 120

-110 75 110 90 134 110 165

-145 90 145 110 156 132 210

-170 110 170 132 210 160 255

-210 132 210 160 250 200 300

-250 160 250 160 262 250 360

-310 200 310 250 370 315 450

-370 250 370 315 450 355 555

-450 315 450 400 549 450 675

-570 400 570 500 710 560 820

-710 500 710 560 835 630 945

-835 560 835 710 960 800 1125

-1000 710 1 000 800 1125 1000 1400

-1400 1000 1 400 1250 1650 1400 1800

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Technical data 111

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 116 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 20 Typical motor power at mains voltage 575 V

Heavy Normal Normal with bypass

AC-53a 5.0-30:50-10 AC-53a 3.0-30:50-10 AC-53b 3.0-30:300
MSF model
Power @575V Rated current Power @575V Rated current Power @575V Rated current
[hp] [A] [hp] [A] [hp] [A]

MSF-017 15 17 20 22 25 25

-030 25 30 30 37 40 45

-045 40 45 50 60 60 68

-060 50 60 60 72 75 85

-075 75 75 75 85 100 103

-085 75 85 75 90 125 120

-110 100 110 125 134 150 165

-145 150 145 150 156 200 210

-170 150 170 200 210 250 255

-210 200 210 250 250 300 300

-250 250 250 250 262 350 360

-310 300 310 400 370 450 450

-370 400 370 500 450 600 555

-450 500 450 600 549 700 675

-570 600 570 700 640 800 820

-710 700 710 800 835 1000 945

-835 800 835 900 880 1250 1125

-1000 1000 1 000 1250 1125 1500 1400

-1400 1500 1 400 1500 1524 2000 1800

112 Technical data Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 117 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 21 Typical motor power at mains voltage 690 V

Heavy Normal Normal with bypass

MSF model
AC-53a 5.0-30:50-10 AC-53a 3.0-30:50-10 AC-53b 3.0-30:300

Power @690V Rated current Power @690V Rated current Power @690V Rated current
[kW] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [A]

MSF-017 15 17 18,5 22 22 25

-030 22 30 30 37 37 45

-045 37 45 55 60 55 68

-060 55 60 55 72 75 85

-075 55 75 75 85 90 103

-085 75 85 90 90 110 120

-110 90 110 110 134 160 165

-145 132 145 132 156 200 210

-170 160 170 200 210 250 255

-210 200 210 250 250 250 300

-250 250 250 250 262 355 360

-310 315 310 355 370 400 450

-370 355 370 400 450 500 555

-450 400 450 560 549 630 675

-570 560 570 630 640 800 820

-710 710 710 800 835 900 945

-835 800 835 900 880 1120 1125

-1000 1000 1 000 1120 1125 1400 1400

-1400 1400 1 400 1600 1524 1800 1800

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Technical data 113

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 118 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

13.2 General electrical specifications

Table 22 General electrical specifications

Parameter Description

General

200-525 V ±10%
Mains supply voltage
200-690 V +5%, -10%

100-240 V ±10%
Control supply voltage
380-500 V ±10%

Mains and Control supply frequency 50/60 Hz ±10%

Number of fully controlled phases 3

Recommended fuse for control supply Max 10 A

Control signal inputs

Digital input voltage 0-3 V→0, 8-27 V→1. Max 37 V for 10 sec.

Digital input impedance to GND (0 VDC) 2.2 kΩ

Analoueg input voltage/current 0-10 V, 2-10 V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA

Analoueg input impedance to GND (0 VDC) Voltage signal 125 kΩ, current signal 100 Ω

Control signal outputs

Output relays contact 8 A, 250 VAC or 24 VDC resistive load; 3 A, 250 VAC inductive load (PF 0.4)

Analogue output voltage/current 0-10 V, 2-10 V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA

Analogue output load impedance Voltage signal min load 700Ω, current signal max load 750Ω

Control signal supply

+12 VDC +12 VDC ±5%. Max current 50 mA. Short circuit proof.

114 Technical data Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 119 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

13.3 Fuses and power losses

Table 23 Fuses, power losses

Recommended wiring fuses [A]

Power loss at rated motor load [W] Power consumption
Model First column Ramp start/second
No losses with bypass control card [VA]
column Direct-on-line start

Heavy Normal Heavy Normal

MSF-017 25/50 32 50 70 20

-030 35/80 50 90 120 20

-045 50/125 80 140 180 25

-060 63/160 100 180 215 25

-075 80/200 100 230 260 25

-085 100/250 125 260 290 25

-110 125/315 180 330 400 25

-145 160/400 200 440 470 25

-170 200/400 200 510 630 35

-210 250/400 315 630 750 35

-250 250/500 315 750 750 35

-310 315/630 400 930 1100 35

-370 400/800 500 1100 1535 35

-450 500/1000 630 1400 1730 35

-570 630/1000 800 1700 2100 35

-710 800/1000 1000 2100 2500 35

-835 1000/1200 1000 2500 2875 35

-1000 1000/1400 1200 3000 3375 35

-1400 1400/1800 1800 4200 4950 35

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Technical data 115

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 120 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

13.4 Mechanical specifications including mechanical drawings

Mounting position
MSF Dimensions Weight Connection PE Cooling Protection
[Vertical/
Model H*W*D [mm] [kg] busbars [mm] screw system class
Horizontal]

-017, -030 320*126*260 Vertical 6.7 15*4, Cu (M6) M6 Convection IP20

-045, -060, -075,

320*126*260 Vert. or Horiz. 6.9 15*4, Cu (M6) M6 Fan IP20
-085

-110, -145 400*176*260 Vert. or Horiz. 12 20*4, Cu (M10) M8 Fan IP20

-170, -210, -250 500*260*260 Vert. or Horiz. 20 30*4, Cu (M10) M8 Fan IP20

-310, -370, -450 532*547*278 Vert. or Horiz 46 40*8, Al (M12) M8 Fan IP20

-570, -710, -835 687*640*302 Vert. or Horiz 80 40*10, Al (M12) M8 Fan IP20

-1000, -1400 900*875*336 Vert. or Horiz 175 75*10, Al (M12) Fan IP00

W D

30.20
03-F98_1

Fig. 73 MSF -310 to MSF -835.

116 Technical data Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 121 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

13.5 Derating at higher

temperature
By derating the current to 80% of nominal current, the
MSF can be operated at an ambient temperature of up to
50 °C. E.g. a MSF-045 can operate a heavy load of 36 A (45
A*0.8).

13.6 Environmental conditions

Normal operation

Temperature 0 - 40°C

Relative humidity 95%, non-condensing

Max altitude without derating 1000 m

Storage

Temperature -25 - +70°C

Relative humidity 95%, non-condensing

13.7 Standards

Market Standard Description

IEC 60947-1 Low-voltage switch gear and control gear. General part.

All IEC 60947-4-2 AC semiconductors motor controller and starters

EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines

Machinery Directive 89/392/ECC, Amendment 98/37/ECC

European EMC Directive 89/336/ECC, Amendment 91/263/ECC, 93/68/ECC

Low Voltage Directive 73/23/ECC, Amendment 93/68/ECC

Russian GOST R Russia certificate of conformity

Outline of investigation for power conversion equipment.

American UL 508
Only models MSF-017 to MSF-250 up to 600 VAC

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Technical data 117

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 122 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

13.8 Power- and signal connectors.

Table 24 PCB Terminals
Terminal Function Electrical characteristics
01 100-240 VAC ±10% alternative
Control supply voltage
02 380-500 VAC ±10% see rating plate
PE Protective Earth

11 Digital input 1 0-3 V --> 0; 8-27 V--> 1.

12 Digital input 2 Max. 37 V for 10 sec. Impedance to 0 VDC: 2.2 kΩ.
Control signal supply voltage to PCB terminal 11 and 12, +12 VDC ±5%. Max. current from +12 VDC: 50 mA.
13
10 kΩ potentiometer, etc. Short circuit-proof but not overload-roof.
Analogue input, 0-10 V, 2-10 V, 0-20 mA and Impedance to terminal 15 (0 VDC) voltage signal:
14
4-20 mA/digital input. 125 kΩ, current signal: 100 Ω.
15 GND (common) 0 VDC
16 Digital input 3 0-3 V --> 0; 8-27 V--> 1.
17 Digital input 4 Max. 37 V for 10 sec. Impedance to 0 VDC: 2.2 kΩ.
Control signal supply voltage to PCB terminal 16 and 17, +12 VDC ±5%. Max. current from +12 VDC = 50 mA.
18
10 kΩ potentiometer, etc. Short circuit-proof but not overload-proof.
Analogue output contact:
19 Analogue output 0-10 V, 2-10 V; min load impedance 700Ω
0-20 mA and 4-20 mA; max load impedance 750Ω

21 Programmable relay K1. Factory setting is “Operation” 1-pole closing contact, 250 VAC 8 A or 24 VDC 8 A resis-
22 with indication by closing terminal 21 to 22. tive, 250 VAC, 3 A inductive.
23 Programmable relay K2. Factory setting is “Full voltage” 1-pole closing contact, 250 VAC 8 A or 24 VDC 8 A resis-
24 with indication by closing terminals 23 to 24. tive, 250 VAC, 3 A inductive.

31 Programmable relay K3. Factory setting is “All alarms”.

1-pole change-over contact, 250 VAC 8A or 24 VDC 8A
32 Indication by closing terminals 31 to 33 and opening ter-
resistive, 250 VAC, 3A inductive.
33 minals 32 to 33.

69-70 PTC Thermistor input Alarm level 2.4 kΩ. Switch back level 2.2 kΩ.

Controlling softstarter cooling fan temperature

71-72* Clickson thermistor
MSF-310 - MSF-1400
73-74* NTC thermistor Temperature measuring of softstarter cooling fin
75 Current transformer input, cable S1 (blue) Connection of L1 or T1 phase current transformer
Connection of L3, T3 phase (MSF 017 to MSF 250) or L2,
76 Current transformer input, cable S1 (blue)
T2 phase (MSF 310 to MSF 1400)
77 Current transformer input, cable S2 (brown) Common connection for terminals 75 and 76
78* Fan connection 24 VDC
79* Fan connection 0 VDC

*Internal connection, no customer use.

118 Technical data Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 123 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

13.9 Semi-conductor fuses

Always use standard commercial fuses to protect the wiring
and prevent short circuiting. To protect the thyristors
against short-circuit currents, superfast semiconductor fuses
can be used if preferred (e.g. Bussmann type FWP or similar,
see table below).
The normal guarantee is valid even if superfast semiconduc-
tor fuses are not used.

FWP Bussmann fuse

Type
2
A I t (fuse) x 1000

MSF-017 80 2.4
MSF-030 125 7.3
MSF-045 150 11.7
MSF-060 200 22
MSF-075 250 42.5
MSF-085 300 71.2
MSF-110 350 95.6
MSF-145 450 137
MSF-170 700 300
MSF-210 700 300
MSF-250 800 450

NOTE: Short circuit withstand MSF017-MSF060 5000

rms A when used with K5 or RK5 fuses.

NOTE: Short circuit withstand MSF075-MSF145 10000

rms A when used with K5 or RK5 fuses.

NOTE! Short circuit withstand MSF170-250 18000 rms

A when used with K5 or RK5 fuses.

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Technical data 119

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 124 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

120 Technical data Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 125 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

14. Set-up menu list

Parameter alt. Param. Factory

Menu Function/Parameter Range Value Page
Alarm codes set setting

General settings
100 Current 0.0-9999 A ----- ----- page 44
101 Automatic return menu oFF, 1-999 ----- oFF page 44

1. Control panel
200 Control source 1, 2, 3 2. Remote control 1-4 2 page 44
3. Serial comm.
201 Control panel locked for settings no, YES ----- ----- page 44
202 Enable US units oFF, on ----- oFF page 45

Motor data
210 Nominal motor voltage 200-700 V 1-4 400 page 45
211 Nominal motor current 25-200% of Insoft in A 1-4 Insoft page 45
25-400% of Pnsoft in
212 Nominal motor power 1-4 Pnsoft page 45
kW resp. hp
213 Nominal speed 500-3600 rpm 1-4 Nnsoft page 45
214 Nominal power factor 0.50-1.00 1-4 0.86 page 45
215 Nominal frequency 50, 60 Hz ----- 50 page 45

Motor protection
THERMAL MOTOR PROTECTION
oFF
1. Warning
220 Thermal motor protection oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 2. Coast 1-4 2 page 46
3. Stop
4. Brake
221 PTC input oFF, on 1-4 oFF page 47
222 Internal protection class oFF, 2-40 s 1-4 10 page 47
223 Used thermal capacity 0-150% ----- ----- page 47
START LIMITATION
oFF
224 Start limitation oFF, 1, 2 1. Warning 1-4 oFF page 48
2. Coast
225 Number of starts per hour oFF, 1-99 1-4 oFF page 49
226 Min time between starts oFF, 1-60 min 1-4 oFF page 49
227 Time to next allowed start 0-60 min ----- ----- page 49
LOCKED ROTOR
oFF
228 Locked rotor alarm oFF, 1, 2 1. Warning 1-4 oFF page 49
2. Coast
229 Locked rotor time 1,0-10,0 s 1-4 5,0 s page 49
SINGLE PHASE INPUT FAILURE
1. Warning
230 Single phase input failure 1, 2 1-4 2 page 50
2. Coast
CURRENT LIMIT START TIME
EXPIRED

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Set-up menu list 121

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 126 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Parameter alt. Param. Factory

Menu Function/Parameter Range Value Page
Alarm codes set setting
oFF
1. Warning
231 Current limit start time expired oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 2. Coast 1-4 2 page 50
3. Stop
4. Brake

Parameter set handling

0 - External control of
240 Select parameter set 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 parameter set ----- 1 page 51
1-4 - Parameter set 1-4
241 Actual parameter set 1, 2, 3, 4 ----- ----- page 51
no, P1-2, P1-3, P1-4, no - no action
P2-1, P2-3, P2-4, P3- P1-2 - Copy parameter
242 Copy parameter set ----- no page 51
1, P3-2, P3-4, P4-1, set 1 to parameter set 2
P4-2, P4-3 etc.
243 Reset to factory settings no, YES ----- no page 52

Autoreset
250 Autoreset attempts oFF, 0-10 1-4 oFF page 52
251 Thermal motor protection autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
252 Start limitation autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
253 Locked rotor alarm autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
Current limit start time expired
254 oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
autoreset
255 Max power alarm autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
256 Min power alarm autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
257 External alarm autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
258 Phase input failure autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
259 Voltage unbalance alarm autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
260 Overvoltage alarm autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
261 Undervoltage alarm autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
262 Serial communication autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53
263 Softstarter overheated autoreset oFF, 0-3600 s 1-4 oFF page 53

Serial communication
270 Serial comm. unit address 1-247 ----- 1 page 54
271 Serial comm. baudrate 2.4-38.4 kBaud ----- 9.6 page 55
0. No parity
272 Serial comm. parity 0, 1 ----- 0 page 55
1. Even parity
oFF
1. Warning
273 Serial comm. contact broken oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 2. Coast ----- 3 page 55
3. Stop
4. Brake

Operation settings
PRE-SETTING
300 Preset pump control parameters no, yes ----- no page 55
START

122 Set-up menu list Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 127 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Parameter alt. Param. Factory

Menu Function/Parameter Range Value Page
Alarm codes set setting
1. Linear torque control
2. Square torque control
310 Start method 1, 2, 3, 4 1-4 1 page 57
3. Voltage control
4. DOL
311 Initial torque at start 0-250% of Tn 1-4 10 page 58
312 End torque at start 25-250% of Tn 1-4 150 page 58
313 Initial voltage at start 25-80% of U 1-4 30 page 58
314 Current limit at start off, 150-500% of In 1-4 oFF page 59

315 Start time 1-60 s 1-4 10 page 59

316 Torque boost current limit off, 300-700% of In 1-4 oFF page 60
317 Torque boost active time 0.1-2.0 s 1-4 1.0 page 60
STOP
1. Linear torque control
2. Square torque control
320 Stop method 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 3. Voltage control 1-4 4 page 60
4. Coast
5. Brake
321 End torque at stop 0-100% of Tn 1-4 0 page 61
322 Step down voltage at stop 100-40% of U 1-4 100 page 61
1. Dynamic vector brake
323 Braking method 1, 2 ----- 1 page 62
2. Reverse current brake
324 Braking strength 150-500% 1-4 150 page 62
325 Stop time 1-120 s 1-4 10 page 63
326 Alarm braking strength oFF, 150-500% 1-4 oFF page 63
327 Alarm braking time 1-120 s 1-4 10 page 63
SLOW SPEED / JOG
330 Slow speed strength 10-100 1-4 10 page 65
331 Slow speed time at start oFF, 1-60 s 1-4 oFF page 65
332 Slow speed time at stop oFF, 1-60 s 1-4 oFF page 66
333 DC brake at slow speed oFF, 1-60 s 1-4 oFF page 66
334 Jog forward enable oFF, on 1-4 oFF page 66
335 Jog reverse enable oFF, on 1-4 oFF page 66
ADDITIONAL SETTINGS
340 Bypass oFF, on 1-4 oFF page 67
341 Power Factor Control (PFC) oFF, on 1-4 oFF page 69
342 Fan continuously on oFF, on 1-4 oFF page 69

Process protection
LOAD MONITOR
oFF
1. Warning
400 Max power alarm oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 2. Coast 1-4 oFF page 71
3. Stop
4. Brake
oFF
1. Warning
401 Min power alarm oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 2. Coast 1-4 oFF page 71
3. Stop
4. Brake
402 Start delay power alarms 1-999 s 1-4 10 page 71

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Set-up menu list 123

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 128 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Parameter alt. Param. Factory

Menu Function/Parameter Range Value Page
Alarm codes set setting
403 Max power alarm margin 0-100% of Pn 1-4 16 page 71
404 Max power alarm response delay 0.1-90.0 s 1-4 0.5 page 71
405 Max power pre-alarm margin 0-100% of Pn 1-4 8 page 72
Max power pre-alarm response
406 0.1-90.0 s 1-4 0.5 page 72
delay
407 Min power pre-alarm margin 0-100% of Pn 1-4 8 page 72
408 Min power pre-alarm response delay 0.1-90.0 s 1-4 0.5 page 72
409 Min power alarm margin 0-100% of Pn 1-4 16 page 72
410 Min power alarm response delay 0.1-90.0 s 1-4 0.5 page 73

411 Autoset power limits no, YES ----- no page 73

412 Normal load 0-200% of Pn 1-4 100 page 73
413 Output shaft power 0.0-200.0% of Pn ----- ----- page 73
EXTERNAL ALARM
oFF
1. Warning
2. Coast
420 External alarm oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1-4 oFF page 73
3. Stop
4. Brake
5. Spinbrake
MAINS PROTECTION
oFF
1. Warning
430 Voltage unbalance alarm oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 2. Coast 1-4 oFF page 74
3. Stop
4. Brake
431 Voltage unbalance level 2-25% of Un 1-4 10 page 75
Response delay voltage unbalance
432 1-90 s 1-4 1 page 75
alarm
oFF
1. Warning
433 Overvoltage alarm oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 2. Coast 1-4 oFF page 75
3. Stop
4. Brake
434 Overvoltage level 100-150% of Un 1-4 115 page 75
435 Response delay overvoltage alarm 1-90 s 1-4 1 page 75
oFF
1. Warning
436 Undervoltage alarm oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 2. Coast 1-4 oFF page 75
3. Stop
4. Brake
437 Undervoltage level 75-100% of Un 1-4 85 page 76
438 Response delay undervoltage alarm 1-90 s 1-4 1 page 76
439 Phase sequence L123, L321 ----- ----- page 76
oFF
440 Phase reversal alarm oFF, 1, 2 1. Warning ----- oFF page 76
2. Coast

I/O settings
INPUT SIGNALS

124 Set-up menu list Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 129 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Parameter alt. Param. Factory

Menu Function/Parameter Range Value Page
Alarm codes set setting
oFF
1. Digital, Rotation sen-
sor
2. Digital, Slow speed
3. Digital, Jog fwd
500 Digital/analogue input oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 4. Digital, Jog rev 1-4 oFF page 77
5. Digital, Autoset
6. Analogue start-stop,
0–10V/0–20mA
7. Analogue start-stop,
2–10V/4–20 mA
501 Digital input pulses 1-100 1-4 1 page 78
0-100% of signal
502 Analogue start-stop on-value 1-4 25 page 79
range
0-100% of signal
503 Analogue start-stop off-value 1-4 75 page 80
range
504 Analogue start-stop delay time 1-999 s 1-4 1 page 80

oFF
1. Start signal
2. Stop signal
3. Parameter set input 1
510 Digital input 1 function oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 ----- 1 page 81
4. Parameter set input 2
5. External alarm signal
6. Start R signal
7. Start L signal
511 Digital input 2 function oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 See 510 ----- 2 page 81
512 Digital input 3 function oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 See 510 ----- 3 page 82
513 Digital input 4 function oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 See 510 ----- 4 page 82
OUTPUT SIGNALS
oFF
1. 0–10V/0–20mA
520 Analogue output oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4 2. 2–10V/4–20mA 1-4 oFF page 82
3. 10–0V/20–0mA
4. 10–2V/20–4mA
521 Analogue output function 1, 2, 3, 4 1. RMS current 1-4 1 page 82
2. Line voltage
3. Shaft power
4. Torque
0-500% of value
522 Scaling analogue output, min 1-4 0 page 83
range
0-500% of value
523 Scaling analogue output, max 1-4 100 page 84
range

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Set-up menu list 125

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 130 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Parameter alt. Param. Factory

Menu Function/Parameter Range Value Page
Alarm codes set setting
oFF
1. Operation
2. Full voltage
3. Power pre-alarms
4. Brake
5. Run
6. Run R
7. Run L
8. Operation R
9. Operation L
10. Power alarms
11. Max power alarm
530 Relay K1 off, 1-19 ----- 1 page 85
12. Max power pre-alarm
13. Min power alarm
14. Min power pre-alarm
15. All alarms (except
power pre-alarms)
16. All alarms (except
power alarm and pre-
alarms)
17. External alarm
18. Autoreset expired
19. All alarms which
need manual reset
531 Relay K2 off, 1-19 Same as 530 ----- 2 page 85

532 Relay K3 off, 1-19 Same as 530 ----- 15 page 85

1. N.O.
533 K1 contact function 1, 2 ----- 1 page 85
2. N.C.
1. N.O.
534 K2 contact function 1, 2 ----- 1 page 86
2. N.C.

View operation
OPERATION
700 Current 0.0-9999 A ----- ----- page 91
701 Line main voltage 0-720 V ----- ----- page 91
702 Power factor 0.00-1.00 ----- ----- page 91
703 Output shaft power -999-9999 kW ----- ----- page 91
Output shaft power in percentage
704 0-200% of Pn ----- ----- page 91
units
705 Shaft torque -999-9999 Nm ----- ----- page 91
706 Shaft torque in percentage units 0-250% of Tn ----- ----- page 91
low, 30-96°C
707 Softstarter temperature ----- ----- page 92
low, 85-204°F
708 Current phase L1 0.0-9999 A ----- ----- page 92
709 Current phase L2 0.0-9999 A ----- ----- page 92
710 Current phase L3 0.0-9999 A ----- ----- page 92
711 Line main voltage L1-L2 0-720 V ----- ----- page 92
712 Line main voltage L1-L3 0-720 V ----- ----- page 92
713 Line main voltage L2-L3 0-720 V ----- ----- page 92
714 Phase sequence L-----, L123, L321 ----- ----- page 92
715 Used thermal capacity 0-150% ----- ----- page 92
716 Time to next allowed start 0-60 min ----- ----- page 92

126 Set-up menu list Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 131 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Parameter alt. Param. Factory

Menu Function/Parameter Range Value Page
Alarm codes set setting
STATUS
1. Stopped, no alarm
2. Stopped, alarm
3. Run with alarm
4. Acceleration
5. Full voltage
6. Deceleration
7. Bypassed
720 Softstarter status 1-12 ----- ----- page 93
8. PFC
9. Braking
10. Slow speed forward
11. Slow speed reverse
12. Standby (waiting for
analogue start/stop or
autoreset)
721 Digital input status LLLL-HHHH ----- ----- page 93
722 Analogue/digital input status L, H ----- ----- page 93
0-100% of signal
723 Analogue/digital input value ----- ----- page 93
range
724 Relay status LLL-HHH ----- ----- page 93
0-100% of signal
725 Analogue output value ----- ----- page 93
range

STORED VALUES
730 Operation time 0-9 999 999 h ----- ----- page 94
731 Energy consumption 0.000-2000 MWh ----- ----- page 94
732 Reset energy consumption no, YES ----- no page 94

Alarm list
800 Alarm list, latest error F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
801 Alarm list, error 14 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
802 Alarm list, error 13 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
803 Alarm list, error 12 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
804 Alarm list, error 11 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
805 Alarm list, error 10 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
806 Alarm list, error 9 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
807 Alarm list, error 8 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
808 Alarm list, error 7 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
809 Alarm list, error 6 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
810 Alarm list, error 5 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
811 Alarm list, error 4 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
812 Alarm list, error 3 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
813 Alarm list, error 2 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94
814 Alarm list, error 1 F1-F17, h ----- ----- page 94

Softstarter data
900 Softstarter type 17-1400 A ----- 17 page 95
901 Software variant text Same as label ----- V220 page 95
902 Software version text Same as label ----- R15 page 95

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 Set-up menu list 127

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 132 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Explanation of units:
U Input line voltage
Un Nominal motor voltage.
In Nominal motor current.
Pn Nominal motor power.
Nn Nominal motor speed.
Tn Nominal shaft torque.
Insoft Nominal current softstarter.
Pnsoft Nominal power softstarter.
Nnsoft Nominal speed softstarter.
Calculation shaft torque

Pn
T n = ----------------------
-
⎛N n
------- x2π ⎞
⎝ 60 ⎠

128 Set-up menu list Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 133 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Index
Numerics Connections .....................................19 How to use the Instruction Manual ... 5
2-wire start/stop with automatic reset at Control Connection .........................24
start .................................................86 Control panel .............................39, 42 I
2-wire start/stop with separate reset .87 Control panel lock .....................41, 44 I/O settings ..................................... 77
3-wire start/stop with automatic reset at Control source .................................44 Initial torque at start ........................ 58
start .................................................87 Control sources ................................42 Initial voltage at start ....................... 58
Conveyor .........................................35 Input signals .................................... 77
A Cooling ............................................15 Installation of the softstarter in a cabinet
Abbreviations .....................................7 Copy parameter set ..........................51 ......................................................... 15
Actual parameter set .........................51 Current ............................................44 Insulation test on motor .................. 37
Alarm braking ..................................63 Current limit ....................................59 Integrated safety systems .................... 5
Alarm braking strength ....................63 Current limit at start ........................59 Internal protection class ................... 47
Alarm braking time ..........................63 Current limit start time expired ........50
Alarm codes .....................................97 Current transformer .........................68 J
Alarm list .........................................94 Jog Forward ..................................... 77
Alarm overview ................................98 D JOG forward enable ........................ 66
All alarms (except power alarms and pre- DC brake at slow speed ....................66 Jog reverse ....................................... 77
alarms) .............................................85 Definitions .........................................7 JOG reverse enable .......................... 67
All alarms (except power pre-alarms) 85 Derating at higher temperature ......117
All alarms which need manual reset .85 Description ........................................9 K
Ambient temperature below 0×C .....36 Digital input ....................................78 Keys ................................................ 40
Analogue input ................................79 Digital input pulses ..........................78
Analogue output ..............................82 Digital Input Status .........................93 L
Analogue Output value ....................93 Digital inputs ...................................80
LED indication ............................... 40
Analogue start/stop ..........................79 Direct on-line, DOL ........................58
Line main voltage ............................ 91
0-10 V / 0-20 mA Or 2-10 V / 4-20 Dynamic vector brake ......................61
Load monitor .................................. 69
mA ...........................................77 Locked rotor .................................... 49
Analogue/digital input .....................77 E
Analogue/digital Input status ...........93 Electrical specifications ...................109 M
Analogue/digital input value ............93 Enable US units ...............................45
Mains protection ............................. 74
Applications and functions selection 31 End torque at start ...........................58
Max power alarm ...................... 71, 85
Automatic return menu ...................44 End torque at stop ...........................61
Max power pre-alarm ...................... 85
Autoreset .........................................52 Energy consumption ........................94
Mechanical specifications including me-
Autoreset expired .............................85 Environmental conditions ..............117
chanical drawings .......................... 116
AUTOSET ......................................77 External alarm ............................73, 85
Menu structure ................................ 40
Autoset ............................................73 External alarm functionality .............89
Min power alarm ....................... 71, 85
External alarm signal ..................81, 82
Min power pre-alarm ...................... 85
B External control of parameter set ......90
Min. time between starts ................. 49
Background theory ............................9 External control panel ....................107
Minimum wiring ............................. 25
Bandsaw ..........................................35 Mixer .............................................. 36
Blower .............................................34 F
Motor data ...................................... 45
Brake .........................................85, 97 Fan ...................................................35 Motor protection ............................. 46
Braking ............................................61 Fan continuously on ........................69 Mounting ........................................ 15
Braking method ...............................62 Fieldbus systems .............................107 Mounting schemes .......................... 16
Braking strength ..............................62 Full voltage ......................................85
Busbar distances ...............................17 Functional description .....................43 N
Bypass ..............................................67 Fuses and power losses ...................115
Normal load .................................... 73
NOTE .............................................. 5
C G
Notes to the Instruction Manual ....... 5
Cable kit for external current transform- General electrical specifications ......114 Number of starts per hour ............... 49
ers ..................................................108 Glossary .............................................7
CAUTION ........................................5 O
Centrifuge .......................................35 H
Operation ........................................ 85
Checklist ..........................................27 Hammer mill ...................................36 Operation above 1000 m ................. 37
Coast ...............................................97 Hole pattern .....................................17 Operation L .................................... 85
Compressor .....................................34 How to get started ............................27 Operation R .................................... 85

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 129

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 134 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Options .........................................107 nal ..............................................63, 64 Voltage control .......................... 58, 61

Output shaftpower ..........................91 Slow speed for a selected time ..........64 Voltage unbalance alarm .................. 74
Output signals .................................82 Slow speed strength ..........................65
Overvoltage alarm ............................75 Slow speed time at start ....................65 W
Slow speed time at stop ....................66 WARNING ...................................... 5
P Slow speed using the JOG commands .. Warning .......................................... 97
Parameter set handling .....................51 63, ...................................................66 Wiring examples .............................. 25
Parameter set, input 1 ................81, 82 Small motor or low load ...................36
Parameter set, input 2 ................81, 82 Softstarter data .................................95
PCB Terminals ........................24, 118 Softstarter rating ..............................31
Phase compensation capacitor ..........36 Softstarter status ...............................93
Phase input failure ...........................50 Softstarter temperature .....................92
Phase reversal alarm .........................76 Special conditions ............................36
Phase sequence .................................92 Spinbrake .........................................97
Planer ..............................................35 Standards .......................................117
Power alarms ...................................85 Start .................................................57
Power- and signal connectors .........118 Start delay power alarms ...................71
Power factor .....................................91 Start L signal ..............................81, 82
Power Factor Control PFC ..............69 Start limitation .................................48
Power pre-alarms .............................85 Start method ....................................57
Preset pump control ........................56 Start R signal ..............................81, 82
Process protection ............................69 Start right/left functionality ..............87
Programmable relay outputs ............84 Start signal .................................81, 82
Protection and alarm .......................97 Start time .........................................59
PTC input .......................................47 Start/stop/reset command functionality
Pump ...............................................34 86
Starting with counter-clockwise rotating
R loads .................................................36
Reduced voltage starting ..................10 Step down voltage at stop .................61
Relay status ......................................93 Step-up transformer for high voltage
Remote ............................................42 motor ...............................................37
Reset ................................................97 Stop ...........................................60, 97
Reset energy consumption ...............94 Stop method ....................................60
Reset to factory setting .....................52 Stop signal .................................81, 82
Reverse current brake .......................61 Stop time .........................................63
RMS current ....................................91 Stored values ....................................94
Rock crusher ....................................35
Rotation sensor ................................77 T
Run .................................................85 Technical data ................................109
Run L ..............................................85 Terminal clamp ..............................108
Run R ..............................................85 The Application Functions List ........34
Running motors connected in parallel . Thermal motor protection ...............46
36 Tightening torque for bolt ...............16
Running motors linked together ......37 Time to next allowed start ................49
Torque boost ...................................59
S Torque boost active time ..................60
Safety .................................................1 Torque boost current limit ...............60
Safety instructions ..............................1 Torque control ...........................57, 60
Safety measures ..................................5 Torque control at start .....................57
Scaling of analogue output ...............83 Torque control at stop .....................60
Select parameter set ..........................51 Troubleshooting ............................101
Semi-conductor fuses .....................119 Type number .....................................5
Serial communication ........42, 54, 107
Set-up menu list .............................121 U
Shaft torque .....................................91 Undervoltage alarm ..........................75
Shielded control cable ......................19 Upper mounting bracket ..................17
Shielded motor cable .......................36 Used thermal capacity ................47, 92
Single phase input failure .................50
Slow speed .......................................77 V
Slow speed controlled by an external sig- View operation .................................91

130 Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 135 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Emotron AB 01-4135-01r1 30-06-2007

Emotron AB, Mörsaregatan 12, SE-250 24 Helsingborg, Sweden

Tel: +46 42 16 99 00, Fax: +46 42 16 99 49
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.emotron.com

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 136 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Emotron MSF 2.0

Serial Communication Option

Instruction manual
English

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 137 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Valid for the following models:

EMOTRON Modbus RTU

Serial Communication Option

Instruction Manual - English

Document number: 01-3853-01

Edition: r1
Date of release: 2007-09-15
© Copyright Emotron AB 2001-2007
Emotron retain the right to change specifications and illustrations in
the text, without prior notification. The contents of this document
may not be copied without the explicit permission of Emotron AB.

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 138 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Safety
Instruction manual
It is important to be familiar with the softstarter to fully understand this
instruction manual.

Technically qualified personnel

Installation, commissioning, demounting, making measurements, etc. of or on
the Emotron products may only be carried out by personnel technically quali-
fied for the task.

Installation
The installation must be made by authorised personnel and must be made
according to the local standards.

Opening the softstarter

DANGER! ALWAYS SWITCH OFF THE MAINS VOLTAGE BEFORE
OPENING THE UNIT.

Always take adequate precautions before opening the softstarter. Although the
connections for the control signals and the jumpers are isolated from the mains
voltage. Always take adequate precautions before opening the softstarter.

EMC Regulations
EMC regulations must be followed to fulfil the EMC standards.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Safety

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 139 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Safety Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 140 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Contents
1. General information ................................................................... 3
1.1 Introduction................................................................................................. 3
1.2 Description. ................................................................................................. 3
1.3 Users............................................................................................................ 3
1.4 Safety........................................................................................................... 4
1.5 Delivery and unpacking.............................................................................. 4

2. Modbus RTU................................................................................ 5
2.1 General........................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Framing ....................................................................................................... 8
2.3 Functions.................................................................................................. 11
2.4 Errors, exception codes........................................................................... 22

3. Installation................................................................................ 25
3.1 Installation on MSF-017 to MSF-145..................................................... 25
3.2 Installation of MSF-170 to MSF-1400 ................................................... 27
3.3 RS485 Multipoint network...................................................................... 28
3.4 RS232 point to point network ................................................................ 30

4. Communication parameters.................................................... 33
4.1 Set-up Communication Parameters ....................................................... 33
4.2 Serial communication as control source ............................................... 36
4.3 Parameter List ......................................................................................... 37
4.4 Coil status list........................................................................................... 37
4.5 Input status list ........................................................................................ 38
4.6 Input register list...................................................................................... 38
4.7 Holding register list.................................................................................. 42
4.8 Parameter description............................................................................. 46
4.9 Performance ............................................................................................ 47

5. CRC Generation ........................................................................ 49

5.1 Generation in steps: ................................................................................ 49

Emotron AB 01-3583-01r1 1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 141 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2 Emotron AB 01-3583-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 142 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

1. General information

1.1 Introduction
The MODBUS RTU optional card is an asynchronous serial interface for the
softstarters of the MSF 2.0 series to exchange data asynchronously with external
equipment.
The protocol used for data exchange is based on the Modbus RTU protocol,
originally developed by Modicon.
Physical connection can be either RS232 or RS485.
It acts as a slave with address 1 - 247 in a master-slave configuration. The com-
munication is half duplex. It has a standard non return to zero (NRZ) format.
Baudrate is possible from 2400 up to 38400 bits per sec.
The character frame format (always 11 bits) has:
• one start bit
• eight data bits
• one or two stop bits
• even or no parity bit
A Cyclic Redundancy Check is included.

1.2 Description.
This instruction manual describes the installation and operation of the MOD-
BUS RTU option card, which can be built into the MSF 2.0 softstarters:
MSF-017 - MSF-1400

1.3 Users
This instruction manual is intended for:
• installation engineers
• designers
• maintenance engineers
• service engineers

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 General information 3

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 143 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

1.4 Safety
Because this option is a supplementary part of the sofstarter, the user must be
familiar with the original instruction manual of the MSF 2.0 sofstarter. All
safety instructions, warnings etc. as mentioned in these instruction manuals are
to be known to the user.
The following indications can appear in this manual. Always read these first and
be aware of their content before continuing.

NOTE: Additional information as an aid to avoiding problems.

CAUTION: Failure to follow these instructions can result in

malfunction or damage to the softstarter.
!
WARNING: Failure to follow these instructions can result in
serious injury to the user in addition to serious damage to the
softstarter.

1.5 Delivery and unpacking.

Check for any visible signs of damage. Inform your supplier immediately of any
damage found. Do not install the option card if damage is found.
If the option card is moved from a cold storage room to the room where it is to
be installed, condensation can form on it. Allow the option card to become fully
acclimatised and wait until any visible condensation has evaporated before
installing it in the softstarter.

4 General information Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 144 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2. Modbus RTU

2.1 General
Devices communicate using a master-slave technique, in which only one device
(the master) can initiate transactions (called ’queries’). The other devices (the
slaves) respond by supplying the requested data to the master, or by taking the
action requested in the query. Typical master devices include host processors
and programming panels. Typical slaves include programmable controllers,
motor controllers, load monitors etc, see Fig. 1.

PC with
RS232
Configuration
Modbus RTU Software
Master

Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Modbus RTU

Slave node #1 Slave node #2 Slave node #n

F01

Fig. 1 Network configuration.

The master can address individual slaves. Slaves return a message (called a
’response’) to queries that are addressed to them individually.
The Modbus protocol establishes the format for the master’s query by placing
into it the device address, a function code defining the requested action, any
data to be sent, and an error checking field. The slave’s response message is also
constructed using Modbus protocol. It contains fields confirming the action
taken, any data to be returned and an error-checking field. If an error occurred
in receiving the message, or if the slave is unable to perform the requested
action, the slave will construct an error message and send this as its response, see
Fig. 2.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Modbus RTU 5

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 145 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Query Frame Modbus

RTU Slave
Modbus Trailer Output Data Header
Immediate
RTU response
Master Response Frame

Header Input Data Trailer

F02

Fig. 2 Shows the MODBUS RTU data exchange.

Modbus RTU uses a binary transmission protocol.

If even parity is used, each character (8 bit data) is sent as:

Table 1

1 Start bit.

8 Data bits, hexadecimal 0-9,A-F, least significant bit sent first.

1 Even parity bit.

1 Stop bit.

If no parity is used each character (8 bit data) is sent as:

Table 2

1 Start bit.

8 Data bits, hexadecimal 0-9,A-F, least significant bit sent first.

2 Stop bit.

6 Modbus RTU Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 146 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 1

time C
H
A
Stop bit R
Stop/Parity bit A
Data bit 7 C
Data bit 6 T
Data bit 5 E
Data bit 4 R
Data bit 3
Data bit 2 F
Data bit 1 R
Data bit 0 A
Start bit M
E

time M
E
S
S
A
G
CRC High E
CRC Low
Data character n F
Data character 2 R
Data character 1
A
Function code
M
Time between characters must not exceed 3.5 character times.
E
Slave adress

time
The master recognises end of message. T
At least 3.5 character silence time. R
Slave has finished transmission of response. A
Transmission time. N
Slave start sending the response message. S
Response delay time. Slave processes the query and prepare a response.
A
The addressed slave recognise end of message.
C
At least 3.5 character silence time.
T
Master has finished transmission of query.
I
Transmission time.
Master start sending a query message. O
At least 3.5 character silence time. N

F03

Fig. 3 Timing diagram for a transaction (query and response messages) (bottom in
figure), a message frame (middle in figure) and a character frame (top in
figure).

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Modbus RTU 7

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 147 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2.2 Framing
Messages start with a silent interval of at least 3.5 character times. This is easily
implemented as a multiple of character times at the baud rate used on the net-
work (shown as T1-T2-T3-T4 in the table below). The first field then transmit-
ted is the device address.
The allowed characters transmitted for all fields are hexadecimal 0-9,A-F. Net-
work devices monitor the network bus continuously, including during the
’silent’ intervals. When the first field (the address field) is received, each device
decodes it to find out if it is the addressed device.
Following the last transmitted character, a similar interval of at least 3.5 charac-
ter times marks the end of the message. A new message can begin after this
interval.
The entire message frame must be transmitted as a continuous stream. If a silent
interval of more than 3.5 character times occurs before completion of the frame,
the receiving device flushes the incomplete message and assumes that the next
byte will be the address field of a new message.
Similarly, if a new message begins earlier than 3.5 character times following a
previous message, the receiving device will consider it a continuation of the pre-
vious message. This will set an error, as the value in the final CRC field will not
be valid for the combined messages. A typical message frame is shown below.

Table 3
START T1-T2-T3-T4
Header ADDRESS 8 bits
FUNCTION 8 bits
Data DATA n x 8 bits
CRC CHECK 16 bits
Trailer
END T1-T2-T3-T4

2.2.1 Address field

The address field of a message frame contains eight bits. The individual slave
devices are assigned addresses in the range of 1 - 247. A master addresses a slave
by placing the slave address in the address field of the message.
When the slave sends its response, it places its own address in this address field
of the response to let the master know which slave is responding.

8 Modbus RTU Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 148 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2.2.2 Function field

The function code field of a message frame contains eight bits. Valid codes are
in the range of 1 - 6, 15, 16 and 23. See section 2.2, page 8.
When a message is sent from a master to a slave device, the function code field
tells the slave what kind of action to perform.
Examples are:
• to read the ON/OFF states of a group of inputs;
• to read the data contents of a group of parameters;
• to read the diagnostic status of the slave;
• to write to designated coils or registers within the slave.
When the slave responds to the master, it uses the function code field to indicate
either a normal (error-free) response or that some kind of error occurred (called
an exception response). For a normal response, the slave simply echoes the orig-
inal function code. For an exception response, the slave returns a code that is
equivalent to the original function code with its most significant bit set to a
logic 1.
In addition to its modification of the function code for an exception response,
the slave places an unique code into the data field of the response message. This
tells the master what kind of error occurred, or the reason for the exception, see
section 2.4.2, page 22.
The master device’s application program has the responsibility of handling
exception responses. Typical processes are to post subsequent retries of the mes-
sage, to try diagnostic messages to the slave and to notify operators.
Additional information about function codes and exceptions comes later in this
chapter.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Modbus RTU 9

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 149 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2.2.3 Data field

The data field is constructed using sets of two hexadecimal digits (8 bits), in the
range of 00 to FF hexadecimal.
The data field of messages sent from a master to slave devices contains addi-
tional information which the slave must use to take the action defined by the
function code. This can include items like discrete and register addresses, the
quantity of items to be handled and the count of actual data bytes in the field.
For example, if the master requests a slave to read a group of holding registers
(function code 03), the data field specifies the starting register and how many
registers are to be read. If the master writes to a group of registers in the slave
(function code 10 hexadecimal), the data field specifies the starting register, how
many registers to write, the count of data bytes to follow in the data field, and
the data to be written into the registers.
If no error occurs, the data field of a response from a slave to a master contains
the data requested. If an error occurs, the field contains an exception code that
the master application can use to determine the next action to be taken.

2.2.4 CRC Error checking field

The error checking field contains a 16 bit value implemented as 2 bytes. The
error check value is the result of a Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) calcula-
tion performed on the message contents.
The CRC field is appended to the message as the last field in the message.
When this is done, the low-order byte of the field is appended first, followed by
the high-order byte. The CRC high-order byte is the last byte to be sent in the
message.
Additional information about CRC calculation, see chapter 5. page 49.

10 Modbus RTU Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 150 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2.3 Functions
Emotron supports the following MODBUS function codes.

Function name Function code

Read Coil Status 1 (01h)
Read Input Status 2 (02h)
Read Holding Registers 3 (03h)
Read Input Registers 4 (04h)
Force Single Coil 5 (05h)
Force Single Register 6 (06h)
Force Multiple Coils 15 (0Fh)
Force Multiple Registers 16 (10h)
Force/Read Multiple
23 (17h)
Holding Registers

2.3.1 Read Coil Status

Read the status of digital changeable parameters.
Example
Requesting the motor PTC input ON/OFF-state. It is ON.
PTC input: Modbus no = 29 (1Dh)
On: Yes = 1 coil = 0001
1 byte of data: Byte count=01

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Modbus RTU 11

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 151 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Request message.

Field name Hex value

Slave address 01
Function 01
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 1D
Number of Coils HI 00
Number of Coils LO 01
CRC LO 6D
CRC HI CC

Response message.

Field name Hex value

Slave address 01
Function 01
Byte count 01
Coil no.29 (1Dh) status 01
CRC LO 90
CRC HI 48

See section 4.4, page 37 for all parameters readable with this function code.

2.3.2 Read Input Status

Read the status of digital read-only information.
EXAMPLE
Request the Pre-alarm status. It is no Pre-alarm. Pre-alarm status: Modbus no=
2.

12 Modbus RTU Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 152 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Request message.

Field name Hex value

Slave address 01
Function 02
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 02
Number of Inputs HI 00
Number of Inputs LO 01
CRC LO 18
CRC HI 0A

Response message.

Field name Hex value

Slave address 01
Function 02
Byte count 01
Input no.2 (02h)status 00
CRC LO A1
CRC HI 88

See section 4.5, page 38 for all digital status readable with this function code.

2.3.3 Read Holding Registers

Read the value of analogue changeable information.
Example, requesting the Nominal Motor Voltage, Nominal Motor Frequency
and the Nominal Motor Current. Their values are 400.0 V, 60 Hz and 15.5 A.
400.0V, unit 0.1V - 4000 (0FA0h)
60Hz unit 1Hz - 60 (003Ch)
15.5A, unit 0.1A - 155 (009Bh)

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Modbus RTU 13

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 153 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Request message.

Field name Hex value

Slave address 01
Function 03
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 00
Number of Registers HI 00
Number of Registers LO 03
CRC LO 05
CRC HI CB

Response message.

Field name Hex value

Slave address 01
Function 03
Byte count 06
Reg no. 0, (0h) data HI 0F
Reg no. 0, (0h) data LO A0
Reg no. 1, (1h) data HI 00
Reg no. 1, (1h) data LO 3C
Reg no. 2, (2h) data HI 00
Reg no. 2, (2h) data LO 9B
CRC LO 20
CRC HI 34

See section 4.7, page 42 for all analogue changeable parameters readable with
this function code.

14 Modbus RTU Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 154 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2.3.4 Read Input Registers

Read the contents of analogue read-only information.
EXAMPLE
Request the Shaft Torque. It is 452.0 Nm. It has a long representation, 2 regis-
ters are used.
452.0 Nm, unit 0.1 Nm - 4520 (000011A8h).

Request message.

Field name Hex value

Slave address 01
Function 04
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 0A
Number of Registers HI 00
Number of Registers LO 02
CRC LO 51
CRC HI C9

Response message.

Field name Hex value

Slave address 01
Function 04
Byte count 04
Reg no. 10 (0Ah) data HI 00
Reg no. 10 (0Ah) data LO 00
Reg no. 11 (0Bh) data HI 11
Reg no. 11 (0Bh) data LO A8
CRC LO F6
CRC HI 6A

See section 4.6, page 38 and § 4.9, page 68 for all analogue read-only informa-
tion readable with this function code.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Modbus RTU 15

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 155 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2.3.5 Force Single Coil

Set the status of one changeable digital parameter.
EXAMPLE
Set the Start Command to ON. This will cause the motor to start.
Modbus no = 1 - address LO 1 (01h)
Run = 1 - 0 Data HI 255 (0FFh), Data LO 00 (00h)
Request message.
Field name Hex value
Slave address 01
Function 05
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 01
Data HI FF
Data LO 00
CRC LO DD
CRC HI FA

Response message.
Field name Hex value
Slave address 01
Function 05
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 01
Data HI FF
Data LO 00
CRC LO DD
CRC HI FA

See section 4.4, page 37 for all parameters changeable with this function code.

16 Modbus RTU Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 156 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2.3.6 Force Single Register

Set the value of one analogue changeable parameter.

EXAMPLE
Set the Response Delay Max Alarm to 12.5 sec.
Modbus no 13 -> address LO (0Dh)
12.5s, unit 0.1s - 125 (7Dh)
Request message.
Field name Hex value
Slave address 01
Function 06
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 0D
Data HI 00
Data LO 7D
CRC LO D8
CRC HI 28

Response message.
Field name Hex value
Slave address 01
Function 06
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 0D
Data HI 00
Data LO 7D
CRC LO D8
CRC HI 28

See section 4.7, page 42 for all parameters changeable with this function code.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Modbus RTU 17

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 157 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2.3.7 Force Multiple Coil

Set the status of multiple digital changeable parameters.
Example
Set the Alarm Reset ON and Start Command to ON. This will cause an alarm
reset before the motor starts.
Coil no. = 0-1 Reset -> 1
Run = 1
->- 00000011 (03h)
Request message.
Field name Hex value
Slave address 01
Function 0F
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 00
Number of Coils HI 00
Number of Coils LO 02
Byte count 01
Coil no. 0-1 status
03
(0000 0011B)
CRC LO 9E
CRC HI 96

Response message.
Field name Hex value
Slave address 01
Function 0F
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 00
Number of Coils HI 00
Number of Coils LO 02
CRC LO D4
CRC HI 0A

18 Modbus RTU Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 158 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

See section 4.4, page 37 for all parameters changeable with this function code.

2.3.8 Force Multiple Register

Set the contents of multiple changeable analogue parameters.
Example
Set the min power alarm response delay to 25.0 sec and the min alarm margin
to 55%.
25.0 sec, unit 0.1 sec -> - 250 (00FAh)
55%, unit 1% -> 55 (0037h)
Request message.
Field name Hex value
Slave address 01
Function 10
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 11
Number of Registers HI 00
Number of Registers LO 02
Byte count 04
Data HI reg 17 (11h) 00
Data LO reg 17 (11h) FA
Data HI reg 18 (12h) 00
Data LO reg 18 (12h) 37
CRC LO 52
CRC HI 88

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Modbus RTU 19

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 159 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Response message.
Field name Hex value
Slave address 01
Function 10
Start address HI 00
Start address LO 11
Number of Registers HI 00
Number of Registers LO 02
CRC LO 11
CRC HI CD

See section 4.7, page 42 for all parameters changeable with this function code.

2.3.9 Force/Read Multiple Register

Set and read the contents of multiple analogue changeable parameters in the
same message.
Example
Set the Parameter Set parameter to 2 and Relay 1 function to 1 and read the
Nominal Motor Speed and the Nominal Motor Power. They are 1450 rpm and
17000 W.
1450 rpm, unit 1 rpm → 1450 (05AAh)
17000 W, unit 1 W → 17000 (4268h)

20 Modbus RTU Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 160 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Request message.
Field name Hex value
Slave address 01
Function 17
Start read address HI 00
Start read address LO 03
Number of read Regs HI 00
Number of read Regs LO 02
Start write address HI 00
Start write address LO 15
Number of write Regs HI 00
Number of write Regs LO 02
Byte count 04
Data HI Reg 21 (15h) 00
Data LO Reg 21 (15h) 02
Data HI Reg 22 (16h) 00
Data LO Reg 22 (16h) 01
CRC LO 62
CRC HI 77

Response message.
Field name Hex value
Slave address 01
Function 17
Byte count 04
Reg no. 3, (3h) data HI 05
Reg no. 3, (3h) data LO AA
Reg no. 4, (4h) data HI 42
Reg no. 4, (4h) data LO 68
CRC LO E8
CRC HI 85

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Modbus RTU 21

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 161 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

See section 4.7, page 42 for all parameters change-able with this function code.

2.4 Errors, exception codes

Two kinds of errors are possible:
• Transmission errors.
• Operation errors.

2.4.1 Transmission errors

Transmission errors are:
• Frame error (stop bit error).
• Parity error (if parity is used).
• CRC error.
• No message at all.
These errors are caused by i.e. electrical interference from machinery or damage
to the communication channel (cables, contact, I/O ports etc.). This unit will
not act on or answer the master when a transmission error occurs. (Same result
as if a non-existing slave is addressed). The master will eventually cause a time-
out condition.

2.4.2 Operation errors

If no transmission error is detected in the master query, the message is exam-
ined. If an illegal function code, data address or data value is detected, the mes-
sage is not acted upon but an answer with an exception code is sent back to the
master. This unit can also send back an exception code when a set (force) func-
tion message is received during some busy operation states.
Bit 8 (most significant bit) in the function code byte is set to a ’1’ in the excep-
tion response message. Example with an illegal data address when reading an
input register.

22 Modbus RTU Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 162 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Exception response message.

Field name Hex value

Slave address 01
Function 84
Exception code 02
CRC LO C2
CRC HI C1

Table 4 Exception codes.

Exc. code Name Description

This unit doesn’t support the func-

01 Illegal function
tion code.

Illegal data The data address is not within its

02
address boundaries.

The data value is not within it’s

03 Illegal data value
boundaries.

The unit is unable to perform the

06 Busy
request at this time. Retry later.

The data is not available for write

07 Read only
access.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Modbus RTU 23

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 163 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

24 Modbus RTU Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 164 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

3. Installation

3.1 Installation on MSF-017 to MSF-145

Fig. 4 shows the parts of the MODBUS RTU option.

Flat cable to the

control board.
MODBUS RTU
option module.

RS232sub d 9-pole
connector.

Termination switch
S1.

RS485 4--pole connector

and counter piece.

Fig. 4 MODBUS RTU option card.

WARNING: Opening the softstarter. Always switch off the mains

voltage before opening the softstarter.

Remove first the lid on the top side of the softstarter. Mount the option card
according to the sequence in Fig. 5.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Installation 25

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 165 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

1) 4)
Remove the origi- Use tiewrap for strain
nal lid before relief.
installing the
option card.

2)
Mount the
3 screws
3) in their
Mount the flat position.
cable between the
option card and
the control board.
Either of the two
connectors on the
option card can be
used

Fig. 5 Installation of the option board.

Fig. 6 Mounting of the option card seen from the top.

26 Installation Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 166 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

3.2 Installation of MSF-170 to MSF-1400

Fig. 7

Fig. 8

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Installation 27

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 167 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Fig. 9 Installation of the option board

3.3 RS485 Multipoint network

The RS485 port (see Fig. 4) is used for multi point communication. A host
computer (PC/PLC) can address (master) maximum 247 slave stations (nodes).
See Fig. 10.

BUS
MASTER

RS 485

VFX 2.0 MSF 2.0 VFX 2.0

Id 1 Id 2 Id 3

F10

Fig. 10 RS 485 mulitpoint network

28 Installation Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 168 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

3.3.1 RS485 connection

Table 5

RS485 pin Function

1 Ground
2 A-line
3 B-line
4 PE

The connector is a 4-pole male connector. The wiring should be done according
to Fig. 11.

Master Slave 1 Slave 2

GND GND
1 1 1
RS485-A RS485-A
2 2 2
RS485-B RS485-B 3
3 3
4 4 4

Shield Shield
PE
Connection to Modbus Male connectors on
RTU Host PC/PLC Modbus RTU option cards

Fig. 11 RS485 wiring

3.3.2 RS485 termination

The RS485 network must always be terminated, to avoid transmission problem.
The termination must take place at the end of the network. In Fig. 11 this
means that the termination must take place at the slave 2 unit.
Switch S1 (see Fig. 4) sets the termination ON or OFF as indicated in the Fig.
12 and Fig. 13.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Installation 29

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 169 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

OFF

ON
F14
Fig. 12 Termination is OFF.

OFF

ON
F15
Fig. 13 Termination is ON.

NOTE: Physical connection can be either RS232 or RS485, not both on the
same time.

3.4 RS232 point to point network

The RS232 port is used for point to point communication as a master slave. See
fig Fig. 14.

PC RS 232 Emotron product

F13

Fig. 14 RS232 point to point network

30 Installation Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 170 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

3.4.1 RS232 connection

Table 6

RS232 pin Function

2 TX from module
3 RX to module
5 Ground

3.4.2 RS232 wiring

The RS232 port consists of a sub-D 9 pole female connector. The wiring should
be done according to Fig. 14.

NOTE: Use an 1:1 cable WITHOUT a pin 2-3 crossing.

Master Slave

GND
5 5
9 9
4 4
8 8
RS232-RX 3
3
7 7
RS232-TX 2
2
6 6
1 1
Shield

PE
Connector to Female connector on
Modbus RTU Sub-d Modbus RTU Sub-d option card

Fig. 15 RS232 wiring.

NOTE: Physical connection can be either RS232 or RS485, not both on the
same time.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Installation 31

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 171 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

32 Installation Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 172 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4. Communication parameters

4.1 Set-up Communication Parameters

The following parameters have to be set-up:
• Unit address.
• Baud rate.
• Parity
• Behaviour when contact broken.
Setting up the communication parameter must be made in local ’Control panel’
mode. See section 4.2.1, page 36.
Serial comm. unit address [270].

Setting
270
Serial comm. unit address

1
Default: 1
Range: 1-247
1-247 Unit address.

Serial comm. baudrate [271]

Setting
271
Serial comm. baudrate

9. 6
Default: 9.6 kBaud
Range: 2.4 - 38.4 kBaud
2.4-38.4 Baudrate.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Communication parameters 33

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 173 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Serial comm. parity [272]

Setting
272
Serial comm. parity

0
Default: 0
Range: 0, 1
0 No parity
1 Even parity.

Serial comm. broken alarm [273]

If the softstarter is configured for control via serial communications (menu
[200] = 3) and the serial communication contact is broken during operation, an
F15 alarm can be configured to occur. In this menu the alarm can be enabled
and an action to be performed can be chosen. The following options are availa-
ble:

OFF
Serial communication contact broken alarm is disabled.

WARNING
Alarm message F15 is shown in the display and relay K3 is activated (for default
configuration of the relays). However, the motor is not stopped and operation
continues. The alarm message will disappear and the relay will be reset when the
fault disappears. The alarm may also be reset manually from the control panel.

COAST
Alarm message F15 is shown in the display and relay K3 is activated (for default
configuration of the relays). The motor voltage is automatically switched off.
The motor freewheels until it stops.

34 Communication parameters Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 174 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

STOP
Alarm message F15 is shown in the display and relay K3 is activated (for default
configuration of the relays). The motor is stopped according to the stop settings
in menu [320] - [325].

BRAKE
Alarm message F15 is shown in the display and relay K3 is activated (for default
configuration of the relays). The brake function is activated according to the
braking method chosen in menu [323] and the motor is stopped according to
the alarm brake settings in menu [326] - [327] (braking strength and braking
time).
A serial communication broken alarm is automatically reset when a new start
signal is given. The start signal can be given via control panel, remotely or via
serial communication depending on the control source chosen in menu 200.
Regardless of the chosen control source, it is always possible to initiate a reset via
control panel.

Setting
273
Serial comm. contact broken
(alarm code F15)
o F F
Default: 2
Range: oFF, 1, 2, 3, 4
oFF Serial comm. contact broken disabled
1 Warning
2 Coast
3 Stop
4 Brake

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Communication parameters 35

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 175 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4.2 Serial communication as control source

The source from where operation and parameter settings are made is selected in
the Control Source parameter menu 200.
When serial communication control source (3) is selected, it is possible to:
• Operate the soft starter only via serial comm.
• Set up parameters only via serial comm. Exceptions for the serial comm.
parameters described above.
• Readout all view information and all parameters.
• Set up the control source parameter from local MSF control panel.
• Inspect all parameters from local MSF control panel.

4.2.1 Selection of control sources

Setting up the control source has to be done from the local MSF 2.0 control
panel.

Setting
200
Control source

2
Default: 2 (remote control)
Range: 1, 2, 3
1 Control panel.
2 Remote control.
3 Serial communication control.

Independent of the chosen control source it is always possible to read out all the
information in the softstarter via serial communication, both parameters and
view information.

NOTE: When Reset to factory settings is made via serial comm., the control
source will remain in serial comm. control.

36 Communication parameters Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 176 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4.3 Parameter List

The product MSF menu column show the menu number on the control panel
for the parameter.
For more information on any parameter/function, see Instruction Manual MSF
2.0 Softstarter.

4.4 Coil status list

Table 7

Modbus Menu
Function/Name Range Comment
no no.
0 Reset alarm 0, 1 0->1=Reset
1 Start/Stop 0, 1 Stop=0, Run=1
2 Jog forward 0, 1 0=No Jog, 1=Jog
3 Jog reverse 0, 1 0=No Jog, 1=Jog
4 Autoset 0, 1 0->1=Auto-set 411
5 Reset power consumption 0, 1 0->1=Reset 732
Control panel locked for
20 0, 1 0=Unlocked. 1=Locked 201
settings
24 Enable US-units 0, 1 0=Off, 1=On 202
Preset pump control
25 0, 1 0=No, 1=Yes 300
parameters
27 Bypass 0, 1 Off, on; off=0, on=1 340
28 Power Factor Control PFC 0, 1 Off, on; off=0, on=1 341
29 PTC input 0, 1 No, yes; no=0, yes=1 221
32 Jog forward enable 0, 1 No, yes; no=0, yes=1 334
33 Jog reverse enable 0, 1 No, yes; no=0, yes=1 335
36 Fan continuously on 0, 1 Off, on; off=0, on=1 342

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Communication parameters 37

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 177 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4.5 Input status list

Table 8 Input status list
Modbus Function/Name Range Range/Unit
no
2 Pre-alarm 0, 1 0=No alarm, 1=Alarm
3 Pre-alarm max 0, 1 0=No alarm, 1=Alarm
4 Pre-alarm min 0, 1 0=No alarm, 1=Alarm

4.6 Input register list

Table 9

Product
Modbus Function/Name Range/Unit Comments MSF
no menu
0 Power consumption high word 0-2E9 Wh 1 Wh<->1 731
1 Power consumption low word
2 Electrical power high word -2E9-2E9 W 1 Wh<->1
3 Electrical power low word
4 Output shaft power high word -2E9-2E9 kW 0.1 kW<->1 703
5 Output shaft power low word
6 Operation time high word 0-9999999 h 730
7 Operation time low word
10 Shaft torque high word -2E9-2E9 Nm 0.1Nm <-> 1 705
11 Shaft torque low word
r23 -> HB = 0,
16 Software version text 902
LB = 23
v001 -> HB = 0, 901
17 Software variant text LB = 01
100/
18 Current 0.0-6553.5 A 0.1A<->1 700
19 Current phase L1 0.0-6553.5 A 0.1A<->1 708
20 Current phase L2 0.0-6553.5 A 0.1A<->1 709
21 Current phase L3 0.0-6553.5 A 0.1A<->1 710
22 Shaft torque in percentage units 0 - 250% Tn 706

38 Communication parameters Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 178 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 9

Product
Modbus Function/Name Range/Unit Comments MSF
no menu
23 Line main voltage 0.0-720.0 V 0.1V<->1 701
24 Line main voltage L1-L2 0.0-720.0 V 0.1V<->1 711
25 Line main voltage L1-L3 0.0-720.0 V 0.1V<->1 712
26 Line main voltage L2-L3 0.0-720.0 V 0.1V<->1 713
See description 900
27 Softstarter type 1-19 in 4.8.1.
29 Analogue output value 0-100% 725
30 Serial comm. unit address 1-247 270
31 Serial comm. baudrate 2.4--38.4 kBaud 0.1 kBaud <-> 1 271
0=No parity
32 Serial comm. parity 272
1=Even parity
34 Actual parameter set 1, 2, 3, 4 241
413/
35 Output Shaft power % 0% -200% Pn 704
29.0-96.0 °C
36 Softstarter temperature 84.0-204.0 °F 0.1 deg <-> 1 707

37 Time to next allowed start 0-60 min 227

See description
40 Mode 1-8 in § 4.8.3.
41 Softstarter status 1-12 720
42 Digital input status 0000-1111 L<->0, H<->1 721
43 Analogue/digital input value 0-100% 723
44 Analogue/digital input status 0,1 L<->0, H<->1 722
45 Relay status 000-111 L<->0, H<->1 724
223/
46 Used thermal capacity 0-150% 715
47 Power factor 0.00-1.00 1.00 <-> 100 702
0 = None, 439/
50 Phase sequence 0, 1, 2 1 = RTS, 714
2 = RST
51 Emotron product 2 2=MSF

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Communication parameters 39

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 179 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 9

Product
Modbus Function/Name Range/Unit Comments MSF
no menu
Alarm list, latest error, time
100 0-9999999 h 1 h<->1
stamp high word
Alarm list, latest error, time
101 stamp low word
102 Alarm list, latest error 0- 17 800
Alarm list, error 14, time stamp 0-9999999 h
103 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 14, time stamp
104 low word
105 Alarm list, error 14 0- 17 801
Alarm list, error 13, time stamp 0-9999999 h
106 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 13, time stamp
107 low word
108 Alarm list, error 13 0- 17 802
Alarm list, error 12, time stamp 0-9999999 h
109 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 12, time stamp
110 low word
111 Alarm list, error 12 0- 17 803
Alarm list, error 11, time stamp 0-9999999 h
112 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 11, time stamp
113 low word
114 Alarm list, error 11 0- 17 804
Alarm list, error 10, time stamp 0-9999999 h
115 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 10, time stamp
116 low word
117 Alarm list, error 10 0- 17 805
Alarm list, error 9, time stamp
118 0-9999999 h 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 9, time stamp
119 low word

40 Communication parameters Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 180 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 9

Product
Modbus Function/Name Range/Unit Comments MSF
no menu
120 Alarm list, error 9 0- 17 806
Alarm list, error 8, time stamp
121 0-9999999 h 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 8, time stamp
122 low word
123 Alarm list, error 8 0- 17 807
Alarm list, error 7, time stamp
124 0-9999999 h 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 7, time stamp
125 low word
126 Alarm list, error 7 0- 17 808
Alarm list, error 6, time stamp
127 0-9999999 h 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 6, time stamp
128 low word
129 Alarm list, error 6 0- 17 809
Alarm list, error 5, time stamp
130 0-9999999 h 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 5, time stamp
131 low word
132 Alarm list, error 5 0- 17 810
Alarm list, error 4, time stamp
133 0-9999999 h 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 4, time stamp
134 low word
135 Alarm list, error 4 0- 17 811
Alarm list, error 3, time stamp
136 0-9999999 h 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 3, time stamp
137 low word
138 Alarm list, error 3 0- 17 812
Alarm list, error 2, time stamp
139 0-9999999 h 1 h<->1
high word

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Communication parameters 41

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 181 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 9

Product
Modbus Function/Name Range/Unit Comments MSF
no menu
Alarm list, error 2, time stamp
140 low word
141 Alarm list, error 2 0- 17 813
Alarm list, error 1, time stamp
142 0-9999999 h 1 h<->1
high word
Alarm list, error 1, time stamp
143 low word
144 Alarm list, error 1 0- 17 814

4.7 Holding register list

Table 10

Product
Modbus Function/Name Range/Unit Comment MSF
no menu
0 Nominal motor voltage 200.0-700.0V 0.1 V<->1 210
1 Nominal frequency 50-60Hz 1 Hz<->1 215
2 Nominal motor current 25-200% Insoft in A 0.1 A<->1 211
3 Nominal motor speed 500 - 3600 rpm 213
Bit15=0
1 W<->1,
25 - 400% Pnsoft in 0.001 hp<->1
4 Nominal motor power 212
kW Bit15=1
0.1 kW<->1,
0.1 hp<->1
5 Nominal motor power factor 0.50-1.00 1.00 <-> 100 214
6 Analogue start-stop on-value 0-100% 502
7 Analogue star-stop off-value 0-100% 503
Analogue start-stop delay
8 1-999 s 504
time
Off <-> 0,
Menu 100 <-> 1,
9 Automatic return menu 0.1-159 101
Menu 101 <-> 2,
..

42 Communication parameters Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 182 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 10

Product
Modbus Function/Name Range/Unit Comment MSF
no menu
10 Control source 1,2,3 200
11 Normal load 0-200% Pn 412
12 Start delay power alarms 1-999 s 402
Max power alarm response
13 0.1-90.0 s 0.1s->1 404
delay
14 Max power alarm margin 0-100% Pnormal 1 403
Max power pre-alarm
15 0.1-90.0 s 0.1s->1 406
response delay
16 Max power pre-alarm margin 0-100% Pnormal 405
Min power alarm response
17 0.1-90.0 s 0.1s->1 410
delay
18 Min power alarm margin 0-100% Pnormal 409
Min power pre-alarm
19 0.1-90.0 s 0.1s->1 408
response delay
20 Min power pre-alarm margin 0-100% Pnormal 407
21 Select parameter set 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 240
22 Relay K1 0, 1-19 530
23 Relay K2 0, 1-19 531
24 Relay K3 0, 1-19 532
25 Digital input 1 function 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 510
26 Digital input 2 function 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 511
28 Digital input 3 function 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 512
29 Digital input 4 function 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 513
30 K1 contact function 1, 2 533
31 K2 contact function 1, 2 534
Off<->0,
32 Copy parameter set 0-12 1-2 <-> 1, 242
1-3 <-> 2,
33 Stop method 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 320
34 Alarm braking time 1-120 s 1 s<->1 327
35 Alarm braking strength 0, 150-500% Off<->0 326

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Communication parameters 43

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 183 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 10

Product
Modbus Function/Name Range/Unit Comment MSF
no menu
36 Analogue output value 1, 2, 3, 4 521
37 Analogue output 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 520
38 Scaling analogue output, min 0-500% 522
40 Scaling analogue output, max 0-500% 523
2000 Initial voltage at start 25-90% U 313
2001 Start time 1-60 s 1 s<->1 315
2002 Step down voltage at stop 100-40% U 322
2003 Stop time 1-120 s 1 s<->1 325
2008 Initial torque at start 0-250% Tn 311
2009 End torque at start 25-250% Tn, 312
2010 Start method 1, 2, 3, 4 310
2012 Current limit at start 0, 150-500% In Off <-> 0 314
2013 Braking strength 150-500% 324
2015 Torque boost current limit 0, 300-700% In Off <-> 0 316
2016 Torque boost active time 0.1-2.0 s 0.1 s<->1 317
2017 Digital input pulses 1-100 501
2018 Slow speed strength 10-100 330
2019 Slow speed time at start 0, 1-60 s Off <-> 0 331
2020 Slow speed time at stop 0, 1-60 s Off <-> 0 332
2021 DC-brake at slow speed 0, 1-60 s Off <-> 0 333
2022 Internal protection class 0, 2-40 s 1 s<->1 222
2023 Number of starts per hour 0, 1-99 225
2024 Locked rotor alarm 1.0-10.0 1.0 s<->10 229
2025 Unbalance voltage level 2-25% Un 431
Response delay voltage
2026 1-90 s 1 s<->1 432
unbalance alarm
2027 Over voltage level 100-150% Un 434
Response delay over voltage
2028 1-90 s 1 s<->1 435
alarm

44 Communication parameters Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 184 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 10

Product
Modbus Function/Name Range/Unit Comment MSF
no menu
2029 Under voltage level 75-100% Un 437
Response delay under volt-
2030 1-90 s 1 s<->1 438
age alarm
2031 Reset to factory settings 0, 1 243
2033 End torque at stop 0-100% of Tn 321
1=dynamic brake;
2034 Braking method 323
2=reverse brake
2035 Analogue/digital input 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 500
2036 Min. time between starts 0, 1-60 min 1 min<->1 226
2037 Thermal motor protection 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 220
2038 Start limitation 0, 1, 2 224
2039 Locked rotor alarm 0, 1, 2, 228
2040 Single phase input failure 1, 2 230
Current limit start time
2041 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 231
expired
2042 Serial comm. contact broken 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 273
2043 Max power alarm 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 400
2044 Min power alarm 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 401
2045 External alarm 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 420
2046 Voltage unbalance alarm 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 430
2047 Over voltage alarm 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 433
2048 Under voltage alarm 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 436
2049 Phase reversal alarm 0, 1, 2 440
2050 Autoreset attempts 0-10 Off <-> 0 250
Thermal motor protection
2051 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 251
autoreset
2052 Start limitation autoreset 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 252
2053 Locked rotor alarm autoreset 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 253
Current limit start time
2054 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 254
expired autoreset

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Communication parameters 45

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 185 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Table 10

Product
Modbus Function/Name Range/Unit Comment MSF
no menu
2055 Max power alarm autoreset 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 255
2056 Min power alarm autoreset 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 256
2057 External alarm autoreset 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 257
2058 Phase input failure autoreset 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 258
Voltage unbalance alarm
2059 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 259
autoreset
2060 Over voltage alarm autoreset 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 260
Under voltage alarm autore-
2061 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 261
set
Serial communication autore- 0, 1-3600 s
2062 Off<->0, 1 s<->1 262
set
Softstarter overheated
2063 0, 1-3600 s Off<->0, 1 s<->1 263
autoreset

4.8 Parameter description

For more information on any parameter/function, see MSF 2.0 Softstarter
Instruction manual.

4.8.1 Softstarter type (Input register 27)

Table 11 Softstarter type
1 MSF-017 2 MSF-030 3 MSF-045 4 MSF-060 5 MSF-075 6 MSF-085
7 MSF-110 8 MSF-145 9 MSF-170 10 MSF-210 11 MSF-250 12 MSF-310
13 MSF-370 14 MSF-450 15 MSF-570 16 MSF-710 17 MSF-835 18 MSF-1000
19 MSF-1400

4.8.2 Serial comm. contact broken (Holding register

2042)
Communication is considered lost if no request is made to this unit within 15
sec. See section 4.1, page 33

46 Communication parameters Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 186 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4.8.3 Operation mode (Input register 40)

1 Voltage control

2 Torque control

3 Current limit

4 Voltage control with current limit

7 Direct On Line start

5 Torque control with current limit

4.8.4 Reset to factory settings (Holding register 2031)

Reset to factory settings from serial communication will have the same effect as
if it was done from the control panel, except for one parameter. The control
source parameter (menu 200) will remain in 3 (serial comm. control) instead of
being set to the default value 2 (remote control).

4.9 Performance
It is important to configure the communication master according to the slave
performance/restrictions. The total message size must not exceed 64 bytes.
Max number of registers at a time is limited to 25 (both for read and write).
Max 2 requests per sec. to reduce system disturbance.
Min 1 request per 15 sec. to avoid serial comm. contact broken alarm.

4.9.1 MSF response delay

The read function codes (1 - 4), will have a maximum delay of 250 ms.

Table 12 Response delay table for setting (forcing) registers

Holding register Response delay/

Parameter
modbus no. recommended time out
0-5 Nominal motor data 500 ms/data
2031 Reset to factory settings 3.5 sec
Other registers 250 ms

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 Communication parameters 47

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 187 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

48 Communication parameters Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 188 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

5. CRC Generation
The CRC is started by first pre-loading a 16-bit register to all 1’s. Then a proc-
ess begins of applying successive eight-bit bytes of the message to the current
contents of the register. Only the eight bits of data in each character are used for
generating the CRC. Start and stop bits, and the parity bit, do not apply to the
CRC.
During generation of the CRC, each eight-bit character is exclusive OR-ed with
the register contents. The result is shifted in the direction of the least significant
bit (lsb), with a zero filled into the most significant bit (msb) position. The lsb is
extracted and examined. If the lsb was a 1, the register is then exclusive OR-ed
with a preset, fixed value. If the lsb was a 0, no exclusive OR takes place.
This process is repeated until eight shifts have been performed. After the last
(eighth) shift, the next eight-bit character is exclusive OR-ed with the register’s
current value, and the process repeats for eight more shifts as described above.
The final contents of the register, after all the characters of the message have
been applied, is the CRC value.

5.1 Generation in steps:

• Step 1 Load a 16-bit register with 0xFFFF (all 1’s). Call this the CRC regis-
ter.
• Step 2 Exclusive OR the first eight-bit byte of the message with the low
order byte of the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
• Step 3 Shift the CRC register one bit to the right (toward the lsb), zero-fill-
ing the msb. Extract and examine the lsb.
• Step 4 If the lsb is 0, repeat Step 3 (another shift). If the lsb is 1, Exclusive
OR the CRC register with the polynomial value 0xA001 (1010 0000 0000
0001).
• Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When
this is done, a complete eight-bit byte will have been processed.
• Step 6 Repeat Steps 2 ... 5 for the next eight-bit byte of the message. Con-
tinue doing this until all bytes have been processed.
• Result The final contents of the CRC register is the CRC value.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 CRC Generation 49

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 189 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

• Step 7 When the CRC is placed into the message, its upper and lower bytes
must be swapped as described below.
• Placing the CRC into the Message
• When the 16-bit CRC (two eight-bit bytes) is transmitted in the message,
the low order byte will be transmitted first, followed by the high order byte -
e.g., if the CRC value is 0x1241.

Table 13
Message
CRC LO 41
CRC HI 12

Example of CRC Generation Function

An example of a C language function performing CRC generation is shown on
this page.
The function takes two arguments:
• Unsigned char *puchMsg; A pointer to the message buffer containing
binary data to be used for generating the CRC.
• Unsigned int usDataLen; The quantity of bytes in the message buffer.
The function returns the CRC as a type unsigned int.
• Unsigned int CRC16 (unsigned int usDataLen, unsigned char *puchMsg)

50 CRC Generation Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 190 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

#define CRC_POLYNOMIAL 0xA001

unsigned int crc_reg;
unsigned char i,k;
crc_reg = 0xFFFF;
for (i=0 ; i<usDataLen ; i++)
{
crc_reg ^= *puchMsg++;
for (k=0 ; k<8 ; k++)
{
if (crc_reg & 0x0001)
{
crc_reg >>= 1;
crc_reg ^= CRC_POLYNOMIAL;
}

Fig. 16 CRC example.

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 CRC Generation 51

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 191 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

52 CRC Generation Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 192 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Emotron AB 01-3853-01r1 2007-09-15

Emotron AB, Mörsaregatan 12, SE-250 24 Helsingborg, Sweden

Tel: +46 42 16 99 00, Fax: +46 42 16 99 49
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.emotron.com

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 193 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 194 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 195 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 196 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 197 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 198 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 199 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 200 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 201 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 202 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 203 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 204 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 205 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 206 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 207 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 208 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 209 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 210 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 211 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 212 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 213 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 214 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 215 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 216 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 217 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 218 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 219 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 220 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 221 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

2. GRAPHIC DISPLAY

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 222 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 223 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 224 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 225 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 226 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 227 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 228 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 229 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 230 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

3. RADIO

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 231 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 232 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 233 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

4. LEVEL TRANSDUCER

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 234 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Operating Instructions
Waterpilot FMX167
Hydrostatic level measurement

BA231P/00/EN/06.09
71096102

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 235 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167

2 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 236 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Table of contents

Table of contents
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.1 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Installation, commissioning and operation . . . . . . . . 4 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.3 Operational and process safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Notes on safety conventions and icons . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.1 Device designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2 Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3 CE mark, Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.4 Registered Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1 Incoming acceptance and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.3 Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.4 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.1 Connecting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.2 Measuring unit electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.3 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

6 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

7 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.1 Mounting clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.2 Terminal box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.3 Additional weight for FMX167 with an outer
diameter of 22 mm and 29 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.4 TMT181 temperature head transmitter
(4 to 20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.5 Extension cable mounting screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.6 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.7 Testing adapter for Waterpilot with an outer
diameter of 22 mm and 29 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.8 Cable marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

8 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8.1 Troubleshooting specific to Waterpilot FMX167
with optional Pt100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8.2 Troubleshooting specific to TMT181 temperature
head transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
8.3 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
8.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
8.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Endress+Hauser 3
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 237 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Safety instructions Waterpilot FMX167

1 Safety instructions

1.1 Designated use

The Waterpilot FMX167 is a hydrostatic pressure sensor for measuring the level of fresh water,
wastewater and salt water. The temperature is measured simultaneously in the case of sensor
versions with a Pt100 resistance thermometer. An optional temperature head transmitter converts
the Pt100 signal to a 4 to 20 mA signal.
The manufacturer accepts no liability for damages resulting from incorrect use or use other than that
designated.

1.2 Installation, commissioning and operation

The Waterpilot FMX167 and the (optional) TMT181 temperature head transmitter are designed to
meet state-of-the-art safety requirements and comply with applicable regulations and EC Directives.
If used incorrectly or for applications for which they are not intended, the devices can be a source
of application-related danger, e.g. product overflow due to incorrect installation or configuration.
For this reason, installation, connection to the electricity supply, commissioning, operation and
maintenance of the measuring system must only be carried out by trained, qualified specialists
authorized to perform such work by the facility's owner-operator. The specialist staff must have read
and understood these Operating Instructions and must follow the instructions they contain.
Modifications and repairs to the devices are permissible only if they are expressly allowed in the
Operating Instructions. Pay particular attention to the data and information on the nameplate.

1.3 Operational and process safety

Alternative monitoring measures have to be taken while configuring, testing or servicing the device
to ensure the operational and process safety.

1.3.1 Hazardous area (optional)

Devices for use in hazardous areas bear an additional marking on the nameplate (→ ä 6). If using
the measuring system in hazardous areas, the appropriate national standards and regulations must
be observed. The device is accompanied by separate Ex documentation, which is an integral part of
this documentation. The installation regulations, connection values and safety instructions listed in
this document must be observed. The documentation number of the related Safety Instructions (XA)
is also indicated on the nameplate.
• Ensure that all personnel are suitably qualified.
• Measuring point requirements with regard to measurement and safety must be observed.
• Please refer to the "Ordering information" section of Technical Information TI351P/00/EN for
versions for approvals in the order code.

4 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 238 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Safety instructions

1.4 Notes on safety conventions and icons

In order to highlight safety-related or alternative operating procedures in the manual, the following
conventions have been used, each indicated by a corresponding symbol in the margin.

Symbol Meaning

#
Warning!
A warning highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, will lead to serious
personal injury, a safety hazard or the destruction of the device.

"
Caution!
Caution highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may lead to personal
injury or the incorrect operation of the device.

!
Note!
A note highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, can have an indirect
effect on operation or trigger an unexpected response on the part of the device.

0
Explosion-protected, type-examined equipment
If the device has this symbol embossed on its nameplate, it can be used in a hazardous area or a
non-hazardous area, depending on the approval.

Hazardous area

- This symbol is used in the drawings of these Operating Instructions to indicate hazardous areas.
– Devices used in hazardous areas must possess an appropriate type of protection.

Safe area (non-hazardous area)

This symbol is used in the drawings of these Operating Instructions to indicate non-hazardous

. areas.
– Devices used in hazardous areas must possess an appropriate type of protection. Cables used in
hazardous areas must meet the necessary safety-related characteristic quantities.

% Direct current
A terminal to which DC voltage is applied or through which direct current flows.

&
Alternating current
A terminal to which alternating voltage (sine-wave) is applied or through which alternating current
flows.

)
Ground connection
A grounded terminal, which, as far as the operator is concerned, is already grounded by means of a
grounding system.

* Protective earth connection

A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections.

+
Equipotential connection
A connection that has to be connected to the plant grounding system: This may be a potential
equalization line or a star grounding system depending on national or company codes of practice.

Connecting cable immunity to temperature change

t => 85°C Indicates that the connecting cables must be able to withstand temperatures of at least 85 °C.

Safety instructions
Observe the safety instructions in the related Operating Instructions.

Endress+Hauser 5
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 239 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Identification Waterpilot FMX167

2 Identification

2.1 Device designation

2.1.1 Identifying the measuring device via the nameplate

The nameplate is secured to the extension cable of the FMX167, see also → ä 8, Section 3.2.

Made in Germany, D-79689 Maulburg

Waterpilot FMX167
Order Code: 1 L= 3

250000874-C
Ser.-No.: 2
Messbereich/range: 4 TAG:
5 7 18
Vmax: 6
Mat: 8
9 10 11 12
13
19
14 15
Dat./Insp.: 16 17

P01-FMX167xx-18-xx-xx-xx-003

Fig. 1: Nameplate for Waterpilot FMX167

1 Order code
See the specifications on the order confirmation for the meanings of the individual letters and
digits.
2 Serial number
3 Length of the extension cable
4 Nominal measuring range
5 Current output
6 Supply voltage
7 TAG
8 Wetted materials
9 Ex symbol (optional)
10 CSA symbol (optional)
11 FM symbol (optional)
12 Observe the information on installation in the Operating Instructions!
13 Identification number of the notified body for ATEX (optional)
14 Text for approval (optional)
15 Approval symbol (optional)
16 Test date (optional)
17 Symbol: Observe Safety Instructions, with information on the documentation number, e. g. XA131P-C (optional)
18 FMX167 connection diagram
19 Pt100 connection diagram if the Waterpilot was ordered with Pt100.

In addition, the FMX167 with an outer diameter of 22 mm and 42 mm also bears the following
information:

Waterpilot FMX167
4
Serial-No.: 1
3
Messbereich/range: 2 5

P01-FMX167xx-18-xx-xx-xx-004

Fig. 2: FMX167 labeling

1 Serial number
2 Nominal measuring range
3 CE mark or approval symbol
4 Identification number of the notified body for ATEX (optional)
5 Text for approval (optional)

6 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 240 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Installation

2.1.2 Identifying the measuring device via the order code

Specific device features make up the order code. You can assign these features in the "Ordering
information" section of Technical Information TI351P/00/EN.

2.2 Scope of delivery

The scope of delivery comprises:
• Waterpilot FMX167, optionally with integrated Pt100 resistance thermometer
• Optional accessories (→ ä 18, Chap. 7)
Documentation supplied:
• Operating Instructions BA231P (this document)
• Calibration report/Final inspection report
• SD126P drinking water approval (optional)
• Devices suitable for use in hazardous areas:
Additional documentation such as Safety Instructions (XA), Control Drawings (ZD)

2.3 CE mark, Declaration of Conformity

The devices are designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, have been tested and left the
factory in a condition in which they are safe to operate. The devices comply with the applicable
standards and regulations as listed in the EC Declaration of Conformity and thus comply with the
legal requirements of the EC Directives. Endress+Hauser confirms the conformity of the device by
affixing to it the CE mark.

2.4 Registered Trademarks

GORE-TEX®
W.L. Gore & Associates, Inc., USA brand.
TEFLON®
E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, USA brand.

3 Installation

3.1 Incoming acceptance and storage

3.1.1 Incoming acceptance

• Check the packaging and the contents for damage.
• Check the shipment, make sure nothing is missing and that the scope of supply matches your
order.

3.1.2 Storage
The device must be stored in a dry, clean area and protected against damage from impact
(EN 837-2).
Storage temperature range:
• FMX167: –40 to +80 °C
• TMT181: –40 to +100 °C
• Terminal box: –40 to +80 °C

Endress+Hauser 7
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 241 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Installation Waterpilot FMX167

3.2 Installation conditions

➁ OPEN

90°

CLOSE

90°

➀
Made in Germany, D-79689 Maulburg

Waterpilot FMX167
Order Code: L=

250000874-C
Ser.-No.:
Messbereich/range: TAG:

Vmax:
Mat:

Dat./Insp.:

➂
➃

FMX167

➇
P01-FMX167xx-11-xx-xx-xx-003

Fig. 3: Examples of installation

For accessories, see Chap. 7.
1 Extension cable mounting screw can be ordered as an accessory
2 Terminal box can be ordered as an accessory
3 Extension cable bending radius > 120 mm
4 Mounting clamp can be ordered as an accessory
5 Extension cable
6 Guide tube for FMX167
7 Additional weight can be ordered as an accessory
8 Protection cap

! Note!
• Cable length
– Customer-specific length in meters or feet.
– Limited cable length when performing installation with freely suspended device with extension
cable mounting screw or mounting clamp, as well as for FM/CSA approval: max. 300 m/
984 ft.
• Sideways movement of the level probe can result in measuring errors. For this reason, install the
probe at a point free from flow and turbulence, or use a guide tube. The internal diameter of the
guide tube should be at least 1 mm larger than the outer diameter of the selected FMX167.
• The cable must end in a dry room or a suitable terminal box. The terminal box from
Endress+Hauser provides optimum humidity and climatic protection and is suitable for outdoor
installation.

8 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 242 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Installation

• Protection cap: The device is provided with a protection cap to prevent mechanical damage to the
measuring cell. This cap should not be removed during the transportation and installation process.
• Endress+Hauser recommends using twisted, shielded cables for any further wiring.

3.2.1 Dimensions
For dimensions, please refer to Technical Information TI351P/00/EN for the Waterpilot,
"Mechanical construction" section (→ see also: www.endress.com → Select Country → Download
→ Media Type: Documentation).

3.3 Installation instructions

3.3.1 Mounting the Waterpilot with a mounting clamp

P01-FMX167xx-17-xx-xx-xx-004

Fig. 4: Mounting with a mounting clamp

1 Extension cable
2 Mounting clamp
3 Clamping jaws

Mounting the mounting clamp:

1. Mount the mounting clamp (item 2). When selecting the place to fix the unit, take the weight
of the extension cable (item 1) and the device into account.
2. Raise the clamping jaws (item 3). Position the extension cable (item 1) between the clamping
jaws as illustrated in the graphic.
3. Hold the extension cable in position (item 1) and push the clamping jaws (item 3) back down.
Tap the clamping jaws gently from above to fix in place.

Endress+Hauser 9
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 243 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Installation Waterpilot FMX167

3.3.2 Mounting with an extension cable mounting screw

SW 36 ➀
36 AF ➁
➂

➃
➅

( + 1.57)
+ 40
➆
ò SW 41 ➄
41 AF

mm (inch)
P01-FMX167xx-17-xx-xx-xx-005

Fig. 5: Mounting with extension cable mounting screw, here illustrated with thread G 1 ½
1 Extension cable
2 Cover mounting screw
3 Sealing ring
4 Clamping sleeves
5 Mounting screw adapter
6 Top edge of clamping sleeve
7 Required length of extension cable and probe before assembly
8 After assembly, item 7 is located next to the mounting screw with
G 1 ½thread: height of sealing surface of the adapter or 1 ½ NPT thread height of thread run-out of adapter

! Note!
If you want to lower the level probe to a certain depth, place the top edge of the clamping sleeve
40 mm higher than the required depth. Then push the extension cable and the clamping sleeve into
the adapter as described in Step 6 in the following section.

Mounting extension cable mounting screw with G 1 ½or NPT thread:

1. Mark the desired length of the extension cable on the extension cable, see note on this page.
2. Insert the probe through the measuring aperture and carefully lower on the extension cable.
Fix the extension cable to prevent it from slipping.
3. Push the adapter (item 5) over the extension cable and screw it tightly into the measuring
aperture.
4. Push the sealing ring (item 3) and cover (item 2) onto the cable from above. Press the sealing
ring into the cover.
5. Place the clamping sleeve (item 4) around the extension cable (item 1) in accordance with
Figure 6.
6. Push the extension cable with the clamping sleeve (item 4) into the adapter (item 5).
7. Push the cover (item 2) and sealing ring (item 3) onto the adapter (item 5) and screw tightly
to the adapter.

! Note!
Reverse the sequence of steps to remove the extension cable mounting screw.

" Caution!
Mounting in unpressurized containers only.

10 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 244 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Installation

3.3.3 Mounting the terminal box

The optional terminal box is mounted with four screws (M 4). For the dimensions of the terminal
box, please refer to Technical Information TI351P/00/EN for the Waterpilot, "Mechanical
construction" section (→ see also: www.endress.com → Select Country → Download → Media
Type: Documentation).

3.3.4 Mounting the TMT181 temperature head transmitter

➃
➂
➁
➀

OPEN

90°

CLOS
E
90°

P01-FMX167xx-17-xx-xx-xx-003

Fig. 6: Temperature head transmitter mounting, here illustrated with terminal box. Only open the terminal box with
a screwdriver.
1 Mounting screws
2 Mounting springs
3 TMT181 temperature head transmitter
4 Circlips
5 Terminal box

Mounting the temperature head transmitter:

1. Guide the mounting screws (item 1) with the mounting springs (item 2) through the guide
holes of the temperature head transmitter (item 3).
2. Fix the mounting screws with the circlips (item 4). Circlips, mounting screws and springs are
included in the scope of delivery for the temperature head transmitter.
3. Screw the temperature head transmitter into the field housing tightly.
(Max. width of screwdriver blade 6 mm)

# Warning!
To prevent damage to the temperature head transmitter, do not tighten the mounting screw too
tightly.

Endress+Hauser 11
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 245 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Installation Waterpilot FMX167

! Note!
A minimum distance of 7 mm must be maintained between the terminal strip and the TMT181
temperature head transmitter.

>7
(>0.27)

mm (inch)

P01-FMXxxxxx-06-xx-xx-xx-022

3.4 Post-installation check

Check that all screws are firmly seated.

12 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 246 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Wiring

4 Wiring

4.1 Connecting the device

! Note!
When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with the applicable
national standards and regulations and the Safety Instructions (XAs) or the Installation or Control
Drawings (ZDs).
• The supply voltage must match the supply voltage on the nameplate. → ä 6, Chap. 2.1.1 and
Chap. 2.1.2)
• Switch off the supply voltage before connecting the device.
• The cable must end in a dry room or a suitable terminal box. The IP66/IP67 terminal box with
a GORE-TEX® from Endress+Hauser is suitable for outdoor installation (see also → ä 11,
Chap. 3.3.3 "Mounting the terminal box").
• Connect the device in accordance with the following diagrams. Reverse polarity protection is
integrated in both the Waterpilot FMX167 and TMT181 temperature head transmitter. Changing
the polarities will not result in the destruction of the devices.
• A suitable circuit breaker should be provided for the device in accordance with IEC/EN 61010.

Waterpilot FMX167, standard Waterpilot FMX167 with Pt100 1)

10…30 V DC 10…30 V DC

4…20 mA 4…20 mA
➀ ➀
RL RL

RD BK RD BK YE BU
WH BR
FMX167
Pt 100

FMX167
P01-FMX167xx-04-xx-xx-xx-008 P01-FMX167xx-04-xx-xx-xx-006

Fig. 7: Electrical connection Fig. 8: Electrical connection with Pt100

Versions "7" or "3" for feature 70 Versions "1" or "4" for feature 70 "Additional
"Additional fittings" in order code fittings" in order code

m Not for FMX167 with an outer diameter of 29 mm

Wire colors: RD = red, BK = black, WH = white, YE = yellow, BU = blue, BR = brown

1)
Not for use in hazardous areas.

Endress+Hauser 13
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 247 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Wiring Waterpilot FMX167

Waterpilot FMX167 with Pt100 and TMT181 temperature head transmitter 1)

(4 to 20 mA)

10…30 V DC
TMT181 (4…20 mA)
4…20 mA
6
RL 5

➀ 4
1
3 8…35 V DC
2
RL
4…20 mA

RD BK YE BU
WH BR

Pt 100

FMX167
P01-FMX167xx-04-xx-xx-xx-007

Fig. 9: FMX167 with Pt100 and TMT181 temperature head transmitter (4 to 20 mA), version "5" for feature 70 in the
order code (→ see Technical Information TI351P, "Ordering information" section).
m Not for FMX167 with an outer diameter of 29 mm

Wire colors: RD = red, BK = black, WH = white, YE = yellow, BU = blue, BR = brown

1)
Not for use in hazardous areas.

4.1.1 Supply voltage

Version Supply voltage

FMX167 FMX167 + Pt100 TMT181 temperature

head transmitter

Standard 10 to 30 V DC 10 to 30 V DC 8 to 35 V DC

4.1.2 Cable specification

• FMX167 with optional Pt100
– Commercially available, shielded instrument cable
– Terminals, FMX167 terminal box: 0.08 to 2.5 mm2
• TMT181 temperature head transmitter (optional)
– Commercially available instrument cable
– Terminals, FMX167 terminal box: 0.08 to 2.5 mm2
– Transmitter terminals: max. 1.75 mm2

! Note!
The extension cables are shielded for versions with outer diameters of 22 mm or 42 mm. In the
following cases, Endress+Hauser recommends the use of a shielded cable as the cable extension:
• For large distances between the end of the extension cable and the display and/or evaluation unit
• For large distances between the end of the extension cable and the temperature head transmitter
• When directly connecting the Pt100 signal to a display and/or evaluation unit

14 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 248 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Wiring

4.1.3 Power consumption/current consumption

FMX167 FMX167 + Pt100 TMT181 temperature

head transmitter

Power consumption ≤ 0.675 W at 30 V DC ≤ 0.675 W at 30 V DC ≤ 0.875 W at 35 V DC

Current consumption Max. ≤ 22.5 mA Max. ≤ 22.5 mA Max. ≤ 25 mA
Min. ≥ 3.5 mA Min. ≥ 3.5 mA Min. ≥ 3.5 mA
Pt100: ≤ 0.6 mA

4.1.4 Load
The maximum load resistance depends on the supply voltage (Ub) and must be determined
individually for each current loop. See formulae and diagrams for "FMX167" and "Temperature head
transmitter".
The total resistance resulting from the resistances of the connected devices, the connecting cable
and, where applicable, the resistance of the extension cable may not exceed the load resistance
value.

FMX167 Temperature head transmitter

Ub – 10 V Ω Ub – 8 V
Rtot ≤ – 2 • 0.09 • l – Radd Rtot ≤ – Radd
0.0225 A m 0.025 A
P01-FMX167xx-16-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-FMX167xx-16-xx-xx-xx-001

Rges = Max. load resistance [Ω]

Radd = Additional resistances such as resistance of evaluation unit and/or display unit, cable resistance [Ω]
Ub = Supply voltage [V]
l = Simple length of extension cable [m] (cable resistance per wire ≤ 0.09 Ω/m)

R R
[Ω] [Ω]
888 1080

880
666
680
444
480

222 280

80
10 15 20 25 30 UB 8 10 15 20 25 30 35 UB
[V] [V]
P01-FMX167xx-05-xx-xx-xx-001 P01-FMX167xx-05-xx-xx-xx-003

Fig. 10: FMX167 load chart for estimating the load Fig. 11: Temperature head transmitter load chart for
resistance. Additional resistances, such as the estimating the load resistance. Additional
resistance of the extension cable, have to be resistances have to be subtracted from the
subtracted from the value calculated as shown value calculated as shown in the equation.
in the equation.

Endress+Hauser 15
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 249 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Wiring Waterpilot FMX167

4.2 Measuring unit electrical connection

4.2.1 Overvoltage protection

! Note!
• To protect the Waterpilot FMX167 and the TMT181 temperature head transmitter from large
interference voltage peaks, Endress+Hauser recommends installing external overvoltage
protection upstream and downstream of the display and/or evaluation unit as shown in the
graphic.
• Overvoltage protection in accordance with EN 61000 (500V symmetrical/1000V asymmetrical)
is integrated in the Waterpilot FMX167 as standard.

➀
Power
OP supply
Pt100 4…20 mA
OP ➁
Temperature

4…20 mA
OP ➁ OP Power
supply
Level

Pt 100 4…20 mA
OP
Temperature Power
➂
FMX167 + Pt100

OP supply
4…20 mA
OP
Level

P01-FMX167xx-14-xx-xx-en-006

Fig. 12: Measuring unit electrical connection

1 Power supply, display and evaluation unit with one input for Pt100
2 Power supply, display and evaluation unit with one input for 4 to 20 mA
3 Power supply, display and evaluation unit with two inputs for 4 to 20 mA
OVP Overvoltage protection, e. g. HAW from Endress+Hauser

4.3 Post-connection check

The following checks must be performed after completing electrical connection of the device:
• Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate?
• Is the device connected as described in Chap. 4.1 "Connecting the device"?
• Are all screws firmly tightened?
• Optional terminal box: are the cable glands leaktight?

16 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 250 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Operation

5 Operation
! Note!
Endress+Hauser offers comprehensive measuring point solutions with display and/or evaluation
units for the Waterpilot and TMT181 temperature head transmitter. Your Endress+Hauser service
organization would be glad to be of service if you have any other questions. For contact addresses,
please go to www.endress.com/worldwide.

6 Maintenance
No special maintenance work is required for the Waterpilot and for the optional TMT181
temperature head transmitter.

! Note!
Terminal box: Keep the pressure compensation and GORE-TEX® filter free from contamination.

6.1 Exterior cleaning

Please note the following points when cleaning the devices externally:
• The cleaning agents used should not corrode the housing surface and the seals. Information on
this can be found on the nameplate → ä 6.
• Mechanical damage to the process isolating diaphragm or the extension cable must be avoided.
• Only clean the terminal box with water or with a cloth dampened with very diluted ethanol.

Endress+Hauser 17
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 251 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Accessories Waterpilot FMX167

7 Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser, are available for the
Waterpilot → see also Technical Information TI351P/00/EN, "Ordering information" section.

7.1 Mounting clamp

• Endress+Hauser offers a mounting clamp for easy Waterpilot mounting (→ ä 9, Chap. 3.3.1).
• Material: 1.4404 (AISI 316L) and fiberglass reinforced PA (polyamide)
• Order number: 52006151

7.2 Terminal box

• Terminal box IP 66/IP 67 with GORE-TEX®-filter incl. 3 installed terminals.
The terminal box is also suitable for installing a temperature head transmitter (order number:
52008794) or for four additional terminals (order number: 52008938) (→ ä 11, Chap. 3.3.4).
• Order number: 52006152

7.3 Additional weight for FMX167 with an outer diameter

of 22 mm and 29 mm

M 14x1
105.8
110.6

ø22

P01-FMX167xxx-06-xx-xx-xx-014

• Endress+Hauser offers additional weights to prevent sideways movement that results in

measuring errors, or to make it easier to lower the device in a guide tube.
You can screw several weights together. The weights are then attached directly to the Waterpilot.
For the Waterpilot with an outer diameter of 29 mm (version with coated housing), a maximum
of 5 weights may be attached.
• Material: 1.4435 (AISI 316L)
• Weight: 300 g
• Order number: 52006153

18 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 252 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Accessories

7.4 TMT181 temperature head transmitter (4 to 20 mA)

• 2-wire temperature head transmitter, configured for a measuring range from –20 to +80 °C. This
setting offers a temperature range of 100K which can be easily mapped. Please note that the
Pt100 resistance thermometer is designed for a temperature range from –10 to +70 °C. → ä 11,
Chap. 3.3.4.
• Order number: 52008794

7.5 Extension cable mounting screw

• Endress + Hauser offers extension cable mounting screws to ease FMX167 mounting and to seal
the measuring aperture. → ä 10, Chap. 3.3.2.
• Material: 1.4301 (AISI 304)
• Order number for extension cable mounting screw with G 1 ½ A thread: 52008264
• Order number for extension cable mounting screw with 1 ½ NPT thread: 52009311

7.6 Terminals
• Four terminals in strip for FMX21 terminal box, suitable for wire cross-section: 0.08 to 2.5 mm2
• Order number: 52008938

7.7 Testing adapter for Waterpilot with an outer diameter

of 22 mm and 29 mm

~25
M 14x1
A
SW 22
22 AF
~33

SW 13
13 AF
SW 12
12 AF

P01-FMX167xxx-06-xx-xx-xx-013

Fig. 13: Testing adapter

A Connection suitable for Waterpilot
B Compressed air hose connection, internal diameter of quick coupling piece 4 mm

• Endress+Hauser offers a testing adapter to ease function-testing of the level probes.

• Observe the maximum pressure for the compressed air hose and the maximum overload for the
level probe. (→ For the maximum overload of the cable probe, see Technical Information
TI351P/00/EN for the Waterpilot or go to www.endress.com → Select Country → Download
→ Media Type: Documentation)
• Maximum pressure of the quick coupling piece supplied: 10 bar
• Adapter material: 1.4301 (AISI 304)
• Quick coupling piece material: anodized aluminum
• Adapter weight: 39 g
• Order number: 52011868

Endress+Hauser 19
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 253 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Troubleshooting Waterpilot FMX167

7.8 Cable marking

To make installation easier, Endress+Hauser marks the extension cable if a customer-specific length
has been ordered, see Technical Information TI351P/00/EN, "Ordering information" section.

! Note!
• The mark is only for installation purposes.
It must be thoroughly removed without trace in the case of devices with drinking water approval.
The extension cable must not be damaged in the process.
• Not for use of the Waterpilot FMX167 in hazardous areas.

8 Troubleshooting

8.1 Troubleshooting specific to Waterpilot FMX167 with

optional Pt100

Error description Cause Remedial action

No measuring signal 4 to 20 mA cable not connected Connect device in accordance with

correctly → ä 13, Chap. 4.1.
No power supplied via the 4 to 20 mA Check current loop.
cable

Supply voltage too low (min. 10 V DC) – Check supply voltage.

– Overall resistance greater than max.
load resistance, → ä 13, Chap. 4.1

Waterpilot defective Replace the Waterpilot.

Temperature measured value is Pt100 connected in 2-wire circuit, – Compensate cable resistance.
inaccurate/incorrect (only for cable resistance was not compensated – Connect Pt100 as 3-wire or 4-wire
Waterpilot FMX167 with Pt100) for circuit.

8.2 Troubleshooting specific to TMT181 temperature head

transmitter

Error description Cause Remedial action

No measuring signal 4 to 20 mA cable not connected Connect device in accordance with

correctly → ä 13, Chap. 4.1.

No power supplied via the 4 to 20 mA Check current loop.

cable

Supply voltage too low (min. 8 V DC) – Check supply voltage.

– Overall resistance greater than max.
load resistance, → ä 13,
Chap. 4.1.

Error current ≤ 3.6 mA or ≥ 21 mA Pt100 not connected correctly Connect device in accordance with
→ ä 13, Chap. 4.1.

4 to 20 mA cable not connected Connect device in accordance with

correctly → ä 13, Chap. 4.1.

Pt100 resistance thermometer Replace the Waterpilot.

defective

Temperature head transmitter Replace the temperature head

defective transmitter.

Measured value is inaccurate/ Pt100 connected in 2-wire circuit, – Compensate cable resistance.
incorrect cable resistance was not compensated – Connect Pt100 as 3-wire or 4-wire
circuit.

20 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 254 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Technical data

8.3 Spare parts

! Note!
You can order spare parts directly from your Endress+Hauser service organization.
Protection cap for process isolating diaphragm
For FMX167 with an outer diameter of 22 mm and 29 mm
• 5 pieces in set
• Order number: 52008999
For FMX167 with an outer diameter of 42 mm
• Order number: 917755-0000
Pressure compensation kit
• Set comprising 10 Teflon filters and 5 cable sleeves for the extension cable
• Order number: 52005578

8.4 Return
Before you send in a device for repair:
• Remove all signs of fluids, paying particular attention to seal grooves and gaps in which fluid can
become lodged. This is especially important if the fluid is hazardous to health. Please refer also to
the "Declaration of Hazardous Material and Decontamination" (second last page).
Please enclose the following when returning the device:
• The duly completed and signed "Declaration of Hazardous Material and Decontamination" (see
second last page).
Only then can Endress+Hauser inspect the returned device.
• The chemical and physical properties of the medium.
• A description of the application.
• A description of the error which occurred.
• Special instructions on handling, if necessary, e.g. safety data sheet as per EN 91/155/EEC.

8.5 Disposal
When disposing, separate and recycle the device components based on the materials.

9 Technical data
For the technical data, please refer to Technical Information TI351P/00/EN for the Waterpilot
(→ see also: www.endress.com → Select Country → Download → Media Type: Documentation).

Endress+Hauser 21
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 255 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Waterpilot FMX167 Index

Index
A
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

C
Cable marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connecting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

L
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

M
Maintenance and exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Mounting the extension cable mounting screw . . . . . . . . . 10
Mounting the mounting clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Mounting the terminal box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Mounting the TMT181 temperature transmitter . . . . . . . . 11

N
Nameplate for Waterpilot FMX167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

O
Overvoltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

P
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pressure compensation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Protection cap for process isolating diaphragm. . . . . . . . . . 21

R
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

S
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

T
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

22 Endress+Hauser
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 256 of 372
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Declaration of Hazardous Material and De-Contamination

Erklärung zur Kontamination und Reinigung
Please reference the Return Authorization Number (RA#), obtained from Endress+Hauser, on all paperwork and mark the RA#
clearly on the outside of the box. If this procedure is not followed, it may result in the refusal of the package at our facility.
RA No. Bitte geben Sie die von E+H mitgeteilte Rücklieferungsnummer (RA#) auf allen Lieferpapieren an und vermerken Sie diese
auch außen auf der Verpackung. Nichtbeachtung dieser Anweisung führt zur Ablehnung ihrer Lieferung.

Because of legal regulations and for the safety of our employees and operating equipment, we need the "Declaration of Hazardous Material
and De-Contamination", with your signature, before your order can be handled. Please make absolutely sure to attach it to the outside of the
packaging.
Aufgrund der gesetzlichen Vorschriften und zum Schutz unserer Mitarbeiter und Betriebseinrichtungen, benötigen wir die unterschriebene
"Erklärung zur Kontamination und Reinigung", bevor Ihr Auftrag bearbeitet werden kann. Bringen Sie diese unbedingt außen an der
Verpackung an.

Type of instrument / sensor Serial number

Geräte-/Sensortyp ____________________________________________ Seriennummer ________________________

Used as SIL device in a Safety Instrumented System / Einsatz als SIL Gerät in Schutzeinrichtungen

Process data/Prozessdaten Temperature / Temperatur_____ [°F] _____ [°C] Pressure / Druck _____ [psi] _____ [ Pa ]
Conductivity / Leitfähigkeit ________ [μS/cm] Viscosity /Viskosität _____ [cp] _____ [mm2/s]

Medium and warnings

Warnhinweise zum Medium

harmful/
Medium /concentration Identification flammable toxic corrosive irritant other * harmless
Medium /Konzentration CAS No. entzündlich giftig ätzend gesundheits- sonstiges* unbedenklich
schädlich/
reizend
Process
medium
Medium im
Prozess
Medium for
process cleaning
Medium zur
Prozessreinigung
Returned part
cleaned with
Medium zur
Endreinigung
* explosive; oxidising; dangerous for the environment; biological risk; radioactive
* explosiv; brandfördernd; umweltgefährlich; biogefährlich; radioaktiv
Please tick should one of the above be applicable, include safety data sheet and, if necessary, special handling instructions.
Zutreffendes ankreuzen; trifft einer der Warnhinweise zu, Sicherheitsdatenblatt und ggf. spezielle Handhabungsvorschriften beilegen.

Description of failure / Fehlerbeschreibung __________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Company data /Angaben zum Absender

Company /Firma ___________________________________ Phone number of contact person /Telefon-Nr. Ansprechpartner:

_________________________________________________ ____________________________________________
Address / Adresse Fax / E-Mail ____________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________ Your order No. / Ihre Auftragsnr. ____________________________

“We hereby certify that this declaration is filled out truthfully and completely to the best of our knowledge.We further certify that the returned
parts have been carefully cleaned. To the best of our knowledge they are free of any residues in dangerous quantities.”
“Wir bestätigen, die vorliegende Erklärung nach unserem besten Wissen wahrheitsgetreu und vollständig ausgefüllt zu haben. Wir bestätigen
weiter, dass die zurückgesandten Teile sorgfältig gereinigt wurden und nach unserem besten Wissen frei von Rückständen in gefahrbringen-
der Menge sind.”
P/SF/Konta XIV

(place, date / Ort, Datum) Name, dept./Abt. (please print /bitte Druckschrift) Signature / Unterschrift

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 257 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

www.endress.com/worldwide

BA231P/00/EN/06.09
71096102
CCS/FM+SGML6.0 71096102Page 258 of 372
Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013
 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

5. PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 259 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Operating Instructions
VEGABAR 74
4 … 20 mA/HART

Process pressure/
Hydrostatic

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 260 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Contents

Contents
1 About this document
1.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.2 Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 Symbolism used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 For your safety
2.1 Authorised personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.2 Appropriate use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.3 Warning about misuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.4 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.5 Safety approval markings and safety tips . . . .. 7
2.6 CE conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7
2.7 Fulfilling NAMUR recommendations . . . . . . . .. 7
2.8 Safety instructions for Ex areas . . . . . . . . . . .. 8
2.9 Environmental instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8
3 Product description
3.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9
3.2 Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.4 Packaging, transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . 11

4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2 Mounting steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

5 Connecting to power supply

5.1 Preparing the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.2 Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.3 Wiring plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

6 Set up
6.1 Setup steps without VEGADIS 12 . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.2 Setup steps with VEGADIS 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

7 Setup with PACTware™

7.1 Connect the PC with VEGACONNECT 3 . . . .. 22
7.2 Connect the PC with VEGACONNECT 4 . . . .. 23
7.3 Parameter adjustment with PACTware™. . . . .. 24
7.4 Parameter adjustment with AMS™ and PDM .. 24
28432-EN-070718

7.5 Saving the parameter adjustment data . . . . . .. 24

Q-Pulse
2 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 261
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Contents

8 Maintenance and fault rectification

8.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
8.2 Fault clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
8.3 Instrument repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

9 Dismounting
9.1 Dismounting steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
9.2 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

10 Supplement
10.1 Technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 28
10.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 35
10.3 Industrial property rights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 41
10.4 Trademark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 41

Supplementary documentation
Information:
Depending on the ordered version, supplementary documen-
tation belongs to the scope of delivery. You find this
documentation in chapter "Product description".

Instructions manuals for accessories and replacement

parts
Tip:
To ensure reliable setup and operation of your VEGABAR 74,
we offer accessories and replacement parts. The associated
documents are:
l Supplementary instructions manual 32036 "Welded socket
and seals"
l Operating instructions manual 32798 "Breather housing
28432-EN-070718

VEGABOX 02"
l Operating instructions manual 20591 "External indicating
and adjustment unit VEGADIS 12"

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 262 of 372
3
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

About this document

1 About this document

1.1 Function
This operating instructions manual provides all the information
you need for mounting, connection and setup as well as
important instructions for maintenance and fault rectification.
Please read this information before putting the instrument into
operation and keep this manual accessible in the immediate
vicinity of the device.

1.2 Target group

This operating instructions manual is directed to trained
personnel. The contents of this manual should be made
available to these personnel and put into practice by them.

1.3 Symbolism used

Information, tip, note
This symbol indicates helpful additional information.

Caution: If this warning is ignored, faults or malfunc-

tions can result.
Warning: If this warning is ignored, injury to persons and/or
serious damage to the instrument can result.
Danger: If this warning is ignored, serious injury to persons
and/or destruction of the instrument can result.

Ex applications
This symbol indicates special instructions for Ex applications.

l List
The dot set in front indicates a list with no implied sequence.

à Action
This arrow indicates a single action.

1 Sequence
Numbers set in front indicate successive steps in a procedure.
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
4 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 263
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

For your safety

2 For your safety

2.1 Authorised personnel
All operations described in this operating instructions manual
must be carried out only by trained specialist personnel
authorised by the operator.
During work on and with the device the required personal
protection equipment must always be worn.

2.2 Appropriate use

VEGABAR 74 is a pressure transmitter for measurement of
gauge pressure, absolute pressure and vacuum.
You can find detailed information on the application range in
chapter "Product description".
Operational reliability is ensured only if the instrument is
properly used according to the specifications in the operating
instructions manual as well as possible supplementary
instructions.
Due to safety and warranty reasons, any invasive work on the
device beyond that described in the operating instructions
manual may be carried out only by personnel authorised by the
manufacturer. Arbitrary conversions or modifications are
explicitly forbidden.

2.3 Warning about misuse

Inappropriate or incorrect use of the instrument can give rise to
application-specific hazards, e.g. vessel overfill or damage to
system components through incorrect mounting or adjustment.

2.4 General safety instructions

This is a high-tech instrument requiring the strict observance of
standard regulations and guidelines. The user must take note
of the safety instructions in this operating instructions manual,
the country-specific installation standards as well as all
prevailing safety regulations and accident prevention rules.
The instrument must only be operated in a technically flawless
28432-EN-070718

and reliable condition. The operator is responsible for trouble-

free operation of the instrument.

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 264 of 372
5
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

For your safety

During the entire duration of use, the user is obliged to

determine the compliance of the required occupational safety
measures with the current valid rules and regulations and also
take note of new regulations.

2.5 Safety approval markings and safety tips

The safety approval markings and safety tips on the device
must be observed.

2.6 CE conformity
VEGABAR 74 is in CE conformity with EMC (89/336/EWG),
fulfils NAMUR recommendation NE 21 and is in CE conformity
with LVD (73/23/EWG).
Conformity has been judged according to the following
standards:
l EMC:
- Emission EN 61326: 2004 (class B)
- Susceptibility EN 61326: 2004 including supplement A
l LVD: EN 61010-1: 2001
VEGABAR 74 is not subject to the pressure device guideline.1)

2.7 Fulfilling NAMUR recommendations

VEGABAR 74 fulfills the following NAMUR recommendations:
l NE 21 (interference resistane and emitted interference)
l NE 43 (signal level for failure information)
l NE 53 (compatibility sensor and indicating/adjustment
components)
VEGA instruments are generally upward and downward
compatible:
l Sensor software to DTM VEGABAR 74 HART
l DTM VEGABAR 74 for adjustment software PACTware™
The parameter adjustment of the basic sensor functions is
independent of the software version. The range of available
functions depends on the respective software version of the
individual components.
The software version of VEGABAR 74 HART can be read out
28432-EN-070718

via PACTware™.

1) Due to the flush diaphragm, no own pressure compartment is formed.

Q-Pulse
6 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 265
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

For your safety

You can view all software histories on our website www.vega.

com. Make use of this advantage and get registered for update
information via e-mail.

2.8 Safety instructions for Ex areas

Please note the Ex-specific safety information for installation
and operation in Ex areas. These safety instructions are part of
the operating instructions manual and come with the Ex-
approved instruments.

2.9 Environmental instructions

Protection of the environment is one of our most important
duties. That is why we have introduced an environment
management system with the goal of continuously improving
company environmental protection. The environment man-
agement system is certified according to DIN EN ISO 14001.
Please help us fulfil this obligation by observing the environ-
mental instructions in this manual:
l Chapter "Packaging, transport and storage"
l Chapter "Disposal"
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 266 of 372
7
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Product description

3 Product description
3.1 Configuration
Scope of delivery The scope of delivery encompasses:
l VEGABAR 74 pressure transmitter
l Documentation
- this operating instructions manual
- Test certificate for pressure transmitters
- Ex-specific "Safety instructions" (with Ex-versions)
- if necessary, further certificates

Components VEGABAR 74 consists of the following components:

l Process fitting with measuring cell
l Housing with electronics
l Connection cable (direct cable outlet)
The components are available in different versions.

Fig. 1: Example of a VEGABAR 74 with process fitting G1½ A

1 Connection cable
2 Housing with electronics
3 Process fitting with measuring cell
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
8 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 267
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Product description

3.2 Principle of operation

Area of application VEGABAR 74 is a pressure transmitter for use in the paper,
food processing and pharmaceutical industry. Thanks to the
high protection class IP 68/IP 69K it is particularly suitable for
use in humid environment. Depending on the version, it is used
for level, gauge pressure, absolute pressure or vacuum
measurements. Measured products are gases, vapours and
liquids, also with abrasive contents.

Functional principle The sensor element is the CERTEC® measuring cell with
flush, abrasion resistant ceramic diaphragm. The hydrostatic
pressure of the medium or the process pressure causes a
capacitance change in the measuring cell via the diaphragm.
This change is converted into an appropriate output signal and
outputted as measured value.
The CERTEC® measuring cell is also equipped with a
temperature sensor. The temperature value can be processed
via the signal output.

Supply Two-wire electronics 4 … 20 mA/HART for power supply and

measured value transmission over the same cable.
The supply voltage range can differ depending on the
instrument version.
The data for power supply are stated in chapter "Technical
data" in the "Supplement".

3.3 Operation
VEGABAR 74 4 … 20 mA/HART can be adjusted with different
adjustment media:
l with external adjustment/indication VEGADIS 12
l an adjustment software according to FDT/DTM standard,
e.g. PACTware™ and PC
l with a HART handheld
The kind of adjustment and the adjustment options depend on
the selected adjustment component. The entered parameters
are generally saved in the respecitive sensor, when adjusting
with PACTware™ and PC optionally also in the PC.
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 268 of 372
9
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Product description

3.4 Packaging, transport and storage

Packaging Your instrument was protected by packaging during transport.
Its capacity to handle normal loads during transport is assured
by a test according to DIN EN 24180.
The packaging of standard instruments consists of environ-
ment-friendly, recyclable cardboard. For special versions, PE
foam or PE foil is also used. Dispose of the packaging material
via specialised recycling companies.

Transport Transport must be carried out under consideration of the notes

on the transport packaging. Nonobservance of these instruc-
tions can cause damage to the device.

Transport inspection The delivery must be checked for completeness and possible
transit damage immediately at receipt. Ascertained transit
damage or concealed defects must be appropriately dealt
with.

Storage Up to the time of installation, the packages must be left closed

and stored according to the orientation and storage markings
on the outside.
Unless otherwise indicated, the packages must be stored only
under the following conditions:
l Not in the open
l Dry and dust free
l Not exposed to corrosive media
l Protected against solar radiation
l Avoiding mechanical shock and vibration
Storage and transport tem- l Storage and transport temperature see "Supplement -
perature Technical data - Ambient conditions"
l Relative humidity 20 … 85 %
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
10 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 269
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Mounting

4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions
Materials, wetted parts Make sure that the wetted parts of VEGABAR 74, especially
the seal and process fitting, are suitable for the existing
process conditions such as pressure, temperature etc. as well
as the chemical properties of the medium.
You can find the specifications in chapter "Technical data" in
the "Supplement".

Temperature limits Higher process temperatures often mean also higher ambient
temperatures. Make sure that the upper temperature limits
stated in chapter "Technical data" for the environment of the
electronics housing and connection cable are not exceeded.

Fig. 2: Temperature ranges

1 Process temperature
2 Ambient temperature

Connection l The connection cable has a capillary for atmospheric

pressure compensation
à Lead the cable end into a dry space or into a suitable
terminal housing.
Information:
VEGA recommends the breather housing VEGABOX 02 or the
indication/adjustment VEGADIS 12. Both contain terminals
and a ventilation filter for pressure compensation. For
mounting outdoors, a suitable protective cover is available.
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 270 of 11
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Mounting

4.2 Mounting steps

Sealing/Screwing in threaded Seal the thread with teflon, hemp or a similar resistant seal
versions material on the process fitting thread 1½ NPT.
à Screw VEGABAR 74 into the welded socket. Tighten the
hexagon on the process fitting with a suitable wrench.
Wrench size, see chapter "Dimensions".
Sealing/Screwing in flange Seal the flange connections according to DIN/ANSI with a
versions suitable, resistant seal and mount VEGABAR 74 with suitable
screws.

Sealing/Screwing in hygienic Use the seal suitable for the respective process fitting. You can
fittings find the components in the line of VEGA accessories in the
supplementary instructions manual "Welded socket and
seals".

28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
12 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 271
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Connecting to power supply

5 Connecting to power supply

5.1 Preparing the connection
Note safety instructions Always keep in mind the following safety instructions:
l Connect only in the complete absence of line voltage
l If overvoltage surges are expected, versions with inte-
grated overvoltage arresters should be used or external
overvoltage arresters should be installed
Tip:
We recommend the version of VEGABAR 74 with integrated
overvoltage arrester or VEGA type ÜSB62-36G.X as external
overvoltage arreaster.

Take note of safety In hazardous areas you should take note of the appropriate
instructions for Ex regulations, conformity and type approval certificates of the
applications sensors and power supply units.

Select power supply Power supply and current signal are carried on the same two-
wire cable. The voltage supply range can differ depending on
the instrument version.
The data for power supply are stated in chapter "Technical
data" in the "Supplement".
Provide a reliable separation of the supply circuit from the
mains circuits according to DIN VDE 0106 part 101.
VEGA power supply units VEGATRENN 149AEx, VEGASTAB
690, VEGADIS 371 as well as all VEGAMETs meet this
requirement. When using one of these instruments, protection
class III is ensured for VEGABAR 74.
Bear in mind the following factors regarding supply voltage:
l Output voltage of the power supply unit can be lower under
nominal load (with a sensor current of 20.5 mA or 22 mA in
case of fault message)
l Influence of additional instruments in the circuit (see load
values in chapter "Technical data")
Selecting connection cable VEGABAR 74 is connected with standard two-wire cable
without screen. An outer cable diameter of 5 … 9 mm ensures
28432-EN-070718

the seal effect of the cable gland when connecting via

VEGABOX 02 or VEGADIS 12. If electromagnetic interference
is expected which is above the test values of EN 61326 for

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 272 of 13
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Connecting to power supply

industrial areas, screened cable should be used. For HART

multidrop operation we recommend as standard practice the
use of screened cable.

Fig. 3: Connection of VEGABAR 74

1 Direct connection
2 Connection via VEGABOX 02 or VEGADIS 12

Cable screening and ground- If screened cable is necessary, connect the cable screen on
ing both ends to ground potential. In the VEGABOX 02 or
VEGADIS 12, the screen must be connected directly to the
internal ground terminal. The ground terminal on the outside of
the housing must be connected to the potential equalisation
(low impedance).
If potential equalisation currents are expected, the connection
on the processing side must be made via a ceramic capacitor
(e.g. 1 nF, 1500 V). The low frequency potential equalisation
currents are thus suppressed, but the protective effect against
high frequency interference signals remains.

Select connection Take note of the corresponding installation regulations for Ex

cable for Ex applica- applications. In particular, make sure that no potential equal-
tions isation currents flow over the cable screen. In case of
28432-EN-070718

grounding on both sides this can be achieved by the use of a

capacitor or a separate potential equalisation.

Q-Pulse
14 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 273
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Connecting to power supply

5.2 Connection procedure

Direct connection Proceed as follows:
1 Wire the connection cable up to the connection compart-
ment. The bending radius must be at least 25 mm.2)
2 Connect the wire ends to the screw terminals according to
the wiring plan
Via VEGABOX 01 or VEGADIS Proceed as follows:
12
1 Snap connection housing onto the carrier rail or screw it to
the mounting plate
2 Loosen the cover screws and remove the cover
3 Insert the cable through the cable entry into the connection
housing housing
4 Loosen the screws with a screwdriver
5 Insert the wire ends into the open terminals according to
the wiring plan
6 Tighten the screws with a screwdriver
7 Check the hold of the wires in the terminals by lightly
pulling on them
8 Tighten the compression nut of the cable entry. The seal
ring must completely encircle the cable
9 Connect the supply cable according to steps 3 to 8
10 Screw the housing cover back on
The electrical connection is finished.
28432-EN-070718

2) The connection cable is already preconfectioned. After shortening the ca-

ble, fasten the type plate with support again to the cable.

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 274 of 15
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Connecting to power supply

5.3 Wiring plan

Direct connection
5
1
2
3
4

Fig. 4: Wire assignment, connection cable

1 brown (+): to power supply or to the processing system
2 blue (-): to power supply or to the processing system
3 yellow: is only required with VEGADIS 12, otherwise connect to minus or
with VEGABOX 01 to terminal 33)
4 Screen
5 Breather capillaries with filter element

Connection via VEGABOX 02

6
5

5
4

4
3

3
2

2
+ 1
1

1
2

Fig. 5: Terminal assignment VEGABAR 74

1 To power supply or the processing system
2 Screen4)

Wire number Wire colour/Polarity VEGABAR 74 terminal

1 brown (+) 1

2 blue (-) 2

3 Yellow 2

Screen Ground
28432-EN-070718

3) For customer-specific versions already connected with blue (-) when being
shipped.
4) Connect screen to ground terminal. Connect ground terminal on the outside
of the housing as prescribed. The two terminals are galvanically connected.

Q-Pulse
16 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 275
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Connecting to power supply

Connection via VEGADIS 12

TRANSMITTER
OPERATE
ti

ZERO
SPAN

5
4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 10 11 12
+ -
TRANSMITTER NOT USED 4...20mA
+
VEGADIS 12

+
3 – 1

– 2

Fig. 6: Terminal assignment, VEGADIS 12

1 To power supply or the processing system
2 Control instrument (4 … 20 mA measurement)
3 Screen5)
4 Breather capillaries
5 Suspension cable

Wire number Wire colour/Polarity Terminal VEGADIS

12

1 brown (+) 1

2 blue (-) 2

3 Yellow 3
28432-EN-070718

5) Connect screen to ground terminal. Connect ground terminal on the outside

of the housing as prescribed. The two terminals are galvanically connected.

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 276 of 17
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Set up

6 Set up

6.1 Setup steps without VEGADIS 12

After mounting and electrical connection, VEGABAR 74 is
ready for operation.
à Switch on voltage
The electronics now carries out a self-check for approx. 2
seconds. Then VEGABAR 74 delivers a current of 4 … 20 mA
according to the actual level.

6.2 Setup steps with VEGADIS 12

Adjustment volume l zero - measuring range begin
l span - measuring range end
l ti - Integration time
Adjustment system

TRANSMITTER 2
1 OPERATE
ti

ZERO
SPAN

3
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 10 11 12
+ - -
TRANSMITTER 4...20mA
not used
+
VEGADIS 12

Fig. 7: Adjustment elements of VEGADIS 12

1 Rotary switch: choose the requested function
2 [+] key, change value (rising)
3 [-] key, change value (falling)

l With the rotary switch the requested function is selected

l With the [+] and [-] keys, the signal current or the
integration time are adjusted
l Finally the rotary switch is set to position "OPERATE"
The set values are transmitted to the EEPROM memory and
remain there even in case of voltage loss.

Adjustment steps, adjustment Proceed as follows for adjustment with VEGADIS 12:
28432-EN-070718

1 Open housing cover

2 Connect hand multimeter to terminals 10 and 12
3 Meas. range begin: Set rotary switch to "zero"

Q-Pulse
18 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 277
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Set up

4 Empty the vessel or reduce process pressure

5 Set a current of 4 mA with the [+] and [-] keys
6 Meas. range end: Set rotary switch to "span"
7 Fill the vessel or increase process pressure
8 Set a current of 20 mA with the [+] and [-] keys
9 Operation: Set rotary switch to "OPERATE"
10 Close housing cover
The adjustment data are effective, the output current 4 … 20 mA
corresponds to the actual level.

Adjustment steps, integration Proceed as follows for the adjustment of the integration time
time with VEGADIS 12:
1 Open housing cover
2 Set rotary switch to "ti"
3 By pushing the [-] key 10-times, make sure that the
integration time is set to 0 sec.
4 For every 1 sec. requested integration time, push the [+]
key once.
5 The integration time is the time required by the output
current signal to reach 90 % of the actual height after a
sudden level change.
6 Set rotary switch to "OPERATE"
7 Close housing cover
Adjustment steps, scaling The display outputs the current 4 … 20 mA as bar graph and
digital value.
With 4 mA no segment of the bar graph appears, with 20 mA
all segments appear. This assignment is fix.
You can scale the digital value to any value between -9999 …
+9999 via the adjustment module.
Proceed as follows for scaling the indication of VEGADIS 12:
1 Open housing cover
2 Initial value: Set rotary switch to "zero"
3 Set the requested value, e.g. 0 with the [+] and [-] keys
4 Final value: Set the rotary switch to "span"
5 Set the requested value, e.g. 1000 with the [+] and [-] keys
28432-EN-070718

6 Decimal point: Set the rotary switch to "point"

7 With the [+] and [-] keys you can adjust the requested
value, e.g. 8888 (no decimal point)

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 278 of 19
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Set up

8 Set rotary switch to "OPERATE"

9 Close housing cover
The adjustment data are effective, the output current 4 … 20 mA
corresponds to the actual level.

28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
20 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 279
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Setup with PACTware™

7 Setup with PACTware™

7.1 Connect the PC with VEGACONNECT 3

Connecting the PC to the
signal cable =
4
~
Power supply
3
2

VEGACONNECT 3
PACTwareTM/

Fig. 8: Connecting the PC to the signal cable

1 RS232 connection (with VEGACONNECT 3) or USB connection (with
VEGACONNECT 4)
2 VEGABAR 74
3 HART adapter cable
4 HART resistance 250 Ohm (optional depending on the processing)

Necessary components:
l VEGABAR 74
l PC with PACTware™ and suitable VEGA DTM
l VEGACONNECT 3 or 4 with HART adapter cable (art. no.
2.25397)
l HART resistance approx. 250 Ohm
l Power supply unit
Note:
With power supply units with integrated HART resistance
(internal resistance approx. 250 Ohm), an additional external
resistance is not necessary (e.g. VEGATRENN 149A, VEGA-
DIS 371, VEGAMET 381/624/625, VEGASCAN 693). In such
cases, VEGACONNECT 3 can be connected parallel to the
4 … 20 mA cable.
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 280 of 21
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Setup with PACTware™

7.2 Connect the PC with VEGACONNECT 4

Connection via HART
2 4

CK
LO
TWIST

USB
1 3

EN
OP
Fig. 9: Connecting the PC via HART to the signal cable
1 VEGABAR 74
2 HART resistance 250 Ohm (optional depending on the processing)
3 Connection cable with 2 mm pins and terminals
4 Processing system/PLC/Voltage supply

Necessary components:
l VEGABAR 74
l PC with PACTware™ and suitable VEGA DTM
l VEGACONNECT 4
l HART resistance 250 Ohm (optional depending on the
processing)
l Power supply unit or processing system
Note:
With power supply units with integrated HART resistance
(internal resistance approx. 250 Ohm), an additional external
resistance is not necessary. This applies, e.g. to the VEGA
instruments VEGATRENN 149A, VEGADIS 371, VEGAMET
381). Also usual Ex separators are most of the time equipped
with a sufficient current limitation resistor. In such cases,
VEGACONNECT 4 can be connected parallel to the 4 … 20 mA
cable.
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
22 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 281
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Setup with PACTware™

7.3 Parameter adjustment with PACTware™

Further setup steps are described in the operating instructions
manual "DTM Collection/PACTware™" attached to each CD
and which can also be downloaded from our homepage. A
detailed description is available in the online help of
PACTware™ and the VEGA DTMs.

Note:
Keep in mind that for setup of VEGABAR 74, DTM-Collection
in the actual version must be used.
All currently available VEGA DTMs are provided in the DTM
Collection on CD and can be obtained from the responsible
VEGA agency for a token fee. This CD includes also the up-to-
date PACTware™ version. The basic version of this DTM
Collection incl. PACTware™ is also available as a free-of-
charge download from the Internet.

Go via www.vega.com and "Downloads" to the item "Soft-

ware".

7.4 Parameter adjustment with AMS™ and PDM

For VEGA sensors, instrument descriptions for the adjustment
programs AMS™ and PDM are available as DD or EDD. The
instrument descriptions are already implemented in the current
versions of AMS™ and PDM. For older versions of AMS™ and
PDM, a free-of-charge download is available via Internet.
Go via www.vega.com and "Downloads" to the item "Soft-
ware".

7.5 Saving the parameter adjustment data

It is recommended to document or save the parameter
adjustment data. They are hence available for multiple use or
service purposes.
The VEGA DTM Collection and PACTware™ in the licensed,
professional version provide suitable tools for systematic
project documentation and storage.
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 282 of 23
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Maintenance and fault rectification

8 Maintenance and fault rectification

8.1 Maintenance
When used as directed in normal operation, VEGABAR 74 is
completely maintenance free.

8.2 Fault clearance

Reaction in case of failures The operator of the system is responsible for taken suitable
measures to remove interferences.

Causes of malfunction VEGABAR 74 offers maximum reliability. Nevertheless faults

can occur during operation. These may be caused by the
following, e.g.:
l Sensor
l Process
l Supply
l Signal processing
Fault rectification The first measures to be taken are to check the output signals
as well as to evaluate the error messages via the indicating
and adjustment module. The procedure is described below.
Further comprehensive diagnostics can be carried out on a PC
with the software PACTware™ and the suitable DTM. In many
cases, the causes can be determined in this way and faults
can be rectified.

24 hour service hotline However, if these measures are not successful, call the VEGA
service hotline in urgent cases under the phone no. +49 1805
858550.
The hotline is available to you 7 days a week round-the-clock.
Since we offer this service world-wide, the support is only
available in the English language. The service is free of
charge, only the standard telephone costs will be charged.

Checking the 4 … 20 mA sig- Connect a handheld multimeter in the suitable measuring

nal range according to the wiring plan.
? 4 … 20 mA signal not stable
l Level fluctuations
à Adjust integration time via PACTware™
28432-EN-070718

l no atmospheric pressure compensation

à Check the capillaries and cut them clean

Q-Pulse
24 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 283
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Maintenance and fault rectification

à Check the pressure compensation in the housing and

clean the filter element, if necessary

? 4 … 20 mA signal missing
l Wrong connection to power supply
à Check connection according to chapter "Connection
steps" and if necessary, correct according to chapter
"Wiring plan"
l No voltage supply
à Check cables for breaks; repair if necessary
l supply voltage too low or load resistance too high
à Check, adapt if necessary

? Current signal 3.6 mA; 22 mA

l electronics module or measuring cell defective
à Exchange instrument or return instrument for repair

In Ex applications, the regulations for the wiring of intrinsically

safe circuits must be observed.

Reaction after fault rectifica- Depending on the failure reason and measures taken, the
tion steps described in chapter "Set up" must be carried out again,
if necessary.

8.3 Instrument repair

If a repair is necessary, please proceed as follows:
You can download a return form (23 KB) from the Internet on
our homepage www.vega.com under: "Downloads - Forms
and certificates - Repair form".
By doing this you help us carry out the repair quickly and
without having to call back for needed information.
l Print and fill out one form per instrument
l Clean the instrument and pack it damage-proof
l Attach the completed form and, if need be, also a safety
data sheet outside on the packaging
l Please ask the agency serving you for the address of your
return shipment. You can find the respective agency on our
28432-EN-070718

website www.vega.com under: "Company - VEGA world-

wide"

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 284 of 25
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Dismounting

9 Dismounting
9.1 Dismounting steps

Warning:
Before dismounting, be aware of dangerous process con-
ditions such as e.g. pressure in the vessel, high temperatures,
corrosive or toxic products etc.

Take note of chapters "Mounting" and "Connecting to power

supply" and carry out the listed steps in reverse order.

9.2 Disposal
The instrument consists of materials which can be recycled by
specialised recycling companies. We use recyclable materials
and have designed the electronics to be easily separable.
WEEE directive 2002/96/EG
This instrument is not subject to the WEEE directive 2002/96/
EG and the respective national laws (in Germany, e.g.
ElektroG). Pass the instrument directly on to a specialised
recycling company and do not use the municipal collecting
points. These may be used only for privately used products
according to the WEEE directive.
Correct disposal avoids negative effects to persons and
environment and ensures recycling of useful raw materials.
Materials: see chapter "Technical data"
If you cannot dispose of the instrument properly, please
contact us about disposal methods or return.
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
26 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 285
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

10 Supplement
10.1 Technical data
General data
Manufacturer VEGA Grieshaber KG, D-77761 Schiltach
Type name VEGABAR 74
Parameter, pressure Gauge pressure, absolute pressure, vacuum
Measuring principle Ceramic-capacitive, dry measuring cell
Communication interface None

Materials and weights

Material 316L corresponds to 1.4404 or 1.4435
Materials, wetted parts
- Process fitting 316L
- Diaphragm sapphire ceramic® (99.9 % oxide ceramic)
- Seal FKM (e.g. Viton), Kalrez 6375, EPDM, Chem-
raz 535
- Seal process fitting thread G½ A, Klingersil C-4400
G1½ A
Materials, non-wetted parts
- Housing 316L
- Ground terminal 316Ti/316L
- Connection cable PUR, FEP, PE
- type label support on cable PE-HART
Weight 0.8 … 8 kg (1.8 … 17.6 lbs), depending on
process fitting

Output variable
Output signal 4 … 20 mA/HART
Failure signal 22 mA (3.6 mA), adjustable
Max. output current 22.5 mA
Damping (63 % of the input variable) 0 … 10 s, adjustable
Step response or adjustment time 70 ms (ti: 0 s, 0 … 63 %)
Fulfilled NAMUR recommendations NE 43
28432-EN-070718

Additional output parameter - temperature

Processing is made via HART-Multidrop

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 286 of 27
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

Range -50 … +150 °C (-58 … +302 °F)

Resolution 1 °C (1.8 °F)
Accuracy
- in the range of 0 … +100°C ±3 K
(+32 … +212 °F)
- in the range of -50 … 0 °C typ. ±4 K
(-58 … +32 °F) and +100 … +150 °C
(+212 … +302 °F)

Input variable
Adjustment
Zero adjustable -20 … +95 % of the nominal measuring range
Span adjustable 3.3 … +120 % of the nominal measuring range
Recommended max. turn down 10:1
Nominal measuring ranges and overload resistance
Nominal range Overload, max. pressure6) Overload, min. pressure

Gauge pressure

0 … 0.1 bar/0 … 10 kPa 15 bar/1500 kPa -0.2 bar/-20 kPa

0 … 0.2 bar/0 … 20 kPa 20 bar/2000 kPa -0.4 bar/-40 kPa

0 … 0.4 bar/0 … 40 kPa 30 bar/3000 kPa -0.8 bar/-80 kPa

0 … 1 bar/0 … 100 kPa 35 bar/3500 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

0 … 2.5 bar/0 … 250 kPa 50 bar/5000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

0 … 5 bar/0 … 500 kPa 65 bar/6500 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

0 … 10 bar/0 … 1000 kPa 90 bar/9000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

0 … 25 bar/0 … 2500 kPa 130 bar/13000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

0 … 60 bar/0 … 6000 kPa 200 bar/20000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

-1 … 0 bar/-100 … 0 kPa 35 bar/3500 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

-1 … 1.5 bar/-100 … 150 kPa 50 bar/5000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

-1 … 5 bar/-100 … 500 kPa 65 bar/6500 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

-1 … 10 bar/-100 … 1000 kPa 90 bar/9000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

-1 … 25 bar/-100 … 2500 kPa 130 bar/13000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

-1 … 60 bar/-100 … 6000 kPa 300 bar/30000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

-0.05 … 0.05 bar/-5 … 5 kPa 15 bar/1500 kPa -0.2 bar/-20 kPa

28432-EN-070718

-0.1 … 0.1 bar/-10 … 10 kPa 20 bar/2000 kPa -0.4 bar/-40 kPa

6) Limited to 200 bar according to the pressure device directive.

Q-Pulse
28 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 287
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

Nominal range Overload, max. pres- Overload, min. pressure

sure6)

-0.2 … 0.2 bar/-20 … 20 kPa 30 bar/3000 kPa -0.8 bar/-80 kPa

-0.5 … 0.5 bar/-50 … 50 kPa 35 bar/3500 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa

Absolute pressure

0 … 0.1 bar/0 … 10 kPa 15 bar/1500 kPa

0 … 1 bar/0 … 100 kPa 35 bar/3500 kPa

0 … 2.5 bar/0 … 250 kPa 50 bar/5000 kPa

0 … 5 bar/0 … 500 kPa 65 bar/6500 kPa

0 … 10 bar/0 … 1000 kPa 90 bar/9000 kPa

0 … 25 bar/0 … 2500 kPa 130 bar/13000 kPa

0 … 60 bar/0 … 6000 kPa 200 bar/20000 kPa

Reference conditions and influencing variables (similar to DIN EN 60770-1)

Reference conditions according to DIN EN 61298-1
- Temperature +15 … +25 °C (+59 … +77 °F)
- Relative humidity 45 … 75 %
- Air pressure 860 … 1060 mbar/86 … 106 kPa
(12.5 … 15.4 psi)
Determination of characteristics Limit point adjustment according to
IEC 61298-2
Characteristics linear
Reference installation position upright, diaphragm points downward
Influence of the installation position <0.2 mbar/20 Pa (0.003 psi)

Deviation determined according to the limit point method according to IEC 607707)
Applies to digital HART interface as well as to analogue current output 4 … 20 mA.
Specifications refer to the set span. Turn down (TD) = nominal measuring range/set span.
Deviation
- Turn down 1:1 up to 5:1 <0.075 %
- Turn down up to 10:1 <0.015 % x TD
Deviation with absolutely flush process fittings EV, FT
- Turn down 1:1 up to 5:1 <0.05 %
28432-EN-070718

- Turn down up to 10:1 <0.01 % x TD

7) Incl. non-linearity, hysteresis and non-repeatability.

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 288 of 29
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

Deviation with absolute pressure measuring range 0.1 bar

- Turn down 1:1 up to 5:1 <0.25 % x TD
- Turn down up to 10:1 <0.05 % x TD

Influence of the product or ambient temperature

Applies to digital HART interface as well as to analogue current output 4 … 20 mA.
Specifications refer to the set span. Turn down (TD) = nominal measuring range/set span.
Average temperature coefficient of the zero signal
In the compensated temperature range of 0 … +100 °C (+212 °F), reference temperature
20 °C (68 °F):
Average temperature coefficient of the zero signal
- Turn down 1:1 <0.05 %/10 K
- Turn down 1:1 up to 5:1 <0.1 %/10 K
- Turn down up to 10:1 <0.15 %/10 K
Outside the compensated temperature range:
Average temperature coefficient of the zero signal
- Turn down 1:1 typ. <0.05 %/10 K
Thermal change of the current output
Applies also to the analogue 4 … 20 mA current output and refers to the set span.
Thermal change, current output <0.15 % at -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F)

Long-term stability (similar to DIN 16086, DINV 19259-1 and IEC 60770-1)
Applies to digital HART interface as well as to analogue current output 4 … 20 mA.
Specifications refer to the set span. Turn down (TD) = nominal measuring range/set span.
Long-term drift of the zero signal <(0.1 % x TD)/1 year

Total deviation (similar to DIN 16086)

The total deviation (max. practical deviation) is the sum of basic accuracy and long-term
stability:
Ftotal= Fperf + Fstab
Fperf = √((FT)2 + (FKl)2)
With
- Ftotal: Total deviation
Fperf: Basic accuracy
28432-EN-070718

-
- Fstab: Long-term drift

Q-Pulse
30 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 289
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

- FT: Temperature coefficient (influ-

ence of medium or ambient tem-
perature)
- FKl: Deviation

Ambient conditions
Ambient, storage and transport temperature
- Connection cable PE -40 … +60 °C (-40 … +140 °F)
- Connection cable PUR, FEP -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F)

Process conditions
The specifications of the pressure stage are used as an overview. The specifications on the
type plate are applicable.
Pressure stage, process fitting
- Thread 316L PN 60
- Thread Alu PN 25
- Hygienic fittings 316L PN 10, PN 16, PN 25, PN 40
- Flange 316L, flange with extension PN 40 or 150 lbs, 300 lbs
316L
Product temperature depending on the measuring cell seal
- FKM (e.g. Viton) -20 … +100 °C (-4 … +212 °F)
- EPDM -40 … +100 °C (-40 … +212 °F), 1 h: 140 °C/
284 °F cleaning temperature
- Kalrez 6375 (FFKM) -10 … +100 °C (+14 … +212 °F)
- Chemraz 535 -30 … +100 °C (-22 … +212 °F)
Vibration resistance mechanical vibrations with 4 g and 5 … 100 Hz8)
Shock resistance Acceleration 100 g/6 ms9)

Electromechanical data
Connection cable
- Configuration four wires, one suspension cable, one breather
capillary, screen braiding, metal foil, mantle
- Wire cross-section 0.5 mm² (AWG no. 20)
- wire resistance <0.036 Ohm/m (0.011 Ohm/ft)
- Standard length 6 m (19.685 ft)
28432-EN-070718

- max. length with VEGADIS 12 200 m (656.168 ft)

8) Tested according to the regulations of German Lloyd, GL directive 2.

9) Tested according to EN 60068-2-27.

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 290 of 31
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

- Min. bending radius at 25 °C/77 °F 25 mm (0.985 in)

- Diameter approx. 8 mm (0.315 in)
- Colour - standard PE Black
- Colour - standard PUR Blue
- Colour - Ex-version Blue

Voltage supply
Supply voltage
- Non-Ex instrument 12 … 36 V DC
- EEx ia instrument 12 … 29 V DC
Permissible residual ripple
- <100 Hz Uss <1 V
- 100 Hz … 10 kHz Uss <10 mV
Load see diagram

Ω
1000

710
3
500

1 2
250

4
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 29 30 32 34 36 V

Fig. 10: Voltage diagram VEGABAR 74

1 HART load
2 Voltage limit Ex instrument
3 Voltage limit non-Ex instrument
4 Voltage supply

Load in conjunction with VEGADIS 12 see diagram

28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
32 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 291
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

Ω
712,5

3
450

2
1
250

4
18 24 29 33 36 V

Fig. 11: Voltage diagram VEGABAR 74 with VEGADIS 12

1 HART load
2 Voltage limit Ex instrument
3 Voltage limit non-Ex instrument
4 Voltage supply

Integrated overvoltage protection

Nominal leakage current (8/20 µs) 10 kA
Min. response time <25 ns

Electrical protective measures

Protection IP 68 (25 bar)/IP 69K
Overvoltage category III
Protection class III

Approvals10)
ATEX ia ATEX II 1G EEx ia IIC T6; ATEX II 2G
EEx ia IIC T6
Ship approvals GL, LRS, ABS, CCS, RINA, DNV
Others WHG
28432-EN-070718

10) Deviating data in Ex applications: see separate safety instructions.

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 292 of 33
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

10.2 Dimensions

VEGABAR 74 - threaded fitting

111,5 mm (4 25/64")

ø 41,6 mm
(1 41/64")
253 mm (9 61/64")

252 mm (9 59/64")

215,5 mm (8 31/64")
SW 27mm SW 46 mm
23 mm
(29/32")

22 mm
20 mm

(25/64")
(25/64")

(1 1/16") SW 27mm (1 13/16")

(1 1/16")
G½A G½A G1½A
NPT1½
3 mm
(1/8")

ø 3 mm (1/8") ø 55 mm
ø 6 mm (15/64") (2 11/64")

GV GI GG/GN

64,5 mm
(2 35/64")
263,5 mm (10 3/8")

255 mm (10 3/64")

69,5 mm
(2 47/64")

SW 46 mm
(1 13/16")
70 mm (2 3/4")

SW 27mm
25 mm
(63/64")

G1½A (1 1/16")

½”NPT
15 mm
(19/32")

ø 55 mm ¼”NPT GG
(2 11/64")

GM GR
28432-EN-070718

Fig. 12: VEGABAR 74 threaded fitting: GV = G½ A manometer connection EN 837, GI = G½ A inner G¼ A, GG = G1½ A,
GN = 1½ NPT, GM = G1½ A 70 mm, GR = ½ NPT inner ¼ NPT

Q-Pulse
34 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 293
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

VEGABAR 74 - hygienic fitting 1

111,5 mm (4 25/64")

218,5 mm (8 39/64")
ø 41,6 mm
217 mm (8 35/64")

217 mm (8 35/64")
(1 41/64")

SW 46 mm
(1 13/16")

ø 51 mm ø 64 mm ø 78 mm
(2 1/64") (2 33/64") (3 5/64")
CC CA LA
218,5 mm (8 39/64")

218,5 mm (8 39/64")

217 mm (8 35/64")

SW 46 mm SW 46 mm
(1 13/16") (1 13/16")

ø 84 mm ø 66 mm ø 78 mm / ø 92 mm
(3 5/16") (2 19/32" ) (3 5/64" / 3 5/8")

TA TB RA/RB

Fig. 13: VEGABAR 74 hygienic fitting: CC = Tri-Clamp 1½", CA = Tri-Clamp 2", LA = hygienic fitting with compression nut
F40, TA = Tuchenhagen Varivent DN 32, TB = Tuchenhagen Varivent DN 25, RA/RB = bolting DN 40/DN 50 according to
DIN 11851
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 294 of 35
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

VEGABAR 74 - hygienic fitting 2

217 mm (8 35/64")

217 mm (8 35/64")
217 mm (8 35/64")
ø 41,6 mm
(1 41/64")

SW 75 mm
(2 61/64")
G1A

KA ø 60 mm ø 66 mm
(2 23/64") (2 19/32")
ø 95 mm ø 105 mm
(3 47/64") (4 9/64")
KH AA
217 mm (8 35/64")

222,5 mm (8 49/64")

169 mm (6 21/32")

(2 7/16")
62 mm

ø 70 mm
(2 3/4")
ø 150 mm ø 86 mm
(5 29/32") (3 25/64")
AB SD/SE

Fig. 14: VEGABAR 74 KA/KH = cone DN 40, AA = DRD, SD/SE = Anderson 3" long/short fitting
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
36 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 295
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

VEGABAR 74 - flange connection

197,5 mm (7 25/32")

ø 41,6 mm
(1 41/64")

d2

b
f

d4 RL
k
D
EA, FB, FE, FQ, FH, FI d5
TV, TS

1 DN PN D b k d2 d4 f RL d5
EA 40 40 5 29/32" 45/64" 4 21/64" 4xø 45/64" 3 15/32" 1/8" - -
FB 50 40 6 1/2" 25/32" 4 59/64" 4xø 45/64" 4 1/64" 1/8" - -
FE 80 40 7 7/8" 15/16" 6 19/64" 8xø 45/64" 5 7/16" 1/8" - -

2 " lbs D b k d2 d4 f RL d5
FQ 1 ½" 150 5" 11/16" 3 14/16" 4xø 5/8" 2 7/8" 1/8" - -
FH 2" 150 6" 3/4" 4 3/4" 4xø 5/8" 3 5/8" 1/8" - -
FI 3" 150 7 1/2" 3/4" 6 4xø 5/8" 6 1/8" - -

3 DN PN D b k d2 d4 f RL d5
TV 50 40 6 1/2" 25/32" 4 59/64" 4xø 45/64" 4 1/64" 1/8" 4 1 1/2"
TS 80 40 7 7/8" 15/16" 6 19/64" 8xø 45/64" 5 7/16" 1/8" 1 1/2"

Fig. 15: VEGABAR 74 - flange connection

1 Flange connection according to DIN 2501
2 Flange fitting according to ANSI B16.5
3 Flange with extension
4 Order-specific
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 296 of 37
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

VEGABAR 74 - threaded fitting for paper industry

64,5mm
(2 35/64")

215,5mm (8 31/64")

ø 41,6mm
(1 41/64")

174mm (6 27/32")
SW46

M44x1,25

BA/BB

Fig. 16: VEGABAR 74 - connection for paper industry: BA/BB = M44x1.25

28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
38 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 297
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

VEGABAR 74 - extension fitting for paper industry

64,5 mm
(2 35/64")
175 mm (6 57/64")

ø 41,6 mm

134 mm (5 9/32")
(1 41/64")

ø 85 mm
(3 11/32")

(45/64")
18 mm
ø 14 mm
(35/64")
(5/64")
2 mm
(29/32")
23 mm

ø 48 mm
(1 57/64")
ø 115 mm
(4 17/32")
FT/EV
154 mm (6 1/16")

ø 41,6 mm
(1 41/64")
16 mm
(5/8")

ø 115 mm
(4 17/32")
L

ø 38 mm
(1 1/2")

EG

Fig. 17: VEGABAR 74 - extension fitting for paper industry: EV/FT = absolutely flush for pulper (EV 2-times flattened), EG =
extension for ball valve fitting (L = order-specific)
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 298 of 39
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

10.3 Industrial property rights

VEGA product lines are global protected by industrial property rights.
Further information see http://www.vega.com.
Only in U.S.A.: Further information see patent label at the sensor housing.

VEGA Produktfamilien sind weltweit geschützt durch gewerbliche Schutzrechte.

Nähere Informationen unter http://www.vega.com.

Les lignes de produits VEGA sont globalement protégées par des droits de
propriété intellectuelle.
Pour plus d'informations, on pourra se référer au site http://www.vega.com.

VEGA lineas de productos están protegidas por los derechos en el campo de la

propiedad industrial.
Para mayor información revise la pagina web http://www.vega.com.

Линии продукции фирмы ВЕГА защищаются по всему миру правами на

интеллектуальную собственность.
Дальнейшую информацию смотрите на сайте http://www.vega.com.

VEGA系列产品在全球享有知识产权保护。
进一步信息请参见网站<http://www.vega.com>。

10.4 Trademark
All brands used as well as trade and company names are
property of their lawful proprietor/originator.

28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
40 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 299
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 300 of 41
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
42 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 VEGABAR 74 - Page 301
4 … 20 of 372
mA/HART
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement
28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse
VEGABAR Id TMS484
74 - 4 … 20 mA/HART Active 03/12/2013 Page 302 of 43
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

VEGA Grieshaber KG
Am Hohenstein 113
77761 Schiltach
Germany
Phone +49 7836 50-0
Fax +49 7836 50-201
E-mail: [email protected]
www.vega.com

ISO 9001

All statements concerning scope of delivery, application,

practical use and operating conditions of the sensors and
processing systems correspond to the information avail-
able at the time of printing.

© VEGA Grieshaber KG, Schiltach/Germany 2007

Subject to change without prior notice 28432-EN-070718

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 303 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Operating Instructions
VEGADIS 12

Indication
and adjustment

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 304 of 372

St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Content

Content
1 About this document
1.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Symbolism used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2 For your safety

2.1 Authorised personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.2 Appropriate use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.3 Warning about misuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.4 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.5 Safety approval markings and safety tips . . . .. 5
2.6 CE conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.7 Safety instructions for Ex areas . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.8 Environmental instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6

3 Product description
3.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7
3.2 Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8
3.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8
3.4 Packaging, transport and storage . . . . . . . . . .. 9

4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2 Mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

5 Connecting to power supply

5.1 Preparing the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5.2 Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.3 Wiring plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

6 Set up
6.1 Adjustment of the pressure transmitter . . . . . . . 16
6.2 Indication scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

7 Maintenance and fault rectification

7.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.2 Remove interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.3 Instrument repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

8 Dismounting
20591-EN-071128

8.1 Dismounting steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

8.2 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Q-Pulse
2 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
305 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Content

9 Supplement
9.1 Technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 306 of 372
3
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

About this document

1 About this document

1.1 Function
This operating instructions manual provides all the information
you need for mounting, connection and setup as well as
important instructions for maintenance and fault rectification.
Please read this information before putting the instrument into
operation and keep this manual accessible in the immediate
vicinity of the device.

1.2 Target group

This operating instructions manual is directed to trained,
qualified personnel. The contents of this manual should be
made available to these personnel and put into practice by
them.

1.3 Symbolism used

Information, tip, note
This symbol indicates helpful additional information.

Caution: If this warning is ignored, faults or malfunc-

tions can result.
Warning: If this warning is ignored, injury to persons and/or
serious damage to the instrument can result.
Danger: If this warning is ignored, serious injury to persons
and/or destruction of the instrument can result.

Ex applications
This symbol indicates special instructions for Ex applications.

l List
The dot set in front indicates a list with no implied sequence.

à Action
This arrow indicates a single action.

1 Sequence
Numbers set in front indicate successive steps in a procedure.
20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
4 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
307 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

For your safety

2 For your safety

2.1 Authorised personnel
All operations described in this operating instructions manual
must be carried out only by trained specialist personnel
authorised by the operator.
During work on and with the device the required personal
protection equipment must always be worn.

2.2 Appropriate use

VEGADIS 12 is an adjustment and indicating unit for VEGA
pressure transmitters.

2.3 Warning about misuse

Inappropriate or incorrect use of the instrument can give rise to
application-specific hazards, e.g. vessel overfill or damage to
system components through incorrect mounting or adjustment.

2.4 General safety instructions

This is a high-tech instrument requiring the strict observance of
standard regulations and guidelines. The user must take note
of the safety instructions in this operating instructions manual,
the country-specific installation standards as well as all
prevailing safety regulations and accident prevention rules.
The instrument must only be operated in a technically flawless
and reliable condition. The operator is responsible for trouble-
free operation of the instrument.
During the entire duration of use, the user is obliged to
determine the compliance of the required occupational safety
measures with the current valid rules and regulations and also
take note of new regulations.

2.5 Safety approval markings and safety tips

The safety approval markings and safety tips on the device
must be observed.
20591-EN-071128

2.6 CE conformity
VEGADIS 12 is in CE conformity with EMC (89/336/EWG) and
LVD (73/23/EWG) and fulfills NAMUR recommendation NE 21.

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 308 of 372
5
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

For your safety

Conformity has been judged according to the following

standards:
l EMC:
- Emission EN 50081
- Susceptibility EN 50082
l LVD: EN 61010

2.7 Safety instructions for Ex areas

Please note the Ex-specific safety information for installation
and operation in Ex areas. These safety instructions are part of
the operating instructions manual and come with the Ex-
approved instruments.

2.8 Environmental instructions

Protection of the environment is one of our most important
duties. That is why we have introduced an environment
management system with the goal of continuously improving
company environmental protection. The environment man-
agement system is certified according to DIN EN ISO 14001.
Please help us fulfil this obligation by observing the environ-
mental instructions in this manual:
l Chapter "Packaging, transport and storage"
l Chapter "Disposal"

20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
6 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
309 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Product description

3 Product description
3.1 Configuration
Scope of delivery The scope of delivery encompasses:
l Indicating and adjustment unit VEGADIS 12
l Documentation
- this operating instructions manual
- Ex-specific "Safety instructions" (with Ex-versions)
- if necessary, further certificates

Components VEGADIS 12 consists of the following components:

l Housing with adjustment elements
l Housing cover with integrated indicating module

1
2
TRANSMITTER
OPERATE
t
i
ZERO
SPAN 3
+ - -
TRANSMITTER NOT USED 4...20mA
+
VEGADIS 12

Fig. 1: VEGADIS 12 without display

1 Adjustment insert
2 Cover
3 Housing
4 Breather facility
20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 310 of 372
7
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Product description

1 2
3
TRANSMITTER DISPLAY
OPERATE OPERATE
t ZERO

4
i
ZERO END
SPAN POINT

+ - -
TRANSMITTER DISPLAY 4...20mA
+
VEGADIS 12

Fig. 2: VEGADIS 12 with display

1 Adjustment insert
2 Indication
3 Cover
4 Housing
5 Breather facility

3.2 Principle of operation

Area of application VEGADIS 12 is an adjustment and indicating unit for the
following VEGA pressure transmitters:
l VEGAWELL 72 4 … 20 mA/HART
l VEGABAR 74 4 … 20 mA/HART
l VEGABAR 75 4 … 20 mA/HART
Functional principle VEGADIS 12 has the following functions:
l atmospheric pressure compensation for the pressure
transmitter
l Adjustment of the pressure transmitter
l Indication of the measured value (optional)
Supply VEGADIS 12 is looped in the supply and signal circuit of the
pressure transmitter and requires no separate external energy.
Connection is carried out via screw terminals in the housing.

3.3 Operation
As a standard feature, VEGADIS 12 is equipped with an
adjustment module for the pressure transmitter. The optional
indication is located in the housing cover and is equipped with
a bargraf and a digital indication. In this version, the additional
20591-EN-071128

adjustment elements for scaling of the indication are inte-

grated.

Q-Pulse
8 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
311 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Product description

3.4 Packaging, transport and storage

Packaging Your instrument was protected by packaging during transport.
Its capacity to handle normal loads during transport is assured
by a test according to DIN EN 24180.
The packaging of standard instruments consists of environ-
ment-friendly, recyclable cardboard. For special versions, PE
foam or PE foil is also used. Dispose of the packaging material
via specialised recycling companies.

Transport Transport must be carried out under consideration of the notes

on the transport packaging. Nonobservance of these instruc-
tions can cause damage to the device.

Transport inspection The delivery must be checked for completeness and possible
transit damage immediately at receipt. Ascertained transit
damage or concealed defects must be appropriately dealt
with.

Storage Up to the time of installation, the packages must be left closed

and stored according to the orientation and storage markings
on the outside.
Unless otherwise indicated, the packages must be stored only
under the following conditions:
l Not in the open
l Dry and dust free
l Not exposed to corrosive media
l Protected against solar radiation
l Avoiding mechanical shock and vibration
Storage and transport tem- l Storage and transport temperature see "Supplement -
perature Technical data - Ambient conditions"
l Relative humidity 20 … 85 %
20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 312 of 372
9
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Mounting

4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions
Installation position VEGADIS 12 can be mounted in any position. However,
vertical mounting is recommended. This avoids pollution of the
breather facility and moisture penetration.

Note:
There must be the same atmospheric pressure on the breather
facility as well as on the measurement loop. Otherwise the
measured value can be adulterated.

Moisture Use the recommended cables (see chapter "Connecting to

power supply") and tighten the cable gland.

4.2 Mounting instructions

Mounting versions VEGADIS 12 can be mounted as follows:
l on carrier rail 35 x 7.5 according to EN 50022
l on mounting plate or on the wall

20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
10 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
313 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Connecting to power supply

5 Connecting to power supply

5.1 Preparing the connection
Note safety instructions Always keep in mind the following safety instructions:
l Connect only in the complete absence of line voltage
Take note of safety In hazardous areas you should take note of the appropriate
instructions for Ex regulations, conformity and type approval certificates of the
applications sensors and power supply units.

Selecting connection cable VEGABOX 01 or VEGADIS 12 is connected with standard two-

wire cable without screen. An outer cable diameter of 5 … 9 mm
ensures the seal effect of the cable entry. If electromagnetic
interference is expected which is above the test values of
EN 61326 for industrial areas, we recommend the use of
screened cable.
20591-EN-071128

Fig. 3: Connection of VEGADIS 12 to the sensor

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 314 of 11
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Connecting to power supply

Select connection Take note of the corresponding installation regulations for Ex

cable for Ex applica- applications.
tions

Cable screening and ground- If screened cable is necessary, connect the cable screen on
ing both ends to ground potential. In VEGABOX 01 or in
VEGADIS 12, the screen must be connected directly to the
internal ground terminal. The ground terminal outside on the
housing must be connected to the potential equalisation.
If potential equalisation currents are expected, the connection
on the processing side must be made via a ceramic capacitor
(e. g. 1 nF, 1500 V). The low frequency potential equalisation
currents are thus suppressed, but the protective effect against
high frequency interference signals remains.

Cable screen and grounding In Ex applications, one-sided grounding on the sensor is

for Ex applications recommended, see EN 60079-14.

5.2 Connection procedure

Proceed as follows:
1 Unscrew the housing cover
2 Loosen compression nut of the cable entry
3 Remove approx. 10 cm of the cable mantle, strip approx.
1 cm insulation from the individual wires
4 Insert the cable into VEGADIS 12 through the cable entry
5 Loosen screw terminals with a screwdriver
6 Insert the wire ends into the open terminals according to
the wiring plan
7 Tighten screw terminals again
8 Check the hold of the wires in the terminals by lightly
pulling on them
9 Connect the screen to the ground terminal
10 Connect the ground terminal outside on the housing
according to specification (low impedance)
11 Tighten the compression nut of the cable entry. The seal
ring must completely encircle the cable
12 Screw the housing cover on
The electrical connection is finished.
20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
12 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
315 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Connecting to power supply

5.3 Wiring plan

Wire assignment, connection
cable pressure transmitter
5
1
2
3
4

Fig. 4: Wire assignment, connection cable

1 brown (+): to power supply or to the processing system
2 blue (-): to power supply or to the processing system
3 yellow: for adjustment information of VEGADIS 12
4 Screen
5 Breather capillaries with filter element

Connection of VEGADIS 12
without display

TRANSMITTER
OPERATE
ti

ZERO
SPAN

5
4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 10 11 12
+ -
TRANSMITTER NOT USED 4...20mA
+
VEGADIS 12

+
3 – 1

– 2

Fig. 5: Terminal assignment, VEGADIS 12

1 To power supply or the processing system
2 Control instrument (4 … 20 mA measurement)
3 Screen1)
4 Breather capillaries
5 Suspension cable
20591-EN-071128

1) Connect screen to ground terminal. Connect ground terminal on the outside

of the housing as prescribed. The two terminals are galvanically connected.

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 316 of 13
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Connecting to power supply

Wire number Wire colour/Polarity Terminal VEGADIS

12

1 brown (+) 1

2 blue (-) 2

3 Yellow 3

Connection of VEGADIS 12
with display
TRANSMITTER DISPLAY

OPERATE OPERATE
t
i ZERO
ZERO END
SPAN POINT

5
4 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 10 11 12
+ -
TRANSMITTER DUSPLAY 4...20mA
+
VEGADIS 12

+
3 – 1

6 – 2

Fig. 6: Terminal assignment, VEGADIS 12

1 To power supply or the processing system
2 Control instrument (4 … 20 mA measurement)
3 Screen2)
4 Breather capillaries
5 Suspension cable
6 for indication

Wire number Wire colour/Polarity Terminal VEGADIS

12

1 brown (+) 1

2 blue (-) 2

3 Yellow 3
20591-EN-071128

2) Connect screen to ground terminal. Connect ground terminal on the outside

of the housing as prescribed. The two terminals are galvanically connected.

Q-Pulse
14 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
317 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Connecting to power supply

Wire number Wire colour Terminal VEGADIS

12

5 Red 5

6 White 6

7 Violet 7

8 Orange 8
20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 318 of 15
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Set up

6 Set up

6.1 Adjustment of the pressure transmitter

Adjustment volume l zero - measuring range begin
l span - measuring range end
l ti - Integration time
Adjustment elements

TRANSMITTER 2
1 OPERATE
ti

ZERO
SPAN

3
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 10 11 12
+ - -
TRANSMITTER 4...20mA
not used
+
VEGADIS 12

Fig. 7: Adjustment elements of VEGADIS 12 without display

1 Rotary switch: choose the requested function
2 [+] key, change value (rising)
3 [-] key, change value (falling)

2 4

TRANSMITTER DISPLAY 5
1 OPERATE OPERATE
ti ZERO

ZERO END
SPAN POINT
6
3
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 10 11 12
+ - -
TRANSMITTER 4...20mA
DISPLAY
+
VEGADIS 12

Fig. 8: Adjustment elements of VEGADIS 12 with display

1 Rotary switch pressure transmitter: Select requested function
2 [+] key, change adjustment value (rising)
20591-EN-071128

3 [-] key, change adjustment value (falling)

4 Rotary switch indication: choose the requested function
5 [+] key, change scaling (rising)
6 [-] key, change scaling (falling)

Q-Pulse
16 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
319 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Set up

Adjustment system l The requested function is selected with the rotary switches
l With the [+] and [-] keys the signal current or the
integration time is set or the indication is scaled
l The respective rotary switch is finally set to position
"OPERATE"
The set values are transmitted to the EEPROM memory and
remain there even in case of voltage loss.

Adjustment steps, adjustment Proceed as follows for adjustment with VEGADIS 12:
1 Open housing cover
2 Connect hand multimeter to terminals 10 and 12
3 Meas. range begin: Set rotary switch to "zero"
4 Empty the vessel or reduce process pressure
5 Set a current of 4 mA with the [+] and [-] keys
6 Meas. range end: Set rotary switch to "span"
7 Fill the vessel or increase process pressure
8 Set a current of 20 mA with the [+] and [-] keys
9 Operation: Set rotary switch to "OPERATE"
10 Close the housing cover
The adjustment data are effective, the output current 4 … 20 mA
corresponds to the actual level or pressure.

Information:
The corresponding current values must be calculated and set
respectively for adjustment with part fillings or emptyings.
Example: For a part emptying of 25 %, a current of 4 mA +
4 mA = 8 mA must be set, for a part filling of 75 %, a current of
4 mA + 12 mA = 16 mA. VEGADIS 12 then calculates the
values for full and empty.

Adjustment steps, integration Proceed as follows for the adjustment of the integration time
time with VEGADIS 12:
1 Open housing cover
2 Set rotary switch to "ti"
3 Make sure that the integration time is set to 0 sec by
pressing the [-] key 10 times.
20591-EN-071128

4 For every 1 sec. requested integration time, push the [+]

key once.

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 320 of 17
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Set up

5 The integration time is the time required by the output

current signal to reach 90 % of the actual height after a
sudden level change.
6 Set rotary switch to "OPERATE"
7 Close the housing cover

6.2 Indication scaling

Indicating elements
2
1

Fig. 9: Indicating elements of VEGADIS 12

1 Bar graph
2 Tendency indication
3 Digital value
l four positions as well as signa and decimal point
l individual scaling between -9999 … +9999

The display outputs the current 4 … 20 mA as bar graph and

digital value.
With 4 mA no segment of the bar graph appears, with 20 mA
all segments appear. This assignment is fix.
You can scale the digital value to any value between -9999 …
+9999 via the adjustment module.

Adjustment steps, scaling To scale, proceed as follows:

1 Open housing cover
2 Initial value: Set rotary switch to "zero"
3 Set the requested value, e.g. 0 with the [+] and [-] keys
4 Final value: Set the rotary switch to "span"
5 Set the requested value, e.g. 1000 with the [+] and [-] keys
6 Decimal point: Set the rotary switch to "point"
7 With the [+] and [-] keys you can adjust the requested
value, e.g. 8888 (no decimal point)
20591-EN-071128

8 Set rotary switch to "OPERATE"

9 Close the housing cover

Q-Pulse
18 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
321 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Set up

The adjustment data are effective, the output current 4 … 20 mA

corresponds to the actual level.
20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 322 of 19
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Maintenance and fault rectification

7 Maintenance and fault rectification

7.1 Maintenance
When used as directed in normal operation, VEGADIS 12 is
completely maintenance free.

7.2 Remove interferences

Reaction in case of failures The operator of the system is responsible for taken suitable
measures to remove interferences.

Causes of malfunction VEGADIS 12 offers maximum reliability. Nevertheless faults

can occur during operation. These may be caused by the
following, e.g.:
l Sensor
l Process
l Supply
l Signal processing
Fault rectification The first measure to take is to check the output signal as well
as the atmospheric pressure compensation. The procedure is
described below. Further comprehensive diagnostics can be
carried out on a PC with the software PACTware™ and the
suitable DTM. In many cases, the causes can be determined in
this way and faults can be rectified.

24 hour service hotline However, if these measures are not successful, call the VEGA
service hotline in urgent cases under the phone no. +49 1805
858550.
The hotline is available to you 7 days a week round-the-clock.
Since we offer this service world-wide, the support is only
available in the English language. The service is free of
charge, only the standard telephone costs will be charged.

Check pressure compensa- First of all open the housing cover. The indicated measured
tion value must not change. However, if the indicated value
changes nevertheless, the compensation of the atmospheric
pressure is not ensured. Check the breather facility on the
housing and the capillaries in the special cable.

Checking the 4 … 20 mA sig- Connect a handheld multimeter in the suitable measuring

nal range according to the wiring plan.
20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
20 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
323 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Maintenance and fault rectification

? 4 … 20 mA signal not stable

l Level fluctuations
à Adjust integration time via PACTware™
l no atmospheric pressure compensation
à Check the capillaries and cut them clean
à Check the pressure compensation in the housing and
clean the filter element, if necessary

? 4 … 20 mA signal missing
l Wrong connection to power supply
à Check connection according to chapter "Connection
steps" and if necessary, correct according to chapter
"Wiring plan"
l No voltage supply
à Check cables for breaks; repair if necessary
l supply voltage too low or load resistance too high
à Check, adapt if necessary

? Current signal 3.6 mA; 22 mA

l electronics module or measuring cell defective
à Exchange instrument or return instrument for repair

In Ex applications, the regulations for the wiring of intrinsically

safe circuits must be observed.

Reaction after fault rectifica- Depending on the failure reason and measures taken, the
tion steps described in chapter "Set up" must be carried out again,
if necessary.

7.3 Instrument repair

If a repair is necessary, please proceed as follows:
You can download a return form (23 KB) from the Internet on
our homepage www.vega.com under: "Downloads - Forms
and certificates - Repair form".
By doing this you help us carry out the repair quickly and
without having to call for needed information.
20591-EN-071128

l Print and fill out one form per instrument

l Clean the instrument and pack it damage-proof

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 324 of 21
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Maintenance and fault rectification

l Attach the completed form and, if need be, also a safety

data sheet outside on the packaging
l Please ask the agency serving you for the address of your
return shipment. You can find the respective agency on our
website www.vega.com under: "Company - VEGA world-
wide"

20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
22 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
325 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Dismounting

8 Dismounting
8.1 Dismounting steps

Warning:
Before dismounting, be aware of dangerous process con-
ditions such as e.g. pressure in the vessel, high temperatures,
corrosive or toxic products etc.

Take note of chapters "Mounting" and "Connecting to power

supply" and carry out the listed steps in reverse order.

8.2 Disposal
The instrument consists of materials which can be recycled by
specialised recycling companies. We use recyclable materials
and have designed the electronics to be easily separable.
WEEE directive 2002/96/EG
This instrument is not subject to the WEEE directive 2002/96/
EG and the respective national laws. Pass the instrument
directly on to a specialised recycling company and do not use
the municipal collecting points. These may be used only for
privately used products according to the WEEE directive.
Correct disposal avoids negative effects to persons and
environment and ensures recycling of useful raw materials.
Materials: see chapter "Technical data"
If you cannot dispose of the instrument properly, please
contact us about disposal methods or return.
20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 326 of 23
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

9 Supplement
9.1 Technical data
General data
316L corresponds to 1.4404 or 1.4435, 316Ti corresponds to 1.4571
Materials
- Housing plastic PBT
- Ground terminal 316Ti/316L
- Inspection window of the indication
Weight approx. 0.5 kg (1.102 lbs)

Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
- without display -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F)
- with display -20 … +70 °C (-40 … +158 °F)
Storage and transport temperature -40 … +85 °C (-40 … +185 °F)

Electromechanical data
Cable gland 2 x cable entry M20 x 1.5 (cable-ø 5 … 9 mm)
Screw terminals for wire cross-section up to 2.5 mm² (AWG 14)

Indicating and adjustment elements

Adjustment elements 2 x 2 keys, 2 x 1 rotary switch
Adjustment elements with display 2 keys, 1 rotary switch
Display (optional) LC multiple function display with bar graph (20
segments, digital value 4-digit), tendency in-
dicator for rising or falling values

Adjustment circuit
Connection to VEGAWELL 72 4 … 20 mA/HART, VEGABAR
74, VEGABAR 75
Connection cable to the sensor VEGA special cable with breather capillaries
Cable length max. 200 m

Voltage supply
20591-EN-071128

Supply voltage
- without display 12 … 36 V DC
- with display 17 … 36 V DC

Q-Pulse
24 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
327 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

Load without display see diagram in the operating instructions

manual of the respective sensor

Electrical protective measures

Protection IP 65
Overvoltage category III
Protection class III

Approvals3)
ATEX ia ATEX II 2G EEx ia IIC T6
20591-EN-071128

3) Deviating data in Ex applications: see separate safety instructions.

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 328 of 25
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

9.2 Dimensions

VEGADIS 12 without display

100mm (3 15/16") 72mm (2 53/64")

139mm (5 15/32")

130mm (5 1/8")
Fig. 10: VEGADIS 12 without display (protective cover optional)

VEGADIS 12 with display

38mm 82mm (3 15/64")

/6 m

(1 1/2")
( 13 5m
4"
)
ø

108mm (4 1/4")

85mm (3 11/32")
118mm (4 41/64")
135mm (5 5/16")

M20x1,5

Fig. 11: VEGADIS 12 with display

20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
26 Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 PageVEGADIS
329 of 37212
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Supplement

9.3 Industrial property rights

VEGA product lines are global protected by industrial property rights.
Further information see http://www.vega.com.
Only in U.S.A.: Further information see patent label at the sensor housing.

VEGA Produktfamilien sind weltweit geschützt durch gewerbliche Schutzrechte.

Nähere Informationen unter http://www.vega.com.

Les lignes de produits VEGA sont globalement protégées par des droits de
propriété intellectuelle.
Pour plus d'informations, on pourra se référer au site http://www.vega.com.

VEGA lineas de productos están protegidas por los derechos en el campo de la

propiedad industrial.
Para mayor información revise la pagina web http://www.vega.com.

Линии продукции фирмы ВЕГА защищаются по всему миру правами на

интеллектуальную собственность.
Дальнейшую информацию смотрите на сайте http://www.vega.com.

VEGA系列产品在全球享有知识产权保护。
进一步信息请参见网站<http://www.vega.com>。

9.4 Trademark
All brands used as well as trade and company names are
property of their lawful proprietor/originator.
20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse
VEGADIS Id 12
TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 330 of 27
372
St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Printing date:

VEGA Grieshaber KG
Am Hohenstein 113
77761 Schiltach
Germany
Phone +49 7836 50-0
Fax +49 7836 50-201
E-mail: [email protected]
www.vega.com

ISO 9001

All statements concerning scope of delivery, application,

practical use and operating conditions of the sensors and
processing systems correspond to the information avail-
able at the time of printing.

© VEGA Grieshaber KG, Schiltach/Germany 2007

Subject to change without prior notice 20591-EN-071128

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 331 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

6. MISCELLANEOUS

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 332 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 333 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 334 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 335 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 336 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 337 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 338 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 339 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 340 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 341 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 342 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 343 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 344 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 345 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 346 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

7. DRAWINGS

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 347 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 348 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 349 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 350 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 351 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 352 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 353 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 354 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 355 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 356 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 357 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 358 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 359 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 360 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 361 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 362 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 363 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 364 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 365 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 366 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 367 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 368 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 369 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 370 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

8. COMPLIANCE
CERTIFCATES

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 371 of 372

 St Conel Street Nudgee SPS SP043 Electrical Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Manual (Whelan)

Q-Pulse Id TMS484 Active 03/12/2013 Page 372 of 372